Mechanical Object Reference

ANSYS, Inc. Release 2024 R1

Southpointe January 2024
2600 Ansys Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
[email protected] ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2015
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2024 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, Ansys Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2015 companies.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
About This Reference .................................................................................................................................. 1
1. What's Included in each Object Reference? .......................................................................................... 1
Object Groupings ....................................................................................................................................... 3
1. General Objects ................................................................................................................................... 3
2. Geometry Objects ............................................................................................................................... 3
3. Coordinate System .............................................................................................................................. 5
4. Connections Objects ........................................................................................................................... 5
5. Material Objects .................................................................................................................................. 6
6. Mesh Objects ...................................................................................................................................... 6
7. Symmetry Objects ............................................................................................................................... 7
8. External Model Objects ....................................................................................................................... 7
9. Imported Model Objects ..................................................................................................................... 9
10. Result Objects ................................................................................................................................. 10
11. Solution Objects .............................................................................................................................. 12
12. Analysis Specific Objects .................................................................................................................. 12
13. Virtual Features Objects ................................................................................................................... 14
Alert .......................................................................................................................................................... 15
AM Bond ................................................................................................................................................... 17
AM Process ................................................................................................................................................ 21
Analysis Ply ............................................................................................................................................... 25
Analysis Settings ...................................................................................................................................... 27
Angular Velocity ....................................................................................................................................... 29
Arbitrary Crack ......................................................................................................................................... 33
Beam ......................................................................................................................................................... 39
Beam Tool (Group) .................................................................................................................................... 45
Bearing ..................................................................................................................................................... 49
Body .......................................................................................................................................................... 55
Body Interactions ..................................................................................................................................... 63
Body Interaction ....................................................................................................................................... 65
Bolt Tool (Group) ....................................................................................................................................... 69
Boundary Conditions ................................................................................................................................ 73
Build Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 75
Chart ......................................................................................................................................................... 87
Commands (APDL) .................................................................................................................................... 91
Comment .................................................................................................................................................. 97
Composite Criterion ................................................................................................................................. 99
Composite Failure Criteria Definitions ................................................................................................... 101
Composite Failure Tool (Group) .............................................................................................................. 103
Composite Sampling Point Tool (Group) ................................................................................................ 109
Composite Sampling Point ..................................................................................................................... 113
Condensed Geometry ............................................................................................................................. 117
Condensed Part ...................................................................................................................................... 121
Connections ............................................................................................................................................ 129
Connection Group .................................................................................................................................. 133
Construction Geometry .......................................................................................................................... 139
Construction Line ................................................................................................................................... 141
Contact Debonding ................................................................................................................................ 145
Contact Region ....................................................................................................................................... 147
1. Contact Region - Most Structural Analyses ....................................................................................... 150

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
Object Reference

2. Contact Region - Explicit Dynamics Analyses .................................................................................... 152

3. Contact Region - Thermal and Electromagnetic Analyses .................................................................. 153
4. Contact Region - Rigid Body Dynamics Analyses ............................................................................... 154
Contact Tool (Group) ............................................................................................................................... 155
Convergence ........................................................................................................................................... 159
Coordinate System .................................................................................................................................. 161
Coordinate Systems (Group) ................................................................................................................... 167
Corner Crack ........................................................................................................................................... 169
Cross Sections ......................................................................................................................................... 175
Cross Section Objects ............................................................................................................................. 177
Cylindrical Crack ..................................................................................................................................... 183
Design Constraint ................................................................................................................................... 187
Distributed Mass ..................................................................................................................................... 189
Drop Height ............................................................................................................................................ 193
Edge Crack .............................................................................................................................................. 197
Element Orientation ............................................................................................................................... 203
End Release ............................................................................................................................................. 207
Environment (Group) .............................................................................................................................. 211
Elliptical Crack ........................................................................................................................................ 215
Expansion Settings ................................................................................................................................. 223
Fatigue Combination .............................................................................................................................. 227
Fatigue Tool (Group) ............................................................................................................................... 231
Figure ...................................................................................................................................................... 241
Fracture ................................................................................................................................................... 243
Fracture Tool (Group) .............................................................................................................................. 247
Fracture Probes ....................................................................................................................................... 249
Gasket Mesh Control ............................................................................................................................... 253
Gasket ..................................................................................................................................................... 255
General Axisymmetric ............................................................................................................................ 257
Generated Support ................................................................................................................................. 261
Geometry ................................................................................................................................................ 265
Geometry Imports .................................................................................................................................. 273
Global Coordinate System ...................................................................................................................... 281
Image ...................................................................................................................................................... 283
Import Summary .................................................................................................................................... 287
Imported: Bolt Pretensions and Premeshed Bolt Pretensions ............................................................... 289
Imported: Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................. 293
Imported: Composite Plies ..................................................................................................................... 299
Imported: Constraint Equations or Coupling ......................................................................................... 303
Imported: Contacts ................................................................................................................................. 307
Imported: Coordinate Systems ............................................................................................................... 311
Imported: Element Orientations (External Model) ................................................................................. 315
Imported: Flexible Remote Connectors .................................................................................................. 319
Imported: Nodal Orientations ................................................................................................................ 323
Imported: Point Masses .......................................................................................................................... 327
Imported: Rigid Remote Connectors ...................................................................................................... 331
Imported: Shell Thicknesses ................................................................................................................... 335
Imported: Spring Connectors ................................................................................................................. 339
Imported Condensed Part ...................................................................................................................... 345
Imported Element Orientation (Group) .................................................................................................. 349
Imported Element Orientation (External Data) ...................................................................................... 353

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Object Reference

Imported Load (Group) ........................................................................................................................... 359

Imported Material Fields (Group) ........................................................................................................... 369
Imported Material Field .......................................................................................................................... 373
Imported Plies ........................................................................................................................................ 379
Imported Remote Loads ......................................................................................................................... 383
Imported Thickness (Group) ................................................................................................................... 387
Imported Thickness ................................................................................................................................ 391
Imported Trace (Group) .......................................................................................................................... 395
Imported Trace ........................................................................................................................................ 399
Imported Data/Load Transfer Summary ................................................................................................. 405
Initial Conditions .................................................................................................................................... 407
Initial Physics Options ............................................................................................................................ 409
Initial Temperature ................................................................................................................................. 411
Interface Delamination ........................................................................................................................... 415
Interstage ................................................................................................................................................ 419
Joint ........................................................................................................................................................ 423
Layered Section ...................................................................................................................................... 437
Line Chart (LS-DYNA Only) ..................................................................................................................... 441
Loads, Supports, and Conditions (Group) ............................................................................................... 445
Manufacturing Constraint ...................................................................................................................... 449
Material ................................................................................................................................................... 451
Material Assignment ............................................................................................................................... 455
Material Combination ............................................................................................................................. 461
Material Plot ........................................................................................................................................... 465
Materials (Group) .................................................................................................................................... 469
Measures ................................................................................................................................................. 473
Mesh ........................................................................................................................................................ 475
Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group ..................................................................................... 483
Mesh Connection/Contact Match ........................................................................................................... 489
Mesh Control Tools (Group) .................................................................................................................... 493
Mesh Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 497
Mesh Numbering .................................................................................................................................... 501
Mesh Workflows ...................................................................................................................................... 503
1. External FEM Acoustics .................................................................................................................... 505
2. Internal FEM Acoustics ..................................................................................................................... 507
3. BEM Acoustics ................................................................................................................................. 510
4. Input ............................................................................................................................................... 512
5. Labels ............................................................................................................................................. 514
6. Steps ............................................................................................................................................... 516
7. Output ............................................................................................................................................ 519
8. Controls .......................................................................................................................................... 521
9. Outcomes ....................................................................................................................................... 525
Modal ...................................................................................................................................................... 529
Model ...................................................................................................................................................... 533
Morphing Region .................................................................................................................................... 537
Named Selections ................................................................................................................................... 541
Node Merge Group ................................................................................................................................. 547
Node Merge ............................................................................................................................................ 551
Node Move .............................................................................................................................................. 555
Numbering Control ................................................................................................................................. 557
Objective ................................................................................................................................................. 559

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
Object Reference

Optimization Region .............................................................................................................................. 561

Part ......................................................................................................................................................... 565
Part Transform ........................................................................................................................................ 571
Path ......................................................................................................................................................... 575
Periodic/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region ................................................................................. 579
Physics Region ........................................................................................................................................ 585
Point Mass ............................................................................................................................................... 593
Predefined Support ................................................................................................................................ 597
Primary Criterion .................................................................................................................................... 601
Pre-Meshed Crack ................................................................................................................................... 607
Pre-Stress ................................................................................................................................................ 611
Probe ....................................................................................................................................................... 617
Project ..................................................................................................................................................... 621
Pull .......................................................................................................................................................... 625
Python Code ........................................................................................................................................... 627
Python Result .......................................................................................................................................... 629
Ring Crack ............................................................................................................................................... 631
Remote Point .......................................................................................................................................... 639
Remote Points ......................................................................................................................................... 643
Response Constraint ............................................................................................................................... 645
Response PSD Tool (Group) .................................................................................................................... 649
Result Tracker ......................................................................................................................................... 653
Result Plot Trackers ................................................................................................................................. 657
Results and Result Tools (Group) ............................................................................................................ 665
Semi-Elliptical Crack ............................................................................................................................... 683
SMART Crack Growth .............................................................................................................................. 689
Smoothing .............................................................................................................................................. 695
Solid ........................................................................................................................................................ 699
Solution .................................................................................................................................................. 703
Solution Combination ............................................................................................................................ 709
Solution Information .............................................................................................................................. 711
Spot Weld ................................................................................................................................................ 715
Spring ..................................................................................................................................................... 719
STL .......................................................................................................................................................... 725
STL Support ............................................................................................................................................ 727
Stage ....................................................................................................................................................... 731
Stress Tool (Group) .................................................................................................................................. 735
Substructure Definition .......................................................................................................................... 739
Support Group ........................................................................................................................................ 743
Surface .................................................................................................................................................... 747
Surface Coating ...................................................................................................................................... 749
Symmetry ................................................................................................................................................ 753
Symmetry Region ................................................................................................................................... 755
Table ....................................................................................................................................................... 759
Tables (Group) ......................................................................................................................................... 763
Thermal Point Mass ................................................................................................................................ 765
Thickness ................................................................................................................................................ 769
Through Crack ........................................................................................................................................ 773
Transforms .............................................................................................................................................. 779
Validation ............................................................................................................................................... 781
Velocity ................................................................................................................................................... 785

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Object Reference

Virtual Cell .............................................................................................................................................. 789

Virtual Hard Vertex ................................................................................................................................. 791
Virtual Split Edge .................................................................................................................................... 793
Virtual Split Face ..................................................................................................................................... 795
Virtual Topology ..................................................................................................................................... 797

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
About This Reference
Welcome to the Mechanical Objects Reference. This reference provides a specification for every Mech-
anical object in the tree. Each object is represented in either its own reference page, or is combined
with similar objects and represented on one group reference page. For example, the Joint object is
represented on its own Joint object reference page (p. 423), whereas the Acceleration object is repres-
ented on the Loads and Supports (Group) object reference page (p. 445). All pages representing groups
of objects include "(Group)" as part of the page's title.

The objects reference is not intended to be your primary source of procedural information for performing
simulations -- see the Steps for Using the Application section for introductory and procedural guidelines
concerning when and where to use Mechanical objects.

Important:

Certain types of virtual objects do not appear in the Outline but are still included in this
reference. These include Virtual Cell (p. 789), Virtual Hard Vertex (p. 791), Virtual Split
Edge (p. 793), and Virtual Split Face (p. 795). When the application creates these objects,
they are saved in the database and have editable properties similar to other objects. For
more information, refer to their individual reference pages.

1. What's Included in each Object Reference?

The following is a description of each component of a Mechanical object reference page:

• Title: For individual object reference pages, the title is the default name of the object as it appears
in the tree. For group reference pages, the title is a name given to the collection of objects represented.

• Object definition: A brief description of the individual object or group of objects.

• Applies to the following objects: Appears only on group reference pages and includes the default
name of all objects represented on the group reference page.

• Tree dependencies: The valid location of the object or group of objects in the tree (Valid Parent
Tree Object), as well as other possible objects that you can insert beneath the object or group of
objects (Valid Child Tree Objects).

• Insertion options: Procedure for inserting the object (individual or one in the group) in the tree.
Typically this procedure includes inserting the object from a Context Tabs option or through a context
menu option when you right-click the mouse on the object.

• Additional related information: A listing of topics related to the object or object group that are in
the help. Included are links to those topics.

• Tree location graphic: An indication of where the object or group of objects appears in the tree.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
About This Reference

• Object Properties: A listing of every setting or indication available in the Details (located directly
beneath the object tree) for the object. Included are links to more detailed information on an item
within the help.

• Relevant right-click context menu options: A listing of options directly relevant to the objects that
are available in the context menu by right-clicking the object. Included are links to more detailed
information on an item within the help. The options listed are specifically relevant to their particular
object. A list of options that are standard to most of the objects (such as Solve, Copy, Cut, Duplicate,
and Delete) is shown below.

Object's Common Right-click Options

Common right-click options for most of the objects include:

• Insert: The Insert menu is specific to the object. You use the insert menu to add contacts, loads,
results, etc.

• Duplicate: Duplicate the selected object, including scoping and Details definition.

• Copy/Cut: Copy or Cut the selected object.

• Paste: Paste supported objects (that you copied) within the active Mechanical session.

• Copy To Clipboard/Paste From Clipboard: Any object that is scoped to a geometric entity (mesh-
based scoping is not supported), and that supports Copy/Cut, also supports copying and pasting to
and from the clipboard. These options enable you to paste objects copied to the clipboard from one
Mechanical session to another. These clipboard actions can only be performed once. The clipboard
is cleared once pasted.

• Delete: Delete the selected object.

• Rename: Rename the selected object.

• Group/Ungroup: Group objects in the Outline as desired.

• Rename Based on Definition: The application automatically renames the object based on its type and
scoping.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Groupings
The following object groupings are available:
1. General Objects
2. Geometry Objects
3. Coordinate System
4. Connections Objects
5. Material Objects
6. Mesh Objects
7. Symmetry Objects
8. External Model Objects
9. Imported Model Objects
10. Result Objects
11. Solution Objects
12. Analysis Specific Objects
13. Virtual Features Objects

1. General Objects
These objects can be inserted under a variety of different objects.

Object Description
Commands (p. 91) Enters and executes Mechanical APDL application commands or Mechanical APDL
programming.
Comment (p. 97) Inserts a comment for a Mechanical parent object.
Figure (p. 241) Captures any graphic displayed for a particular object in the Geometry window.
Image (p. 283) Inserts a screen shot of your model and places it underneath the currently selected
object.

2. Geometry Objects
These objects enable you to specify certain geometry options. The objects are grouped by functionality.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
Object Groupings

Geometry
These objects define and set up Geometry properties.
Object Description
Body (p. 55) Defines a component of the attached geometry included under the Geometry (p. 265)
object, or under a Part object if considered a multibody part.
Distributed Distributes additional mass across faces or edges on your model. It can be scoped to
Mass (p. 189) flexible parts only (Stiffness Behavior = Flexible).
Element Modifies the coordinate system of individual solid and shell elements.
Orientation (p. 203)
Gasket Mesh Applies a sweep mesh in a chosen direction and drops midside nodes on gasket
Control (p. 253) elements that are parallel to the sweep direction.
Geometry (p. 265) Contains the imported geometry in the form of an assembly or multibody part (objects)
from a CAD system or from SpaceClaim/DesignModeler.
Geometry Imports geometries into Mechanical.
Imports (p. 273)
Layered Creates layers (one or more) on a surface body to create a composite.
Section (p. 437)
Part (p. 565) Defines a component of the attached geometry included under a Geometry (p. 265)
object.
Point Represents the inertial effects from a body.
Mass (p. 593)
Thermal Point Houses the heat from surrounding objects.
Mass (p. 765)
Thickness (p. 769) Defines variable Thickness properties on selected faces or surface bodies that are
scoped to it.

Condensed Geometry
These objects are used to define superelements in your analysis.
Object Description
Condensed Contains all of the Condensed Part and Imported Condensed Part objects that you
Geometry (p. 117) create.
Condensed Defines a set of bodies as a single superelement with the overall inertial and flexibility
Part (p. 121) behavior summarized on a reduced set of degrees of freedom.
Imported Defines a single imported superelement with the overall inertial and flexibility behavior
Condensed summarized on a reduced set of degrees of freedom.
Part (p. 345)

Construction Geometry
These objects create construction geometry objects.
Object Description
Construction Contains one or more Path (p. 575), Surface (p. 747), Solid (p. 699), Construction Line,
Geometry (p. 139) and/or STL (p. 725) objects.
Construction Sketches and generates Line Bodies on the model you have imported into Mechanical.
Line (p. 141)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Connections Objects

Construction Geometry
These objects create construction geometry objects.
Object Description
Path (p. 575) Represents a spatial curve to which you can scope results.
Solid (p. 699) Creates and adds a solid part to the model you have imported into Mechanical.
STL (p. 725) Enables you to import and view an STL (Stereolithography) file.
Surface (p. 747) Represents a section plane to which you can scope results.
Surface Applies a surface coating (shell layer) of a specified material and thickness over one or
Coating (p. 749) more faces of your model.

3. Coordinate System
These objects are related to the coordinate systems of an analysis.

Object Description
Coordinate Represents a local coordinate system.
System (p. 161)
Coordinate Houses any new coordinate systems that can include a Global Coordinate Sys-
Systems (p. 167) tem (p. 281) object and local Coordinate System (p. 161) objects.
Global Represents the default coordinate system, wherein the origin is defined as 0,0,0 for
Coordinate the model.
System (p. 281)

4. Connections Objects
These objects define connections between parts or bodies. The objects are grouped by functionality.

Object Description
Beam (p. 39) Defines a structural element that carries a load primarily in bending.
Bearing (p. 49) Defines a two-dimensional elastic element used to confine relative motion and
rotation of a rotating part.
Body Sets global options for all Body Interaction (p. 65) objects in an Explicit Dynamics
Interactions (p. 63) Analysis.
Body Creates contact between bodies in an Explicit Dynamics Analysis.
Interaction (p. 65)
Connections (p. 129)Defines connections between two or more parts or bodies.
Connection Defines connections among selected bodies.
Group (p. 133)
Contact Defines conditions for individual contact and target pairs.
Region (p. 147)
End Allows specified degrees of freedom to be released on a vertex between line bodies
Release (p. 207) or a node between beam (line body) elements.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Object Groupings

Object Description
Interstage (p. 419) Connects the faces of the cyclically symmetric bodies specified by two different
Stage (p. 731) objects.
Joint (p. 423) Defines conditions for reference and mobile pairs that make up a joint.
Spot Weld (p. 715) Defines conditions for individual contact and target pairs for a spot weld, which is
used to connect individual surface body parts to form a surface body model assembly.
Spring (p. 719) Regains its undeformed shape after a compression or extension load is removed.

5. Material Objects
These objects assign and control the material options. The objects are grouped by functionality.

Object Description
Material (p. 451) Represents a material which is contained in your Project.
Material Assigns a material to multiple bodies and control its behavior, like nonlinear effects,
Assignment (p. 455) thermal strain calculation, reference temperature, etc.
Material Assigns a combination of different materials, specifically their material properties,
Combination (p. 461) to a body or part.
Materials (p. 469) Holds all material related objects for a given Model object.

6. Mesh Objects
These objects provide control to the mesh objects. The objects are grouped by functionality.

Mesh
These objects define and manage mesh properties.
Object Description
Gasket (p. 255) Defines the gasket mesh control beneath the Mesh object when the Body (p. 55)
object's Stiffness Behavior is set to Flexible.
Mesh (p. 475) Manages all meshing functions and tools for a model; includes global controls that
govern the entire mesh.
Mesh Control Objects available for fine tuning the mesh.
Tools (p. 493)

Mesh Edit
These objects define and manage mesh connections/contact matches and nodes.
Object Description
Mesh Connection Defines mesh connections/contact matches between selected topologies.
Group/Contact
Match
Group (p. 483)
Mesh Defines mesh connection/contact match conditions for individual topology pairs.
Connection/Contact
Match (p. 489)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 External Model Objects

Mesh Edit
These objects define and manage mesh connections/contact matches and nodes.
Object Description
Mesh Edit (p. 497) Creates Mesh Connections and Contact Matches as well as merges and/or moves
individual nodes on the mesh (once generated).
Node Merge Defines nodes that have been merged on a generated mesh.
Group (p. 547)
Node Merges pairs of nodes on the mesh.
Merge (p. 551)
Node Move (p. 555) Selects and moves individual nodes on the mesh.

Mesh Numbering
These objects control the renumbering of nodes and elements.
Object Description
Mesh Includes any quantity of Numbering Control (p. 557) objects, which renumber the node
Numbering (p. 501)and element numbers of a generated meshed model consisting of flexible parts.
Numbering Represents a part, vertex, or Remote Point whose nodes/elements can be renumbered.
Control (p. 557)

7. Symmetry Objects
These symmetry-based objects enable you to analyze a portion of a symmetric model in order to save
time and resources.

Object Description
General Creates a three-dimensional mesh, in the circumferential direction, on a surface
Axisymmetric (p. 257)body model that is based on specified nodal planes and an axis.
Periodic/Cyclic Define individual planes for periodic conditions, anti-periodic conditions, cyclic
Region/Pre-Meshed conditions, or pre-meshed cyclic conditions.
Cyclic
Region (p. 579)
Symmetry (p. 753) Represents all definitions of symmetry or periodic/cyclic planes within a model.
Symmetry Defines individual planes for symmetry or anti-symmetry conditions (including linear
Region (p. 755) periodic symmetry).

8. External Model Objects

These objects provide access to an external system for your analysis. The objects are grouped by func-
tionality.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Object Groupings

Connections
These objects provide access to an external system's data.
Object Description
Imported: Bolt Provides access to an external system’s pretension data.
Pretensions and
Premeshed Bolt
Pretensions (p. 289)
Imported: Provides access to an external system’s data that includes constraint equations
Constraint and couplings.
Equations or
Coupling (p. 303)
Imported: Provides access to an external system’s data that includes contacts.
Contacts (p. 307)
Imported: Flexible Provides access to an external system’s data that includes flexible remote
Remote connections.
Connectors (p. 319)
Imported: Rigid Provides access to an external system’s data that includes rigid remote connections.
Remote
Connectors (p. 331)
Imported: Spring Provides access to an external system’s data that includes springs or bushings.
Connectors (p. 339)

Boundary Conditions
These objects provide access to an external system's data.
Object Description
Imported: Boundary Provides access to an external system’s data that includes constraint and loading
Conditions (p. 293) conditions.

Imported Plies
These objects provide access to an external system's data.
Object Description
Imported: Composite Provides ply/layer data from an upstream External Model system.
Plies (p. 299)

Coordinate Systems
These objects provide access to an external system's data.
Object Description
Imported: Provides access to an external system’s data that includes coordinate systems.
Coordinate
Systems (p. 311)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Imported Model Objects

Geometry
These objects provide access to an external system or previous analysis' data.
Object Description
Imported: Element Provides access to an external system’s data that includes element orientations.
Orientations
(External
Model) (p. 315)
Imported: Nodal Provides access to an external system’s data that includes nodal orientations.
Orientations (p. 323)
Imported: Point Provides access to an external system’s data that includes point masses.
Masses (p. 327)

9. Imported Model Objects

These objects upstream data by linking Ansys Workbench systems with Mechanical analysis systems.
You can import results from one analysis and apply them in downstream (target) systems.

Imported Plies
These objects provide access to an external system's data.
Object Description
Imported Provides ply/layer data that has been made available from an external upstream
Plies (p. 379) system, such as Ansys Composite PrepPost.

Geometry
These objects provide access to an external system or previous analysis' data.
Object Description
Imported Maps coordinate system data points from an External Data system onto the elements
Element of your model in order to specify the coordinate systems of selected elements.
Orientation
(External
Data) (p. 353)
Imported Includes shell thicknesses that you have imported from an earlier analysis and want
Thickness to apply in the present analysis.
(Group) (p. 387)
Imported Imports shell thickness data generated in a previous analysis for application in a
Thickness (p. 391) current analysis.
Imported: Shell Provides access to an external system’s data that includes shell thicknesses.
Thicknesses (p. 335)

Condensed Geometry
These objects define imported superelements.
Object Description
Imported Defines a single imported superelement with the overall inertial and flexibility behavior
Condensed summarized on a reduced set of degrees of freedom.
Part (p. 345)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Object Groupings

Load and Boundary Conditions

These objects contain loads and conditions to use for an analysis.
Object Description
Imported Load Contains loads that you want to apply in the current analysis.
(Group) (p. 359)
Imported Remote Includes the Force and Moment boundary conditions provided by a Maxwell analysis.
Loads (p. 383)

Materials
These objects import material data and model printed circuit boards.
Object Description
Imported Contains all of the Imported Material Field objects used to import the initial
Material Fields user-defined field variable values from External Data and map to the mesh.
(Group) (p. 369)
Imported Imports the initial user-defined field variable values from External Data and map to the
Material mesh.
Field (p. 373)
Imported Trace Includes the metal traces that you have imported from a Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs)
(Group) (p. 395) 3D Layout design to model the effects of metal traces in PCBs.
Imported Models Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) in a fast and efficient manner which would
Trace (p. 399) otherwise require an inordinate amount of time to process the geometry and mesh,
due to the complexities in such models.

10. Result Objects

These objects define result types and the formats for viewing them. The objects are grouped by func-
tionality.

Result Tools
These objects provide various result types and formats.
Object Description
Alert (p. 15) Sets pass or fail thresholds for individual results.
Bolt Tool (p. 69) Provides bolt-specific results for loads that are defined using the Bolt Pretension
boundary condition.
Convergence (p. 159) Controls the relative accuracy of a solution by refining solution results on a particular
area of a model.
Expansion Displays and edits the Expansion Settings Worksheet once your analysis is solved.
Settings (p. 223)
Fatigue Determines life, damage, and factor of safety information using a stress-life or
Tool (p. 231) strain-life approach.
Figure (p. 241) Captures any graphic displayed for a particular object in the Geometry window.
Fracture Examines fracture results in Mechanical.
Tool (p. 247)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Result Objects

Result Tools
These objects provide various result types and formats.
Object Description
Fracture Shows the time history of a fracture parameter (that is, SIFS, Crack Extension, etc.)
Probes (p. 249) for a specific crack front node along the crack front (tip) only.
Probe (p. 617) Determines results at a point on a model or finds minimum or maximum results on
a body, face, vertex, or edge.
Python Executes Python code in response to events occurring in Mechanical for a given
Code (p. 627) workflow.
Python Evaluates output quantities by executing an Iron-python script based on the DPF
Result (p. 629) (Data Processing Framework) post-processing toolbox.
Response PSD Controls the sampling points of Response PSD probes for Random Vibration analyses.
Tool (p. 649)
Result Provides results graphs of various quantities (for example, deformation, contact,
Tracker (p. 653) temperature, kinetic energy, stiffness energy) vs. time.
Result Plot Shows the progression of specific results during the solution process.
Trackers (p. 657)
Results and Result Defines the engineering output for displaying and analyzing the results from a
Tools (p. 665) solution.
Solution (p. 703) Defines result types and formats for viewing a solution.
Solution Tracks and monitors your nonlinear solution, potentially diagnoses problems that
Information (p. 711) may arise, and shows certain finite element graphical aspects of the model.
Stress Tool (p. 735) Provides stress safety tools for analyzing simulation results.

Solution Combination
These objects manage solutions from one or more beam bodies or environments.
Object Description
Beam Tool (p. 45) Examines linearized stresses on beam (line) bodies.
Solution Manages solutions that are derived from the results of one or more environments.
Combination (p. 709)

Fatigue Combination
This object sums the Damage results of multiple systems.
Object Description
Fatigue Generates a sum total of the Damage results of multiple systems that each include
Combination (p. 227) a Fatigue Tool (p. 231) object.

Chart
This object plots load and result data.
Object Description
Chart (p. 87) Charts results against time or result quantities against a load or another result quantity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
Object Groupings

11. Solution Objects

These objects add results as well as monitor and view post processing options.

Object Description
Solution (p. 703) Manages all specified results, result tools, solution information, probes, etc.
Solution Manages solutions from multiple environments.
Combination (p. 709)
Solution Tracks and monitors your nonlinear solution as well as potentially diagnose problems
Information (p. 711) that may arise during the solution process. It also enables you to view certain finite
element graphical aspects of the model, such as finite element connections.

12. Analysis Specific Objects

These objects are used for certain analysis configurations only.

Additive Manufacturing
These objects set up and define options for an AM process simulation.
Object Description
AM Establishes a connection between a meshed part and a meshed support in an AM
Bond (p. 17) process simulation.
AM Identifies geometries and sets global options for all AM-related objects in an AM process
Process (p. 21) simulation.
Build Defines the strain assumptions, process parameters, and build conditions related to
Settings (p. 75) the additive machine, material, and process.
Generated Generates a support structure consisting of finite elements.
Support (p. 261)
Predefined Identifies a support structure that was imported with your part geometry.
Support (p. 597)
STL Imports and meshes a support structure that is an STL (Stereolithography) file, of either
Support (p. 727) volumeless or solid type.
Support Groups support objects (STL Support, Predefined Support, and Generated Support).
Group (p. 743)

Composite Prep/Post
These objects provide and plot composite result data for Composite PrepPost.
Object Description
Composite Failure A model-level object that is inserted into the tree when you promote a Composite
Criteria Failure Tool (p. 103) object.
Definitions (p. 101)
Composite Failure Provides result data that corresponds to that of the failure definition in Ansys
Tool (p. 103) Composite PrepPost (ACP).
Composite Provides ply-wise results that were modeled using ACP.
Sampling Point
Tool (p. 109)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Analysis Specific Objects

Composite Prep/Post
These objects provide and plot composite result data for Composite PrepPost.
Object Description
Composite Plots the composite part result data.
Sampling
Point (p. 113)

Explicit Dynamics
These objects apply a specific velocity as an initial condition for Explicit Dynamics.
Object Description
Angular Applies angular velocity as an initial condition for use in an explicit dynamics analysis.
Velocity (p. 29)
Drop Applies a velocity as an initial condition by calculating the velocity at which an object
Height (p. 193) would be traveling if dropped from rest from a specified height.

Fracture Analysis
These fracture-based objects enable you to create cracks in and on your model to compute fracture
parameters.
Object Description
Arbitrary Defines a crack to analyze planar or non-planar cracks of any arbitrary shape, which
Crack (p. 33) already exist on the geometry model.
Contact Defines contact regions along a contact interface that will separate.
Debonding (p. 145)
Elliptical Inserts embedded void cracks into a solid body.
Crack (p. 215)
Fracture (p. 243) Contains all crack definitions.
Interface Simulates the separation of two materials across an interface.
Delamination (p. 415)
Pre-Meshed Defines a crack that is based on a previously generated mesh and used to analyze
Crack (p. 607) crack fronts based on a Named Selection.
Ring Crack (p. 631) Inserts embedded void cracks of a hallow disc shape into a solid body.
Semi-Elliptical Defines a semi-elliptical crack based on an internally generated mesh to analyze
Crack (p. 683) crack fronts by use of geometric parameters.
SMART Crack Simulates fatigue and static crack propagation in a structure.
Growth (p. 689)

Structural Optimization Analysis

Object Description
Design Specifies certain manufacturing-based limitations to help alleviate design problems.
Contraint (p. 187)
Manufacturing Specifies contraints and other restrictions to ensure manufacturable designs in a
Constraint (p. 449) Structural Optimization analysis.
Objective (p. 559) Specifies the structural optimization goal.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
Object Groupings

Structural Optimization Analysis

Object Description
Optimization Specifies the geometric entity on a model that will be optimized using a Structural
Region (p. 561) Optimization analysis.
Response
Constraint (p. 645)

13. Virtual Features Objects

These objects define virtual properties and do not appear in the tree. The objects are grouped by
functionality.

Object Description
Virtual Defines an individual face or edge group, defined manually or automatically.
Cell (p. 789)
Virtual Hard Defines a virtual hard vertex, which allows you to define a hard point according to
Vertex (p. 791) your cursor location on a face, and then use that hard point in a split face operation.
Virtual Split Defines a virtual split edge.
Edge (p. 793)
Virtual Split Defines a virtual split face.
Face (p. 795)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Alert
Sets pass or fail thresholds for individual results. When a threshold is exceeded, the status symbol
changes in front of the associated result object (p. 665). The status is also displayed in the Details pane
of the Alert object. Alerts facilitate the presentation of comparisons in automatic reports.

Object
Properties (p. 15)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 16)

Insertion
Methods (p. 16)

Right-click (p. 16)

API
Reference (p. 16)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Fails If: Set failure threshold as Minimum Below Value or Maximum Above Value,
where you set the value in the next field.

Value: Threshold value in the units of the associated result.

Results Status: Read-only indication of the pass/fail status; also includes criterion (for
example, "Passed: Minimum Above Value").

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
Alert

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: All result objects (p. 665) (independent or included in result tools), except
for Damage Matrix, Fatigue Sensitivity, Hysteresis, Phase Response, Probe, Rainflow Matrix, Reactions,
Status, Vector Principal Elastic Strain, and Vector Principal Stress.

• Valid Child Tree Object: Comment (p. 97).

Insertion Methods
Insert the Alert object by right-clicking on a result object, or in the Geometry window when a result
is selected, and selecting Insert > Alert.

Right-click Options
Relevant right-click options for this object are in the common right-click options (p. 2) list.

API Reference
See the Alert section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
AM Bond
Connects a meshed part to a meshed support when the mesh is non-contiguous between them in an
AM Process Simulation. The internal means of connection is through constraint equations that connect
the support nodes to the part elements.

Object Properties (p. 17)

Tree Dependencies (p. 18)

Insertion Methods (p. 18)

Right-click Options (p. 18)

API Reference (p. 19)

Additional Related
Information (p. 19)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection and Named Selection
(default).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
AM Bond

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Contact: In most cases, choose the part as the contact.[a] When the Scoping
Method is set to Named Selection, select a desired Named Selection from the
drop-down menu. When the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection, use
selection filters to pick the part geometry, click in the Geometry field, then click
Apply.

Target: In most cases, choose the support as the target.[a] When the Scoping
Method is set to Named Selection, select a desired Named Selection from the
drop-down menu.

Contact Bodies: Read-only indication of scoped geometry or Named Selection.

Target Bodies: Read-only indication of scoped geometry or Named Selection.

[a] Reversing the entities identified as contact and target will not only produce a warning
message, but will typically produce unexpected and unrealistic deformation. However, if
the support mesh is much coarser than the part mesh, say greater than 2:1 proportions,
reverse the selection and make the support the contact and the part the target.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Select AM Bond on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > AM
Bond.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Suppress: Suppresses the contact connection from the simulation.

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Contact/Target: Reverses the identification of contact and target entities. For AM Bond
connections, typically the part is the contact and the support is the target. However, if the support
mesh is much coarser than the part mesh, say greater than 2:1 proportions, use this option to
flip the selection and make the support the contact and the part the target.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
API Reference
See the AM Bond Connection section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See Define Connections in the LPBF Simulation Guide section for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
AM Process
Identifies geometries and sets global options for all AM-related objects in an AM Process Simulation.

Object Properties (p. 21)

Tree Dependencies (p. 22)

Insertion Methods (p. 22)

Right-click Options (p. 22)

API Reference (p. 23)

Additional Related
Information (p. 23)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Build Geometry The part to be printed.

Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default) and

Named Selection.

Geometry: Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry

field, then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
AM Process

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selection: Select a desired Named Selection from the drop-down
menu.
Base Geometry The base plate upon which the part rests.

Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default) and

Named Selection.

Geometry: Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry

field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Select a desired Named Selection from the drop-down

menu.

Z Location at the Top of Base: Read-only indication of the Z location

at the top of the base plate. Usually this should be 0.

Layer Height: Read-only indication of the layer height used in the mesh.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Build Settings (p. 75) and Support Group (p. 743).

Insertion Methods
The AM Process object is inserted under the Model object in the project tree by default when using
either of these two custom systems for additive manufacturing: AM LPBF Inherent Strain or AM LPBF
Thermal-Structural. When not inserted automatically by a custom system, use any of the following
methods after highlighting Model object:

• Select the AM Process option on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click the Model object or in the geometry window and select Insert > AM Process.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Support Group (p. 743)

– Predefined Support (p. 597)

– Generated Support (p. 261)

– STL Support (p. 727)

– Cartesian Mesh

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Create Build To Base Contact: This option creates a Contact Region between the Build Geo-
metry and the Base Plate Geometry. The Contact Side is defined as the element faces of the
bottom of the Build or Support. The Target Side is defined as the element faces of the top of
the Base Plate Geometry. Both contact and target scopes are defined by Named Selection. This
option is visible once you have generated a mesh.

API Reference
See the AM Process section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• LPBF Simulation Guide

• Identify Geometries (AM Process Object)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Analysis Ply
Provides ply/layer data that has been made available from an external upstream system, such as Ansys
Composite PrepPost.

Object Properties (p. 25)

Tree Dependencies (p. 26)

Insertion Methods (p. 26)

Right-click Options (p. 26)

API Reference (p. 26)

Additional Related
Information (p. 26)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Name in Source: The name of the ply as defined in the upstream ACP analysis.

Thickness: The thickness of the selected ply.

Angle: The design angle between the reference direction and the ply fiber direction.

Material: The specified material of the fabric.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
Analysis Ply

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Number of Elements: The number of elements contained within the ply.
Transfer Source: The source ACP system.
Proper-
ties

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Imported Plies.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), and Figure (p. 241).

Insertion Methods
Automatically inserted when importing ply data from an external system.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert for Evironment

• Create Ply Named Selection: Creates a Worksheet-based Named Selection for the selected ply
object.

API Reference
See the Analysis Ply section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Specifying Surface Body Layered Sections

• Composite Analysis

• Composite Analysis

• Composite Failure Tool

• Imported Plies (p. 379)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Analysis Settings
Specifies various solution settings that are customized to specific analysis types.

Object
Properties (p. 27)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 28)

Insertion
Methods (p. 28)

API
Reference (p. 28)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 28)

Object Properties
For more information on this object's properties, see the Analysis Settings for Most Analysis Types section.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Analysis Settings

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Any Environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Appears automatically when you create an analysis system.

API Reference
See the Analysis Settings section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections fore more information:

• Establish Analysis Settings

• Configuring Analysis Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Angular Velocity
Applies angular velocity as an initial condition for use in an explicit dynamics analysis.

Note:

• For explicit dynamics analyses, the center of rotation for an angular velocity is defined by
the origin of the coordinate system associated with the angular velocity.

• Angular Velocity initial conditions are not supported for 2D axisymmetric Explicit Dynamics
analyses.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Angular Velocity

Object
Properties (p. 30)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 31)

Insertion
Methods (p. 31)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 31)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Geometry Se-
lection. In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry
field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Named
Selection.
Definition Input Type: Specify as Angular Velocity, Drop Height, or Velocity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Define By: Specify as Vector (default) or Components.

Total: Magnitude; appears if the Define By property is set to Vector.

Direction: Appears if Define By is set to Vector.

Coordinate System: Available list; appears if Define By is set to Components.

X, Y, Z Component: Values; appears if Define By is set to Components.

Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Initial Conditions (p. 407).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Initial Conditions object:

• Click Angular Velocity option on the Initial Conditions Context tab.

• Right-click the Initial Conditions object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Angular
Velocity.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Define Initial Conditions

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Arbitrary Crack
Defines a crack to analyze planar or non-planar cracks of any arbitrary shape, which already exist on
the geometry model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Arbitrary Crack

Object
Properties (p. 34)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 36)

Insertion
Methods (p. 36)

Right-click
Options (p. 36)

API
Reference (p. 37)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 37)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Arbitrary Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification number ID for the crack object. The
application uses this identifier when creating solution identifiers for
fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system

that defines the orientation of the crack. For this user-defined
coordinate system, the Y axis must be directed towards the normal
of the crack's top face and the X axis helps to determine the crack
extension direction.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Arbitrary.

Crack Surface: Scopes the surface body to be used as the crack

surface. It can be scoped to a single surface body only.

Note:

The surface body specified as the Crack Surface is

treated as a Construction Body (see the Treatment
property description in the Body (p. 55) object
reference section).

Mesh Method: Read-only property set to Tetrahedrons.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0.

Growth Rate: Specifies the factor with which the mesh layers will
grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a value greater than 1.
The default value is 1.2. The recommended value is equal to or
greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: Specifies the element size for the crack front.
The default value is computed from Largest Contour Radius
property and the Growth Rate property. A value of 0 specifies the
default. You can specify an entry greater than 0.

Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the

crack shape. The value must be equal to or greater than 1. The
default value is 6. The Geometry window can display only a
maximum of 100 mesh contours, but you can specify a higher value
and fracture meshing will respect it.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Arbitrary Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which
you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value must
be less than or equal to the value of the Mesh Contours property
and cannot exceed 99. By default, the value equals the Match Mesh
Contours property. This indicates the number of Solution Contours
is equal to the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the
value to equal the Match Mesh Contours value.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Arbitrary Crack object.

The default is No. The Arbitrary Crack object is suppressed
automatically if both the scoped body and scoped crack surface are
suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale The Buffer Zone Scale Factors category controls the size of the
Factors buffer zone in the X, Y, and Z directions, relative to the crack surface
geometry dimensions. For each scaling parameter, use the slider to
set a value from 2 to 50. The default value is 2. The maximum
dimension among the three dimensions of the crack surface
geometry is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create
a buffer zone:

• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For details, refer to the Fracture Analysis and the Special
Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects sections for more
information. For information about Named Selections in general,
refer to Named Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Arbitrary Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu.
Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Arbitrary Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining an Arbitrary Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Beam
Defines a structural element that carries a load primarily in bending.

Object
Properties (p. 40)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 42)

Insertion
Methods (p. 43)

Right-click
Options (p. 43)

API
Reference (p. 43)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 43)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Beam

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Graphics Properties Visible: Toggle the visibility of the beam on and off.
Definition Material: Material property defined in the Engineering Data Workspace.

Cross Section: Read-only indication.

Radius

Suppressed

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Beam Length: Read-only property that displays the actual length of the
beam that is calculated using the end points from the scoping of the
Reference and Mobile categories.

Element APDL Name: Optional property to manually define an APDL

parameter (in the input file) and assign its value to the element of the
Beam. This facilitates easy programmatic identification of the Beam's
element for later use/reference in a Commands object.
Scope - Information Scope: Options include Body-Body or Body-Ground.
on springs also
applies to beams.
Reference - The following properties are available when the Scope property is set
Information on to Body-Body:
springs also applies
to beams. Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection, Named Selection,
or Remote Point.
Applied By: Specify as Remote Attachment (default) or Direct
Attachment. The default for this property can differ if you first select
geometry or a mesh node.
Scope: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Geo-
metry Selection. Once a geometry is selected, click in the Scope
field and then click Apply.
Reference Component: Displays when the Scoping Method
property is set to Named Selection. This property provides a
drop-down list of available user–defined Named Selections.
Remote Points: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set
to Remote Point. This property provides a drop-down list of
available user–defined Remote Points.
Body: A read-only indication of scoped geometry. Displays
for Body-Body scoping.

The following properties display for either Body-Body or Body-Ground

scoping when the Applied By property is set to Remote Attachment.

Coordinate System
Reference X Coordinate
Reference Y Coordinate
Reference Z Coordinate
Reference Location
Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.
Select a material to define material properties for the beams used
in the connection. Density is excluded from the material definition.
Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.
Specify a radius to define the cross section dimension of the circular
beam used for the connection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Beam

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mobile - Information The following properties are available when the Scope property is set
on springs also to Body-Body:
applies to beams.
Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection, Named Selection,
or Remote Point.
Applied By: Specify as Remote Attachment (default) or Direct
Attachment. The default for this property can differ if you first select
geometry or a mesh node.
Scope: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Geo-
metry Selection. Once a geometry is selected, click in the Scope
field and then click Apply.
Reference Component: Displays when the Scoping Method
property is set to Named Selection. This property provides a
drop-down list of available user–defined Named Selections.
Remote Points: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set
to Remote Point. This property provides a drop-down list of
available user–defined Remote Points.
Body: A read-only indication of scoped geometry. Displays for
Body-Body scoping.
Behavior: Specify the scoped geometry as either Rigid, Deformable,
or Beam.
Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.
Select a material to define material properties for the beams used
in the connection. Density is excluded from the material definition.
Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.
Specify a radius to define the cross section dimension of the circular
beam used for the connection.
Pinball Region

The following properties display for either Body-Body or Body-Ground

scoping when the Applied By property is set to Remote Attachment.

Coordinate System
Mobile X Coordinate
Mobile Y Coordinate
Mobile Z Coordinate
Mobile Location

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections object:

• Select Beam > Body-Ground or Beam > Body-Body, as applicable on Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections object or in the Geometry window Insert > Beam.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Enable/Disable Transparency: Similar behavior to feature in Contact Region.

• Promote Remote Point (when the Applied By property is set to Remote Attachment).

API Reference
See the Beam section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Connections Context

• Beam Connections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Beam Tool (Group)
Examines linearized stresses on beam (line) bodies.

Applies to the following objects: Direct Stress, Minimum Bending Stress, Maximum Bending Stress,
Minimum Combined Stress, Maximum Combined Stress as well as Total Deformation and Directional
Deformation.

Object
Properties (p. 45)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 46)

Insertion
Methods (p. 46)

Right-click
Options (p. 46)

API
Reference (p. 46)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 47)

Object Properties
For more information on this object's properties, see the Beam Tool section.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Beam Tool (Group)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object:

The Solution (p. 703) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– Direct Stress

– Minimum Bending Stress

– Maximum Bending Stress

– Minimum Combined Stress

– Maximum Combined Stress

– Total Deformation

– Directional Deformation

– User Defined Results

Note:

For all of the above objects, except User Defined Results, the Alert (p. 15) object is the
only valid child object.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Solution object and either:

– Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Beam Tool.

– Right-click the Solution object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Beam Tool > Beam
Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Beam Tool and all child objects when the Beam Tool is inserted
under a Solution (p. 703) object.

API Reference
See the Beam Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for more information:

• Beam Tool

• Line Bodies

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Bearing
Defines a two-dimensional elastic element used to confine relative motion and rotation of a rotating
part.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
Bearing

Object
Properties (p. 50)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 52)

Insertion
Methods (p. 52)

Right-click
Options (p. 52)

API
Reference (p. 52)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 53)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property/Options/Descriptions
Definition Connection Type: Read-only field that describes the bearing - Body-Ground

Stiffness K11, K22, K12, K21: Entry fields.

Damping C11, C22, C12, C21: Entry fields.

Suppressed
Reference Rotation Plane: Specify the desired plane of rotation. Options include:

• None (Default)

• X-Y Plane

• Y-Z Plane

• X-Z Plane

Mobile Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection, Named Selection, or Remote

Point.

Based on the selection made for the Scoping Method property of this category,
the next property is:

• Scope: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection. Select a

geometry entity and then click Apply.

• Mobile Component: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.

This property provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named
Selections.

• Remote Points: Appears if the Scoping Method is set to Remote Point. This
property provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Remote Points.

Body: Read-only indication of scoped geometry.

Coordinate System: Drop-down list of available coordinate systems. Global Co-

ordinate System is the default.

The following read-only properties display the coordinates of the centroid location
for the scoped geometric entities from the origin of the coordinate system selected
in the Coordinate System property.

• Mobile X Coordinate

• Mobile Y Coordinate

• Mobile Z Coordinate

Behavior: Rigid (default), Deformable, or Beam. If the Scope Method property is

set to Remote Point, the Bearing will then assume the Behavior defined in the
referenced Remote Point as well as other related properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
Bearing

Category Property/Options/Descriptions
Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam. Select a material
to define material properties for the beams used in the connection. Density is
excluded from the material definition.

Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam. Specify a radius to
define the cross section dimension of the circular beam used for the connection.

Pinball Region: The Pinball Region is a radius value (length unit) that defines a
region for selecting elements to be used by the solver for the Bearing's Mobile
scoping.

Note:

The Pinball Region and Behavior settings are:

• Applicable to underlying bodies that are flexible.

• Not applicable to a bearing scoped to the vertex of line

body.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Select Bearing > Body-Ground or Body-Body on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert >
Bearing.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Promote to Remote Point (Remote Attachment Only)

API Reference
See the Bearing section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for more information:

• Bearings

• Connections Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Body
Defines a component of the attached geometry included under the Geometry (p. 265) object, or under
a Part object if considered a multibody part (shown in the figure below).

Object
Properties (p. 55)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 60)

Insertion
Methods (p. 61)

Right-click
Options (p. 61)

API
Reference (p. 62)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 62)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
Body

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Graphics Properties The following properties change the graphical display of a body.

Visible: Toggles the display of the part on (Yes) or off (No) in the
Geometry window.
Glow
Shininess
Transparency: Varies the body between being completely
transparent (0) to completely opaque (1).
Color: Set the color of the body.
Specularity
Definition Suppressed

Dimension (Surface Bodies Only): Specify the selected surface body as

either three-dimensional or two-dimensional. Options include 3D
(default) and 2D. For multi-body parts, you can specify each body
independently as either 3D or 2D. When you set this property to 2D,
the application automatically displays the 2D Behavior property.
Supported settings for the 2D Behavior property include Axisymmetric,
Plane Stress, Plane Strain, and General Axisymmetric.

Note:

The application automatically clears and regenerates the

mesh when you change the setting of this property. This
default behavior can be turned off using the Options
dialog. Set the Clear Mesh on Dimension Change
property, under the Geometry category, to No.

Stiffness Behavior

Stiffness Option (Surface Bodies Only): Specifies the element stiffness

for 3D flexible shell bodies. It is only applicable to analysis types where
the Physics Type property of the environment object is set to
Structural. In addition, for the property to be visible, the Stiffness Be-
havior property must be set to Flexible, and the Dimension property
must be set to 3D. Property options include Membrane and Bending
(default), Membrane Only, and Stress Evaluation Only.

Note:

See the Help sections for the elements SHELL181 and

SHELL281 (for KEYOPT(1)) in the Element Reference for
additional information.

Note the following additional requirements:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions

• For the Stress Evaluation Only setting, the

application ignores the values of the Thickness
and Offset Type properties.

• For the Membrane Only setting, the application

ignores the value of the Offset Type property.

Brick Integration Scheme: Appears only if Element Control is set to

Manual in the Details pane of the Geometry (p. 265) object; not
available if Stiffness Behavior is set to Rigid.

Coordinate System: Assign a local coordinate system to specify the

alignment of the elements of the body if previously defined using one
or more Coordinate System (p. 161) objects; not available if Stiffness
Behavior is set to Rigid.

Reference Temperature

Reference Temperature Value: Available only when you select By Body

as the Reference Temperature.

Reference Frame: Only appears when an Explicit Dynamics system is

part of the solution.

Thickness: Appears only for a Surface Body.

Thickness Mode: Appears only for a Surface Body and is a read-only

indication.

Cross Section: Appears for line bodies only. Provides a drop-down menu
of selectable cross section options/objects (p. 177).

Offset Mode: Appears only for a Line Body.

Offset Type: Appears for Line Bodies and for Surface Bodies when 1)
the Dimension property is set to 3D and 2) the Model Type property
is set to Shell.

Model Type: Displays for line bodies and surface bodies when the Di-
mension property is set to 3D.

• Line Body options include Beam, Thermal Fluid, Pipe,

Link/Truss, Cable, and Reinforcement.

• Surface Body options include Shell and Reinforcement.

See the Reinforcement Specification Using Mesh-Independent Method

section for information about using the For Reinforcement setting.

2D Behavior: Available when:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
Body

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• The 2D Behavior property of the Geometry object is set to By
Body. For this Geometry object setting, you first must specify
your analysis as two-dimensional on the Workbench project page
(Analysis Type property for the Geometry cell set to 2D.

Or...

• The Dimension property is set to 2D (during three-dimensional

analyses).

Treatment: Generally used to scope a surface body to an Arbitrary

Crack (p. 33) (via the Crack Surface property) or a line body to a Spot
Weld (p. 715), this property includes the options None (default) and
Construction Body. When you set the Treatment property to
Construction Body, the associated Body is not recognized during the
mesh or solution process.

Important:

• When you scope a surface body to define the Crack

Surface property of an Arbitrary Crack object, this
property is automatically set to Construction Body.
Only surface bodies are supported for Arbitrary Crack
specification.

• When you specify a Body as a Construction Body, it

is excluded from the All Bodies scoping for results.
In addition, you cannot scope the Body to certain
other features, such as loads and results.

• You can use a Body defined as a Construction Body

to specify:

– The nodes, elements, or element faces on other

bodies that are located within the boundary
of the Construction Body as a Named Selection
using Worksheet Criteria. For this Named
Selection, the Criterion column must be set to
Within Body.

– A Coordinate System

Material Assignment: Specify a desired material for the body. This property can
be designated as a parameter.

Nonlinear Effects: Not available if Stiffness Behavior is set to Rigid.

Thermal Strain Effects

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Gasket Initial Gap: Only displays when a valid Gasket Material is
assigned and enables you to specify an initial gap for a gasket. The
default value is 0. Valid entries must be greater than or equal to 0.

Fluid/Solid: Available only in the Meshing application (that is, not

available if you are using the meshing capabilities from within the
Mechanical application). Allows you to control the physics that occur
on a model. Valid options are Fluid, Solid, and Defined By Geometry.
When set to Defined By Geometry, the value is based on the Fluid/Sol-
id material property that was assigned to the body in the DesignModeler
application.
Bounding Box Length X

Length Y

Length Z
Properties: Volume
Indications of the
properties originally Mass
assigned to the body.
Length: Appears only for line bodies.

Note:

• If the material density is temperature dependent, the

Mass will be computed at the body temperature, or
at 22°C (default temperature for an environment).

• For a Surface Body, the Volume, Mass, and Moment

of Inertia information for the Body selection are based
on the Thickness value specified above. This does
not account for any Thickness (p. 769) object
specifications. Thickness object specifications
overwrite the body thickness values when the
application calculates thickness for any faces and/or
surface bodies. Refer to the PRECISE MASS SUMMARY
section from the Solution Information (p. 711)
worksheet for solver calculated Mass values.

The following appear for all bodies except line bodies:

Centroid X
Centroid Y
Centroid Z
Moment of Inertia Ip1
Moment of Inertia Ip2
Moment of Inertia Ip3

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
Body

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Surface Area (approx.) - Appears only for a surface body

Note:

Surface bodies are dependent upon the 2D Behavior setting

of the Geometry object. Any setting other than the Plane
Stress setting causes the above properties, except Surface
Area, to display with the content "N/A" (Not Applicable) in
their field. However, when the 2D Behavior property is set
to By Body, you can change the setting of the 2D Behavior
property for each surface body individually. These individual
settings affect what is displayed by a property’s field.

Based on the setting of the Model Type property, the following may
appear for line bodies:

Cross Section Area

Cross Section IYY
Cross Section IZZ
Pipe Internal Diameter
Pipe External Diameter
Pipe Thickness

The following appear for surface bodies only:

Offset Type
Membrane Offset: Appears for surface bodies when Offset Type
= User Defined
Statistics The properties of this category provide a read-only indication of the
entities that comprise the body.

Nodes

Elements

Mesh Metric

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265) or Part (p. 565) (if under a multibody part).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Gasket Mesh Con-
trol (p. 253), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Appears by default when a geometry is attached.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Point Mass

– Distributed Mass

– Commands

• Update

• Generate Mesh

• Preview >

– Surface Mesh

– Inflation

• Export > Geometry

• Show/Hide Body

• Show/Hide All Other Bodies

• Hide or Show > Solid Bodies/Surface Bodies/Line Bodies (option availability based on body
type)

• Suppress Body

• Suppress All Other Bodies

• Unsuppress All Bodies

• Invert Suppressed Body Set

• Search Faces with Multiple Thicknesses

• Update Selected Parts > Update: Use Geometry Parameter Values

• Create Material Assignment

• Create Material Plot (p. 465)

• Transform Part

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
Body

• Delete Part(s)

• Create Named Selection

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Body section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the Attach Geometry/Mesh section for the methods to open a geometry in Mechanical.

Note:

When a Surface Body is meshed with the SHELL181 element, KEYOPT(3) = 2 (full-integration
scheme) is written to the input file. This differs from the usual default setting for SHELL181,
KEYOPT(3) = 0 (reduced integration). Note that this element is a lower order element and is
only used when the Mesh (p. 475) object property Element Order is specified as Linear,
either by you as the user or by the application. See the Mechanical APDL Element Reference
for SHELL181 for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Body Interactions
Sets global options for all Body Interaction (p. 65) objects in an Explicit Dynamics Analysis.

Object Properties (p. 63)

Tree Dependencies (p. 64)

Insertion Methods (p. 64)

API Reference (p. 64)

Additional Related
Information (p. 64)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Advanced Contact Detection
Formulation: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to Trajectory.
Shell Thickness Factor: Appears if the geometry includes one or more surface bodies
and if the Contact Detection property is set to Trajectory.
Pinball Factor: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to Proximity Based.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
Body Interactions

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Timestep Safety Factor: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to Proximity
Based.
Limiting Timestep Velocity: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to
Proximity Based.
Edge on Edge Contact: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to Proximity
Based.
Manual Contact Treatment
Body Self Contact
Element Self Contact
Tolerance: Appears if the Contact Detection property is set to Trajectory and the
Element Self Contact is set to Yes.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Body Interaction (p. 65), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Automatically inserted in the tree if contact is detected when model is attached. Also, use any of the
following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Click Body Interaction option on Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object or in the Geometry window > Insert > Body Interac-
tion.

API Reference
See the Body Interactions section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Body Interaction (p. 65)

• Body Interactions in Explicit Dynamics Analyses

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis Guide

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Body Interaction
Creates contact between bodies in an Explicit Dynamics Analysis.

Object Properties (p. 65)

Tree Dependencies (p. 66)

Insertion Methods (p. 66)

API Reference (p. 66)

Additional Related
Information (p. 66)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry and Named Selection.
Geometry: Appears when the Scoping Method property is set to Geometry
Selection. In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geo-
metry field, then click Apply.
Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Named
Selection. This property provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named
Selections.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
Body Interaction

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type
Maximum Offset: Displays when the Type property is set to Bonded.
Breakable: Displays if the Type property is set to Bonded.
Normal Stress Limit: Displays if the Type property is set to Bonded and the
Breakable property is set to Stress Criteria.
Normal Stress Exponent: Displays if the Type property is set to Bonded and the
Breakable property is set to Stress Criteria.
Shear Stress Limit: Displays if the Type property is set to Bonded and the Breakable
property is set to Stress Criteria.
Shear Stress Exponent: Displays if the Type property is set to Bonded and the
Breakable property is set to Stress Criteria.
Friction Coefficient: Displays if the Type property is set to Frictional.
Dynamic Coefficient: Displays if the Type property is set to Frictional.
Decay Constant: Displays if the Type property is set to Frictional.
Suppressed

In LS-DYNA analyses, additional properties are available using the Contact Properties object, which can
be added under each Contact Region or Body Interaction object. This object enables advanced usage
of the contact.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Body Interactions (p. 63).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Automatically inserted in the tree if model includes a Body Interactions object.

• For manual insertion, use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object.

– Choose Body Interaction on Connections Context.

– Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object, or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Body
Interaction.

API Reference
See the Body Interaction section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Body Interactions (object reference) (p. 63)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Body Interactions

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Bolt Tool (Group)
Provides bolt-specific results for loads that are defined using the Bolt Pretension boundary condition.
The Bolt Tool includes the following child result objects:

• Adjustment

• Working Load

Object Properties (p. 69)

Tree Dependencies (p. 70)

Insertion Methods (p. 70)

Right-click Options (p. 70)

API Reference (p. 71)

Additional Related
Information (p. 71)

Object Properties
The Details pane for this object's child objects, Adjustment and Working Load, are shown below. For
more information on this object's properties, see the Bolt Tool section.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only display of the bolt tool object name - Adjustment or
Working Load.

By: The options are listed below.

• Time

• Result Set

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
Bolt Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Maximum Over Time

• Time of Maximum

Display Time: Visible when the By property is set to Time.

Set Number: Visible when the By property is set to Result Set.

Calculate Time History: Options include Yes or No.

Identifier

Suppressed
Results: Read-only Minimum
properties.
Maximum
Information: Time
Read-only properties.
Load Step

Substep

Iteration Number

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The Solution (p. 703) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– The Adjustment or Working Load objects are the only valid child objects.

– For the Adjustment or Working Load objects, the Alert (p. 15) object is the only valid child object.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Solution object and then select the Bolt Tool option from the Toolbox drop-down menu
on the Solution Context Tab.

Or...

• Right-click the Solution object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Bolt Tool > Bolt
Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Bolt Tool and all child objects when the Bolt Tool is inserted
under a Solution (p. 703) object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
API Reference
See the Bolt Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Bolt Tool

• Bolt Pretension

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Boundary Conditions
Define boundary conditions to be used across multiple analysis systems included in your simulation.

Object Properties (p. 73)

Tree Dependencies (p. 73)

Insertion Methods (p. 74)

Right-click (p. 74)

Additional Related
Information (p. 74)

Object Properties
The Details pane for this object includes only one property: Number of Steps. This property defines
the number of initial load steps to be used for the Bolt Pretension load. The default setting is 1. Once
you define a load, use the Tabular Data window to modify these load steps. This property only specifies
the number of steps when you create the load. Any change to the setting of the property only affects
subsequent loads you create.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Bolt Pretension.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Boundary Conditions

Insertion Methods
This object houses boundary conditions. It is not inserted directly but as a result of specifying boundary
conditions you wish to use across multiple analysis systems. To insert the object, insert the desired load:

• Right-click the Model object and select Insert > Boundary Conditions > Bolt Pretension.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Boundary Conditions > Bolt Pretension.

• Select the Model object and select Boundary Conditions > Bolt Pretension from the Model
Context tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Insert > Bolt Pretension.

Additional Related Information

See the Specifying Model-Level Boundary Conditions section for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Build Settings
Defines simulation and strain assumptions, process parameters, and build conditions related to an ad-
ditive manufacturing material, machine, and process.

Build Settings for an AM LPBF Inherent Strain system Object Properties (p. 78)
showing Details for the four strain definitions (Isotropic,
Anisotropic, Scan Pattern, and Thermal Strain): Tree Dependencies (p. 85)

Insertion Methods (p. 85)

Right-click Options (p. 85)

API Reference (p. 85)

Additional Related
Information (p. 85)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Build Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Build Settings for an AM LPBF Thermal-Structural system
shown with power heating method:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Build Settings

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Simulation Set- Additive Process: The Additive Process Type - Laser Powder Bed Fusion.
tings The LPBF process uses thermal energy from a laser or electron beam to
selectively fuse powder in a powder bed.

Inherent Strain: Yes or No. If Yes, the AM simulation uses a static

structural system and the loading strains are calculated based on an
experimentally calibrated Strain Scaling Factor. If No, the AM simulation
uses a linked thermal-structural system in which strains are calculated
from temperature-dependent material properties and loads. The
remaining options under Machine Settings differ depending on whether
Inherent Strain = Yes or No.

If Inherent Strain = Yes:

• Inherent Strain Definition: Isotropic, Anisotropic, Scan Pattern,

or Thermal Strain.

– Isotropic assumes that a constant, uniform strain occurs

at every location within a part as it is being built.

– Anisotropic uses the same average strain magnitude as

isotropic strain, but it subdivides that strain into
anisotropic components in the X, Y, and Z directions based
on the Global coordinate system.

– Scan Pattern uses the same average strain magnitude as

isotropic strain, but it subdivides that strain into
anisotropic components based on the local orientation of
scan vectors within the part. Scan vectors may be
generated internally via a slicing function assuming a
rotating stripe scan pattern or input via a build file.

– Thermal Strain is a method that provides the highest

level of fidelity and takes thermal cycling into account at
each location within the part.

• Thermal Strain Method: At this release, only the Machine

Learning Prediction method is available.

– Machine Learning Prediction uses a machine learning

model prediction of the anisotropic Thermal Strain
simulation result from the Ansys Additive
application.—Thermal Strain simulations provide the
highest level of fidelity by predicting how thermal cycling
affects strain accumulation at each location within a part.
The simulation follows the full laser path on every layer,
and is based on the machine process parameters (power,
scan speed, beam diameter, etc.)—The machine learning
model has been trained to predict the Thermal Strain result
much faster than simulation. It can be one to three orders
of magnitude faster than Thermal Strain simulation in

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Build Settings

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Additive Print in calculating the strain that is passed to
the structural solver. Speedup increases with part size,
scan area, and melt pool size. See Thermal Strain -
Anisotropic in the Additive Print and Science User's Guide
and Understanding Machine Learning Thermal Strain.

• Machine Learning Model: A list of materials that were used to

train the ML prediction. Choose the material that most closely
matches your material assignment in Engineering Data. ML models
may be based on different material properties than those in
Engineering Data. The ML models are used to generate loading
strains. Materials in Engineering Data are used for the structural
analysis.

• Layer Height: Sets the element layer height for the mesh, which
must conform to uniform layer sizes in the global Z direction.
Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual. For
Program Controlled, the application finds the first layered
tetrahedrons mesh method that is scoped to the AM build body
and sets the Layer Height to the value specified in the Details
pane of the layered tetrahedrons mesh method. If there are no
layered tetrahedrons meshes present/scoped to the build, then
no Layer Height value is used. When set to Manual, the user
specified Layer Height is used, regardless of whether a layered
tetrahedrons mesh is present.

Calibration Set- Strain Scaling Factor(s): A calibration factor, or factors, used to account
tings for differences in additive machines and materials that you may use to
improve the accuracy of your simulations. The SSF scales the inherent
strains in the analysis by the given value.

• If Inherent Strain = Yes:

– If Inherent Strain Definition = Isotropic, a constant Strain

Scaling Factor may be entered to scale strain everywhere
uniformly.

– If Inherent Strain Definition = Anisotropic, individual

Strain Scaling Factors may be entered for X, Y, and Z
directions based on the Global coordinate system.

– If Inherent Strain Definition = Scan Pattern or Thermal

Strain, individual Strain Scaling Factors, called anisotropic
scaling factors (ASC), may be entered based on the local
orientation of scan vectors within the part, that is, parallel
and perpendicular to scanning direction and in the build
direction.

• If Inherent Strain = No:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
– Thermal Strain Scaling Factor: An optional input that
scales the thermal strains in the structural portion of AM
simulations by a given value.

Machine Set- Properties in this category are illustrated in the following figure:
tings

If Inherent Strain = Yes:

• Scan Pattern Definition (visible if Inherent Strain Definition =

Scan Pattern or Thermal Strain): How the scan pattern is defined,
either generated using a rotating stripe pattern (default) or input
via a build file.

– Generated: Start Layer Angle and Layer Rotation Angle as

defined below. Scan Stripe Width is also visible if Inherent
Strain Definition = Thermal Strain. These inputs define an
internally generated scan pattern.

– Build File: Machine Type and Build File Path inputs become
available with this option. These inputs specify an external
build file to be used.

→ Machine Type: Specifies the machine or OEM

associated with the build file specified. Options are
Additive Industries, EOS, HB3D, Renishaw, Sisma,
SLM, and Trumpf.

→ Build File Path: Location of a .zip file containing the

scan pattern file(s), and an stl of the part geometry.

Build files for simulations that use the Machine

Learning Prediction Thermal Strain Method only
support stripe scan patterns. See Build File

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Build Settings

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Requirements in the LPBF Simulation Guide for
additional requirements.

• Start Layer Angle: The orientation of fill rasters on the first layer
of the part. It is measured from the X axis, such that 0 degrees
results in scan lines parallel to the X axis. The starting layer angle
is commonly set to 57 degrees. Must be between 0 and 180°.

• Layer Rotation Angle: The angle at which the major scan vector
orientation changes from layer to layer. It is commonly 67 degrees.
Must be between 0 and 180°.

• Scan Stripe Width: When using the stripe pattern for scan
strategy, the geometry can be broken up into sections, called
stripes. The stripes are scanned sequentially to break up what
would otherwise be very long continuous scan vectors. Slicing
Stripe Width is commonly set to 10 mm wide. Must be between
1 and 100 mm.

• Hatch Spacing: The average distance between adjacent scan

vectors when rastering back and forth with the laser. Hatch
spacing should allow for a slight overlap of scan vector tracks
such that some of the material re-melts to ensure full coverage
of solid material. For Machine Learning strain definition, must be
between 60 and 1000 microns.

• Deposition Thickness: The thickness of added powder material

in every pass of the recoater blade. Specifically, use the amount
the base plate drops between layers. For Thermal Strain strain
definition, must be between 10 and 100 microns.

• Scan Speed: The average speed at which the laser spot moves
across the powder bed along a scan vector to melt material,
excluding jump speeds and ramp up and down speeds. For
Thermal Strain strain definition, must be between 350 and 2500
mm/sec and the recommended range is between 500 and 2500
mm/sec.

• Beam Power: The power setting for the laser in the machine.
Must be between 50 and 700 Watts. The recommended range is
between 50 and 500 Watts.

• Beam Diameter: The width of the laser on the powder or

substrate surface defined using the D4σ beam diameter definition.
Usually this value is provided by the machine manufacturer.
Sometimes called laser spot diameter. Must be between 20 and
140 µm. The recommended range is between 80 and 120 µm.

If Inherent Strain = No:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Heating Method: Controls how new layers are heated in the
transient thermal analysis. Choose Melting Temperature (default)
or Power.

– Melting Temperature sets the new layer to the melt

temperature specified in Engineering Data.

– Power uses a heat generation load to heat new layers.

• Heating Duration: Visible if Heating Method = Power. The

amount of time the heat is applied, either Scan Time (default) or
Flash.

– Scan Time: Heat is applied for the amount of time it takes

to scan the volume of material in each element layer. This
setting may give better temperature results at the end of
the layer but may not yield a temperature spike above
melting. Note that this Scan Time option will have a
different end time of the simulation because the layer
thickness adjustment for cooling will not be used.

– Flash: Heat is applied in a very short time increment

resulting in a spike in temperature then cooling before
the next element layer is added.

• Beam Power: Visible if Heating Method = Power. The power of

the laser.

• Absorptivity: Visible if Heating Method = Power. The average

fraction of energy that is absorbed by the deposited material and
contributes to the heating process. Must be between 0 and 1.
Defaults to 0.35.

• Hatch Spacing: See above.

• Deposition Thickness: See above.

• Scan Speed: See above.

• Dwell Time: The span of time from the end of the deposition of
a layer to the start of the deposition of the next layer. It includes
the time required for recoater-blade repositioning and
powder-layer spreading.

• Dwell Time Multiple: The dwell-time multiplier accounts for

more than one part in the build. If they are the same part
arranged in the same orientation on the build plate, the multiplier
is the number of parts.

• Number of Heat Sources: For multiple-beam printers, specifies

the number of beams. This divides the amount of time it takes
to scan a layer by the number of heat sources specified.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Build Settings

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Build Condi- Preheat Temperature: The starting temperature of the build plate. Used
tions when Inherent Strain = Yes and Inherent Strain Definition = Thermal
Strain, and when Inherent Strain = No. For Thermal Strain strain
definition, must be between 20 and 500 °C and the recommended range
is between 20 and 200 °C.

If Inherent Strain = No:

• Gas/Powder Temperature: Options include Use Preheat

Temperature (default) and Specified.

• Gas Convection Coefficient: Convection coefficient from the

part to the enclosure gas. The convection is applied only to the
top of a newly laid layer.

• Gas Temperature: Temperature of the gas in the build enclosure.

• Powder Convection Coefficient: Effective convection coefficient

from the sides of the part to the powder bed. To estimate, divide
the conduction property of the powder by a characteristic
conduction length into the powder (for example, a quarter of the
distance from the part boundary to the build-chamber wall).

• Powder Temperature: Temperature of the newly added powder.

• Powder Property Factor: The application uses this factor to

estimate the powder properties. The application applies the factor
to the solid material properties to estimate the properties of the
material in its powder state. The powder-state properties are used
during the heating of the new layer (before its subsequent
solidification and cooldown) prior to the next layer being applied.

Cooldown Con- Room Temperature

ditions
Gas/Powder Temperature: Options include Use Room Temperature
(Inherent (default) and Specified.
Strain = No
option only) Gas Convection Coefficient: Convection coefficient from the part to
the enclosure gas. The convection is applied only to the top of a newly
laid layer.

Gas Temperature: Temperature of the gas in the build enclosure.

Powder Convection Coefficient: Effective convection coefficient from

the part to the powder bed. To estimate, divide the conduction property
of the powder by a characteristic conduction length into the powder
(for example, a quarter of the distance from the part boundary to the
build-chamber wall).

Powder Temperature: Temperature of the newly added powder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: AM Process (p. 21).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Inserted automatically by the AM Process object.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Save Build Settings: Saves your build settings as an XML file. The property values are always
saved in Consistent MKS Unit System.

• Load Build Settings: Imports a build setting XML file. Once loaded, the settings properly populate
the properties of the Details pane. View and use example XML files at: [Ansys Installation Direct-
ory]\aisol\DesignSpace\DSPages\SampleData\AdditiveManufacturing.

• Reset to Default: Resets build settings to default values.

API Reference
See the AM Build Settings section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

LPBF Simulation Guide

Define Build Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chart
Charts loads and/or results against time, or result quantities against a load or another result quantity.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Chart

Object
Properties (p. 89)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 89)

Insertion
Methods (p. 89)

API
Reference (p. 89)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 89)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
For more information on this object's properties, see the Chart and Table section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Chart option from the Insert group on the Home tab.

API Reference
See the Chart section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Chart and Table

• Home Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Commands (APDL)
Enters and executes Mechanical APDL application commands or Mechanical APDL programming.

Note:

Python is used for Transient Structural (Rigid Dynamics) systems.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
Commands (APDL)

Object Properties (p. 92)

Tree Dependencies (p. 93)

Insertion Methods (p. 93)

Object Dependencies for the Transient

Structural (Rigid Dynamics) System (p. 94)

Right-click Options (p. 94)

API Reference (p. 94)

Additional Information (p. 95)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
File File Name: Read-only indication of imported text file name (including
path) if used.

File Status: Read-only indication of the status of an imported text file

if used.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed

Crack Front Selection: This property is only available for a Commands

(APDL) object inserted under a crack object. Options include All
(default), First, Last, and By Number. When you select the By Number
property, an additional property displays: Crack Front Number. The
default value for this property is All. You specify a desired value using
the entry tool that displays when you select the field.

Target: Displays a list of solvers.

Issue Solve Command: Only available for a Commands (APDL) object

inserted under the Environment (p. 211) object for analyses that include
load steps (Static or Transient). It instructs the application to issue the
SOLVE command for a load step (or steps). Property options include
Yes (default) and No.

Invalidate Solution: Applicable for the Solution (p. 703) object only.

Output Search Prefix: Applicable for the Solution (p. 703) object only.

Step Selection Mode: Applicable only when inserting a Commands

object under an environment object for stepped analyses or MSUP
Harmonic Response analyses (standalone or linked).

Step Number: Displays when you select the By Number option for the
Step Selection Mode property.
Input Arguments Entry fields for ARG1 through ARG9.
Results Applicable only when inserting under a Solution (p. 703) object.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Beam (p. 39), Bearing (p. 49), Body (p. 55), Condensed Part (p. 121),
Contact Region (p. 147), Distributed Mass (p. 189), Environment objects (p. 211), Joint (p. 423), Point
Mass (p. 593), Pre-Stress (p. 611), Remote Point (p. 639), Solution (p. 703), Spring (p. 719), and Thermal
Point Mass (p. 765).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Right-click a desired parent object (see above) or in the Geometry window and then select Insert >
Commands.

• Highlight the desired parent object (see above) and select Commands from the Home tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Commands (APDL)

Object Dependencies for the Transient Structural (Rigid Dynamics) System

Valid Parent Objects include the Connections folder, Joint, Spring, Environment, and Joint Condition
objects.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
(The file modification options are also present on the Commands tab.)

• Insert > Commands

• Solve

• Execute Post Commands: Only available when a commands object is (1) contained under the
Solution (p. 703) object and (2) when the analysis has been at least partially solved. Note that
this option is also available when you select multiple command objects.

• Export: Exports the text contained in the Worksheet to an ASCII text file.

Note:

You must right-mouse click the selected object in the tree to use the Export option.
On Windows platforms, if you have the Microsoft Office 2002 (or later) installed,
you may see an Export to Excel option if you right-mouse click in the Worksheet.
This is not the Mechanical application Export feature but rather an option gen-
erated by Microsoft components.

• Import: Imports an ASCII text file into the Worksheet.

• Refresh: Synchronize the text in the Worksheet to that of the currently used ASCII text file.
Refresh can be used to discard changes made to commands text and revert to a previously
imported or exported version.

• Suppress: Suppressed commands will not propagate to the Mechanical APDL application input
file.

• Search Parameters: Appears only if the Commands (APDL) object is under a Solution (p. 703)
object. This option scans the text output and updates the list of detected parameters. Matched
the Mechanical APDL application parameters can be parameterized just as other values in
Workbench can be parameterized. Refer to the next section for details.

• Rename Based on Definition: You can rename the Commands (APDL) object to the name of
an imported or exported file by choosing Rename Based on Definition. The Commands (APDL)
object is renamed to the name appearing in the File Name property under the Details pane.

API Reference
See the Command Snippet section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for additional information:

• Commands Objects

• Specifying Options dialog > Commands

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Comment
Inserts a comment for a Mechanical parent object. The comment editor creates a fragment of HTML,
and the object itself consists of that HTML fragment, a string denoting the author's name, and a color.
Report adds the resulting HTML fragment directly in line, in the specified color and notes the author.
The Comment window provides a number of formatting features, such as inserting an image or applying
various text formats.

Object Properties (p. 97)

Tree Dependencies (p. 97)

Insertion Methods (p. 98)

API Reference (p. 98)

Additional Related
Information (p. 98)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for the Comment object contains only one category (Author) and one text entry field
(Name).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: All objects.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Comment

Insertion Methods
Select the Comment option from the Insert group on the Home tab. The Insert group is available from
a number of Context tabs.

API Reference
See the Comment section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Figures

• Reporting

Note:

When inserting images into a Comment, use the Insert Image option provided on the
Comment's format toolbar. If you attempt to paste an Image (p. 283) into a Comment, the
application will display an error message that may require you to close and reopen the
Mechanical application.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Composite Criterion
Combine the data of multiple Primary Criterion objects.

Object
Properties (p. 99)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 100)

Insertion
Methods (p. 100)

Right-click (p. 100)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 100)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Category Property/Description
Definition Suppressed/Unsuppressed: Options include Yes and No (default).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Composite Criterion

Category Property/Description
Results Value: This read-only property displays the calculated displacement, rotation, force,
or torque. You can parameterize this value.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Model (p. 533) for Measures object and the Solution (p. 703) folder for
Static Structural or Modal analyses.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: This object does not support child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add this object to the Outline from the:

Measures Object

Select the Model object and then select Measures from the Define group on the Model Context
tab. Once the Measures object is inserted, the Composite Criteria option is available from the
Measures Context tab, or by right-clicking the Measures object and selecting Insert > Composite
Criteria.

Static Structural or Modal Analyses

Select the Solution object and then select the Composite Criteria option from the Solution Context
tab, or right-click the Solution object and select Insert > User Defined Criteria > Composite Cri-
teria.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert: Options include Primary Criteria and Composite Criteria. When the object is inserted
under the Solution (p. 703) folder, additional options are available.

• Evaluate All Measures (Measures object only): This option calculates a Result property value
for all defined criteria objects. Available for the Measures object as well as all child objects.

• Evaluate All Results (Solution object).

• Rename Based on Definition: The application automatically renames the criterion objects based
on Base Result type. For example, when the Base Result property for a Composite Criteria object
is set to Mass, the object would be automatically renamed Mass Composite Criteria.

• Clear Generated Data: Clears all object data.

Additional Related Information

See the User Defined Criteria section of the Mechanical User's Guide for the steps to use this object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Composite Failure Criteria Definitions
Generated automatically when you promote a Composite Failure Tool (p. 103) object. A child object is
automatically created and is a copy of the promoted Composite Failure Tool that you can then modify
using the Worksheet. In addition, when promoted, the Defined By property of the Composite Failure
Tool's Reference category automatically changes to the setting Composite Failure Criteria Definitions.
These actions also cause the application to display the Composite Failure Criteria property in the
Composite Failure Tool Reference category. The Composite Failure Criteria property provides a drop-
down list of available child objects of the Composite Failure Criteria Definitions object, if available.

Additional child objects can be added for additional Composite Failure Tool objects. The original Com-
posite Failure Tool objects become read-only but may be changed by changing the Defined By property
to Direct Input. The goal of this feature is to enable you to configure your own combinations of failure
criteria.

Object Properties (p. 101)

Tree Dependencies (p. 102)

Insertion Methods (p. 102)

Right-click Options (p. 102)

Additional Related
Information (p. 102)

Object Properties
The Details pane properties for the Composite Failure Criteria Definitions object as well as its child
objects are described below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Composite Failure Criteria Definitions

Composite Failure Criteria Definitions Object

Type is the only Details pane property for this object.

Composite Failure Tool Criteria Objects

The Details pane properties for the failure criteria objects include the same properties as the
Composite Failure Tool (p. 103) as used to create the object except for the Define By property.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Composite Failure Criteria objects.

Insertion Methods
• Right-click the Composite Failure Tool object and select Promote to Composite Failure Criteria.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Composite Failure Criteria

Relevant right-click options for the criteria child objects include:

• Insert > Composite Failure Criteria

• Export Text File: Export result data to a text file.

Additional Related Information

• Composite Failure Tool

• Composite Failure Tool (Group) (p. 103)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Composite Failure Tool (Group)
Provides result data that corresponds to that of the failure definition in Ansys Composite PrepPost (ACP).
Refer to the Ansys Composite PrepPost User's Guide for the complete workflow associated with com-
posite analyses as well as the Composite Failure Tool section of the Ansys Mechanical Help for a descrip-
tion of the use of this tool.

Important:

• Currently, this feature is not supported on the Linux platform.

• For a Static Structural system linked to a ACP-Pre system, created prior to 2024 R1, Mech-
anical does not support the Composite Failure Tool. You can resolve this issue by cleaning
and updating the ACP-Pre system and then refreshing the inputs of the Static Structural
system.

Object Properties (p. 103)

Composite Failure Tool Result

Objects (p. 104)

Tree Dependencies (p. 106)

Insertion Methods (p. 106)

Right-click Options (p. 106)

API Reference (p. 107)

Additional Related Information (p. 107)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Composite Failure Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only field that displays the tool type - Composite
Failure Tool.
Reference Defined By, options include:

• Direct Input: Define ply criteria properties.

• Composite Failure Criteria Definitions: Available as a

function of a Composite Failure Tool being promoted.

Composite Failure Criteria: Displays when you select Composite

Failure Criteria Definitions for the Defined By property. This
property provides a drop-down list of available Composite Failure
Tools that have been promoted.
Reinforced Ply Criteria Maximum Strain

Maximum Stress

Tsai-Wu

Tsai-Hill

Hoffman

Hashin

Puck

LaCR

Cuntze
Sandwich Criteria Face Sheet Wrinkling

Core Failure

Shear Crimping
Isotropic Material Criteria Von Mises

Composite Failure Tool Result Objects

The result objects Inverse Reserve Factor, Safety Factor, and Safety Margin are only used with the
Composite Failure Tool. The Details pane properties for these objects include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Geometry: Appears if Scoping Method = Geometry. Use

selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field,
then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selection: Appears if Scoping Method = Named Selec-
tion. Specify named selection.

Sub Scope By: Options include:

• Entire Section (default)

• Ply: If selected, a Ply property also displays that requires

you to select a target ply from the Modeling Ply object
in the tree. The result calculation uses the intersection of
the specified Ply and the Geometry property scoping.

Definition Type: Result type indication, can be changed within the same
result category. Options include:

• Inverse Reserve Factor

• Safety Margin

• Safety Factor

Show Critical Failure Mode

Show Critical Layer

Threshold for Text Visualization: Value property.

By: Options include Time and Result Set. They visualize the
intermediate results by a time value or a result set.

Display Time: Appears if By is set to Time.

Set Number: Appears if By is set to Result Set.

Calculate Time History: Currently, time history is not supported.

Suppressed: Suppresses the object if set to Yes.

Integration Point Results Display Option: Read-only indication of either Ply Maximum or
Elemental Maximum.
Results - Read-only status Minimum
indication of result object.
Maximum

Minimum Occurs On

Maximum Occurs On
Information - Read-only Time
status of available results.
Load Step

Substep

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Composite Failure Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Iteration Number

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– Inverse Reserve Factor

– Safety Margin

– Safety Factor

– User Defined Results

See the Composite Failure Tool Result Objects (p. 104) topic below for additional information.

Insertion Methods
• Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Composite Failure
Tool.

• Right-click the Solution object or in the Geometry window, and then select Insert > Composites >
Composite Failure Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Composite Failure Tool

– Inverse Reserve Factor

– Safety Margin

– Safety Factor

– User Defined Results

– Commands (p. 91)

• Solve

• Promote to Composite Failure Criteria

• Export Text File: Export result data to a text file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Clear Generated Data

Note:

You can use promoted composite failure criteria over several load cases to ensure that your
failure analysis for composites is based on the same definition.

API Reference
See the Composite Failure Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Composite Failure Tool

• Composite Failure Criteria Definitions (p. 101)

• Composite Analysis

• Composite Analysis

• Analysis Ply (p. 25)

• Imported Plies (p. 379)

• Specifying Surface Body Layered Sections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Composite Sampling Point Tool (Group)
Provides ply-wise results that were modeled using Ansys Composite PrepPost (ACP).

Refer to the Ansys Composite PrepPost User's Guide for the complete workflow associated with com-
posite analyses as well as the Composite Failure Tool section of the Ansys Mechanical Help for a descrip-
tion of the use of this tool.

Object Properties (p. 109)

Tree Dependencies (p. 110)

Insertion Methods (p. 110)

Right-click Options (p. 110)

API Reference (p. 110)

Additional Related
Information (p. 111)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only field that displays the tool type - Composite Sampling Point
Tool.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Composite Sampling Point Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Reference Defined By: Read-only field that displays the how the object is defined - using
Composite Failure Criteria Definitions. This option is available as a function of
a Composite Failure Tool being promoted.

Composite Failure Criteria: Provides a drop-down list of available Composite

Failure Criteria that have been promoted.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Composite Sampling Point (p. 113).

Insertion Methods
• Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Composite Sampling
Point Tool.

• Right-click the Solution object or in the Geometry window, select Insert > Composites, and then
select Composite Sampling Point Tool.

• Right-click the Insert > Composites options when either the Composite Failure Tool, Composite
Sampling Point Tool, or Composite Sampling Point objects are selected.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Composites > Composite Sampling Point Tool

– Composites > Composite Failure Tool

– Composite Sampling Point

– User Defined Results

– Commands (p. 91)

• Evaluate All Results

• Export Text File: Export result data to a text file.

• Clearing Result Data

API Reference
See the Composite Sampling Point Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting
information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
• Composite Sampling Point Tool

• Composite Failure Tool

• Composite Failure Criteria Definitions (p. 101)

• Imported Plies (p. 379)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Composite Sampling Point
Plots composite part result data. The composite parts are modeled with Ansys Composite PrepPost
(ACP). The result data for this object is obtained from the results of a promoted Composite Failure
Tool (p. 109). When you promote a Composite Failure Tool, the application automatically place a
Composite Failure Criteria Definitions (p. 101) object in the tree that you then use to specify your
desired result criteria.

Object Properties (p. 113)

Tree Dependencies (p. 114)

Insertion Methods (p. 114)

Right-click Options (p. 114)

API Reference (p. 115)

Additional Related
Information (p. 115)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Result type indication, can be changed within the same result
category. Options include:

By: Options include Time and Result Set. They visualize the intermediate
results by a time value or a result set.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Composite Sampling Point

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Display Time: Appears if By is set to Time.

Set Number: Appears if By is set to Result Set.

Suppressed: Suppresses the object if set to Yes.

Scope Geometry

X/Y/Z Coordinate

X/Y/Z Direction

Invert Direction
Information - Time
Read-only status of
available results. Load Step

Substep

Iteration Number

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Composite Sampling Point Tool (p. 109).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Composite Sampling Point Results option on the Composite Sampling Point Context
tab.

• Right-click the Composite Sampling Point Tool object and select Insert > Composite Sampling
Point.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Composite Sampling Point.

• Right-click an existing Composite Sampling Point object and select Insert > Composite Sampling
Point.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Composite Sampling Point

• Evaluate All Results

• Suppress

• Clearing Result Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
API Reference
See the Composite Sampling Point section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting inform-
ation.

Additional Related Information

• Composite Sampling Point Tool

• Composite Failure Tool

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Condensed Geometry
Contains all of the Condensed Part and Imported Condensed Part objects that you create.

Object
Properties (p. 117)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 117)

Insertion
Methods (p. 118)

Right-click
Options (p. 118)

API
Reference (p. 118)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 118)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for the Condensed Geometry object contains only one category Transparency and
one property, Enabled. The default setting for the Enabled property is Yes. As desired you can changes
the setting to No. This property displays the interior of the parts of your model.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Condensed Part (p. 121), Imported Condensed Part (p. 345), and Solution
Information (p. 711).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Condensed Geometry

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Model object:

• Select the Condensed Geometry option on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Condensed Geometry.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and then select Insert > Condensed Geometry.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Condensed Part: Insert a new Condensed Part object.

– Imported Condensed Part: Insert a new Imported Condensed Part (p. 345) object.

– Solution Information: Insert a Solution Information object.

• Generate Condensed Parts: Automatically generate the interfaces for a Condensed Part object.

Note:

– When you generate condensed parts, the application uses the settings of the Dis-
tribute Solution and the Max number of utilized cores options defined in the
Advanced Settings of the Solve Process Settings dialog. You should use the same
setting for the number of cores for the generation process for all condensed parts
as well as your solution.

– The generation process for condensed parts does not currently support the use of
the Remote Solve Manager (RSM).

• Create Automatic Condensed Parts: Automatically generate a Condensed Part object as well
as the interfaces of the parts.

• Clear Generated Data

• Delete Children

• Open Solver Files Directory

API Reference
See the Condensed Geometry section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Working with Substructures

• Condensed Part

• Expansion Tool

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Condensed Part
Defines a set of bodies as a single superelement with the overall inertial and flexibility behavior sum-
marized on a reduced set of degrees of freedom. This allows flexible bodies to participate in Rigid Dy-
namics solver, by exposing only the master nodes necessary to define applicable joints, springs and
other connections in the model. It also enables the synthesis of vibration behavior of more complex
structures by assembling Condensed Parts with other parts in Modal, Rigid Dynamics, and Harmonic
Response (MSUP), Random Vibration, Response Spectrum and Motion analyses.

Important:

Once you have scoped and generated Condensed Parts, any mesh modifications made to
the parts (p. 565) of the model that do not belong to the generated Condensed Parts, do not
require you to regenerate the Condensed Parts. That is, Condensed Parts maintain an up-to-
date status following mesh changes to other model parts. However, there are mesh update
exceptions. If you subsequently apply one or more of the features listed below, your Con-
densed Parts become obsolete and need to be regenerated.

• Mesh Edit

• Element Orientation

• Mesh Numbering

And, Condensed Parts require regeneration if you make any geometry modifications in the
CAD application. This applies even if you have the Smart CAD Update option (SpaceClaim
only) of the Advanced Geometry Options in Geometry cell properties of the Project
Schematic. See the Geometry Preferences section in the CAD Integration documentation for
more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Condensed Part

Object
Properties (p. 123)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 125)

Insertion
Methods (p. 125)

Right-click
Options (p. 125)

API
Reference (p. 126)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 127)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Geometry (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry.

Displays the type of geometry (Body only) and the number of geometric
entities (for example: 1 Body) for your selections.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of available user-defined
Named Selections.
Definition Scope Mode: Read-only property indicating the scoping mode (Manual).

Suppressed: Yes or No.

Environment Temperature: The default setting is 22°C. Used for the

evaluation of temperature-dependent material properties. In addition,
this value is used as the material reference temperature for the
condensed part bodies.

Physics Type: Read-only property indicating the physics type

(Structural).

Matrix Reduction Method: Read-only property indicating the

Component Mode Synthesis (CMS) method.

Interface Method: Options include Fixed (default) or Free.

Number of Modes to Use: Displays the number of modes to be used

for the generation pass solve.

Limit Search to Range: Options include Yes or No (default). If set to

Yes, the Range Minimum, and Range Maximum properties display.

Range Minimum: Defines the minimum frequency for the specified

CMS modes.

Range Maximum: Defines the maximum frequency for the specified

CMS modes.

Solver Type

Lumped Mass Formulation: Options include Program Controlled

(default) or Off, and On.

Added Mass Treatment: Specifies how the added masses (from Point
Mass and Distributed Mass) are treated by the Condensed Part. Options
include Internal and On Interface (default).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Condensed Part

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Generate Damping Matrix: Options include Program Controlled
(default), Yes, and No. Selecting Program Controlled or Yes generates
stiffness, mass, and damping matrices. When you select No, the
application generates only stiffness and mass matrices and does not
generate damping matrices. Refer to the SEOPT command in the
Mechanical APDL Command Reference for more details.

Keep Files For: Specifies which files the application generates during
the solution. Options include:

• Use Pass Only: Using this option, the application generates

solution files required to perform a Use Pass analysis. No
Expansion Pass can be performed when this option is selected.

• On Demand Expansion: Using this option, the application

generates solution files required to perform a Use Pass analysis
as well as On Demand Expansion.

Note:

You must set the On Demand Expansion

property to Yes in the Options for Analyses
category of the Analysis Settings.

• MAPDL Expansion (default): Using this option, the application

generates solution files required to perform a Use Pass analysis
and expand the results on the condensed parts using both
MAPDL Expansion and/or On Demand Expansion.

Note:

To include expanded results, you must also set

the On Demand Expansion property to Yes in
the Options for Analyses category of the Analysis
Settings. The default setting for this property is
No. You can change this default setting using
the On Demand Expansion preference contained
in the Options (Modal, Harmonic and Transient
Mode Superposition) category of the Analysis
Settings and Solution preferences. When you set
the default to Yes, the Keep Files For property
is also set to On Demand Expansion as the
default.

Interfaces Number of Interfaces: Read-only display of the number of interface

entries detected by the application.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Number of Master Nodes: Read-only display of the number of
superelement master nodes resulting from interfaces.
Analysis Data Man- These properties mimic Analysis Settings for Most Analysis Types for
agement Analysis Data Management. See the Analysis Data Management section
of the Help for additional information.

Solver Files Directory: Read-only property indicating the location of

the solution files for this analysis.

Future Analysis: Options include Ansys Rigid Dynamics, Motion or

None (default).

Solver Units: Options include Active System (default) or Manual.

Solver Unit System: Based on the setting of the Solver Units property.
It is read-only if Active System is selected, otherwise you can select the
system when the property is set to Manual.
Statistics Number of Master Nodes: Read-only property available (only) when
you generate (generation pass) the Condensed Part object. It displays
the number of master nodes generated for the part. The value of this
property gets updated only when you execute the Generate Condensed
Part operation again.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Condensed Geometry (p. 117).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Condensed Geometry object:

• Select the Condensed Part option from the Condensed Geometry Context tab.

• Select Create Automatic Condensed Parts via the Condensed Geometry object.

• Right-click the Condensed Geometry object and select Insert > Condensed Part.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and then select Insert > Condensed Part.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Condensed Part: Insert a new Condensed Part object.

– Solution Information: Insert a new Specifying Solution Information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Condensed Part

– Commands: Insert a new Using the Command Object.

• Generate Condensed Parts: Perform a generation pass on the selected Condensed Part object(s).

Important:

– Once you have scoped and generated Condensed Parts, any mesh modifications
made to the parts (p. 565) of the model that do not belong to the generated Con-
densed Parts, do not require you to regenerate the Condensed Parts. That is, Con-
densed Parts maintain an up-to-date status following mesh changes to other
model parts. However, there are a few exceptions. If you have imported your
model using external systems, External Model and/or Mechanical Model systems,
any geometry modifications to geometries not specified as a Condensed Part, do
cause the Condensed Parts to become obsolete and require regeneration. In addition,
the use of features such as Mesh Edit, Element Orientation, or Mesh Numbering
objects cause up-to-date Condensed Parts to become obsolete and require regen-
eration.

– The generation of Condensed Parts is performed using the Distribute Solution

and the Max number of utilized cores options defined in the Advanced Settings
of the Solve Process Settings dialog. It is recommended that you use the same
number of cores for generating all condensed parts and solving the analysis.

– Solution processing using the Remote Solve Manager (RSM) is currently not sup-
ported.

• Detect Condensed Part Interface: Automatically generate the interfaces for a Condensed Part
object.

Note:

– Imported loads and connections are not automatically detected as inter-

faces. You need to add the corresponding master nodes via a Named Se-
lection on the Condensed Part Worksheet.

– Loads that can be scoped to bodies, such as Acceleration, are not detected
automatically as interfaces if the loads are scoped to condensed part(s).

• Suppress

• Clear Generated Data

• Open Solver Files Directory

API Reference
See the Condensed Part section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for more information:

• Working with Substructures

• Expansion Tool

• Expansion Settings on the Worksheet: See the Expansion section.

• Substructure Generation Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Connections
Defines connections between two or more parts or bodies. Includes global settings in Details pane that
apply to all Contact Region (p. 147), Spot Weld (p. 715), Body Interaction (p. 65) (for explicit dynamics
analyses), Joint (p. 423), Spring (p. 719), and Beam (p. 39) child objects.

Object
Properties (p. 130)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 130)

Insertion
Methods (p. 130)

Right-click
Options (p. 131)

API
Reference (p. 131)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 131)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Connections

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Auto Generate Automatic Connection on Refresh
Detection
Transparency Enabled
Stat- This category contains read-only properties that display the number of contact
istics conditions and connection types (defined and active) present in project, including:

• Contacts

• Active Contacts

• Joints

• Active Joints

• Beams

• Active Beams

• Bearings

• Active Bearings

• Springs

• Active Springs

• Body Interactions

• Active Body Interactions

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Beam (p. 39), Body Interactions (p. 63), Comment (p. 97), Connection
Group (p. 133) (including those named Contacts, and Joints), Contact Tool, Figure (p. 241), Im-
age (p. 283), Joint (p. 423), Solution Information (p. 711), Spot Weld (p. 715), and Spring (p. 719).

Insertion Methods
• Automatically inserted in the tree if connection is detected when model is attached.

• For setting connections manually, use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533)
object:

– Select the Connections option on Model Context Tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Right-click the Model (p. 533) object or in the Geometry window Insert > Connections.

Note:

These options are not available if a Connections object already exists in the tree.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Create Automatic Connections: Available only if at least one Connection Group folder is present.

• Check Overlapping Contact Regions

• Redundancy Analysis: Available if at least one Joint object is present.

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

API Reference
See the Connections section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Beams • Contact Ease of Use

Features
• Body Interactions
• Contact Tool and
• Connections Overview Results

• Automatically Generated • Contact Options

Connections Preferences

• Contact Region Settings • Joints

• Resolving Overlapping Contact • Spot Welds

Regions
• Springs

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Connection Group
Defines connections among selected bodies. Includes global settings in Details pane that apply to all
Contact Region or Joint (p. 423) child objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Connection Group

Object
Properties (p. 134)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 136)

Insertion
Methods (p. 136)

Right-click
Options (p. 136)

API
Reference (p. 137)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 137)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Connection Type
Scope Scoping Method

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry
Selection. In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to

Named Selection.

Source Assembly: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to

Source Assembly (Only applicable for Assembled External and
Mechanical Models).
Auto Detection Tolerance Type

Tolerance Slider

Tolerance Value

Use Range

Min Distance Percentage

Min Distance Value

Face/Face

Face/Face Angle Tolerance: Visible when the Face/Face property

is set to Yes. When working with Face/Face automatic contact
detection, this property enables you to define the minimum angle
between two face normals. This minimum angle is the threshold
below which the application will ignore the faces from proximity
detection. The default value is 75°, the minimum value is 0°, and the
maximum value is 90°
(perpendicular).

Face Overlap Tolerance: Appears only for contact groups when

Face/Face is set to Yes.

Cylindrical Faces (3D Only): Only visible when the Connection Type
property is set to Contact and the Face/Face property is set to Yes.
Options include:

• Include (default): Includes contacts that involve cylindrical

faces in the detection.

• Exclude: Excludes contacts that involve cylindrical faces from

the detection.

• Only: Detects only contacts that involve cylindrical faces.

Face/Edge: Only displays for contact groups.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
Connection Group

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Edge Overlap Tolerance: Only displays for contact groups when
Face/Edge is set to Yes, Only Solid Body Edges, or Only Surface
Body Edges.

Edge/Edge: Only displays for contact groups.

Priority: Only displays for contact groups.

Group By

Search Across

Revolute Joints: Only displays for joint groups.

Fixed Joints: Only displays for joint groups.

Statistics Connections: Displays the number of connections associated with
this parent object.

Active Connections: Displays the number of connections that are

currently active for this parent object (that is, not Suppressed).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Contact Region (p. 147), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283),
and Joint (p. 423).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Click Connection Group on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object (or on another Connection Group object), or in the
Geometry window; then Insert > Connection Group.

• Insert a Contact Region (p. 147) or Joint (p. 423) object. A separate parent Connection Group
object is created automatically for each of these two types of objects, and is renamed Contacts
or Joints accordingly.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Check Overlapping Contact Regions

• Create Automatic Connections

• Enable/Disable Transparency

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Set Default APDL Names

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Delete Children

API Reference
See the Connection Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Automatically Generated Connections

• Resolving Overlapping Contact Regions

• Contact Settings

• Joints

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Construction Geometry
Contains one or more Path (p. 575), Surface (p. 747), Solid (p. 699), Construction Line, and/or STL (p. 725)
objects.

You can scope results to Path and Surface construction geometries.

Tree
Dependencies (p. 139)

Insertion
Methods (p. 139)

API
Reference (p. 140)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 140)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Path (p. 575), Surface (p. 747),
Solid (p. 699), Construction Line, and STL (p. 725).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533) object:

• Open the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context Tab and select Path,
Surface, Solid, Line, or STL.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Construction Geometry

• Right-click the Model (p. 533) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Construction
Geometry > Path, Surface, Solid, Line, or STL.

Note:

The Model folder can contain only one Construction Geometry object.

API Reference
See the Construction Geometry section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Specifying Construction Geometry

• Path Object Reference (p. 575)

• Surface Object Reference (p. 747)

• Solid Object Reference (p. 699)

• Construction Line Object Reference (p. 141)

• STL Object Reference (p. 725)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Construction Line
Sketches and generates Line Bodies on the model you have imported into Mechanical. You can create
multiple Construction Line objects.

For the newly created line body or bodies, you need to specify a Cross Section (p. 177) and assign a
material. Review the Body (p. 55) object reference section for descriptions of all of the associated geo-
metry properties.

Also see the Specifying Construction Geometry section.

Object
Properties (p. 142)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 143)

Insertion
Methods (p. 143)

Right-click
Options (p. 143)

API
Reference (p. 143)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Construction Line

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Sketch Selection Method: Options for this property include:

• Interactive (default): Sketch line segments either on a

specified plane or free hand using the Planar or Freeform
options.

• Coordinate System: Sketch line segments onto a specified

plane (Coordinate System) or free hand using the Planar
or Freeform options.

Active Sketch Details Sketch ID: Read-only property that shows an application defined
ID of the active sketch. You can use this ID for Construction Line
ACT APIs.

Association Type: Read-only property that shows the entity type

for the active sketch. Options include Geometric and Coordinate
System.

Association ID: Read-only property that shows the ID of the

sketch’s object based on the setting of the Association Type
property, either Geometric or Coordinate System. If set to
Geometric, the ID is a geometric entity ID (See “GeoEntityById”
in the ACT API Reference Guide). If set to Coordinate System,
the ID is an object ID (the Coordinate System’s object in the
Outline).

Note:

These ID values are compatible with the Mechanical

ACT APIs.

Image Plane Properties The properties of this category enable you to import and overlay
an image on your model to accurately sketch line bodies on or
around your model.

Image File: Import an image that you will overlay on your model
and use to accurately sketch one or more line segments.

Coordinate System: Specify where to place your image based

on a Coordinate System.

Show Coordinate System: Show the selected Coordinate System

triad on the model. Options include Yes or No (default).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Width: Specify the physical width of your image. For the best
results, it is recommended that the ratio of physical width to
physical height matches the aspect ratio of your image.

Height: Specify the physical height of your image. For the best
results, it is recommended that the ratio of physical width to
physical height matches the aspect ratio of your image.

Translucency: Increasing the value makes your image more and

more transparent which may help you sketch a more accurate
line.

Horizontal Flip: Reverse your image horizontally.

Vertical Flip: Reverse your image vertically.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Construction Geometry.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and/or Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533) object:

• Open the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context tab and select Line.

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Line.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Line.

• Update Geometry

• Remove Geometry

• Go To > Corresponding Bodies in Tree

API Reference
See the Construction Line section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact Debonding
Defines contact regions along a contact interface that will separate.

Object Properties (p. 145)

Tree Dependencies (p. 146)

Insertion Methods (p. 146)

Right-click Options (p. 146)

API Reference (p. 146)

Additional Related
Information (p. 146)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type - Read-only field that describes the object - Contact Debonding.
Method - Read-only field that describes the formulation used to
introduce the fracture mechanism - Cohesive Zone Material (CZM)
model.
Material - Fly-out menu for Material selection or specification. Materials
are specified in Engineering Data.
Suppressed - Includes or excludes the object in the analysis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Contact Debonding

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Contact Region - Specify the Contact Region of the contact interface
that is associated with the Contact Debonding object. The properties
for the contact elements require that the contact Type be Bonded or
No Separation contact and that the Formulation is specified as the
Augmented Lagrange method or the Pure Penalty method.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91)

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Fracture object:

• Click the Contact Debonding option on the Fracture Context Tab.

• Right-click the Fracture (p. 243) object, Interface Delamination (p. 415) object, or Contact De-
bonding object and select Insert > Contact Debonding.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Interface Delamination

– Contact Debonding

– SMART Crack Growth

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Contact Debonding section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Interface Delamination and Contact Debonding

• Fracture Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact Region
Defines conditions for individual contact and target pairs. Several Contact Regions can appear as child
objects under a Connection Group (p. 133) object. The Connection Group object name automatically
changes to Contacts.

Object Properties (p. 147)

Tree Dependencies (p. 148)

Insertion Methods (p. 148)

Right-click Options (p. 148)

API Reference (p. 149)

Addition Related Information (p. 149)

Object Properties
Choose the object properties below that apply to your analysis type.
1. Contact Region - Most Structural Analyses
2. Contact Region - Explicit Dynamics Analyses
3. Contact Region - Thermal and Electromagnetic Analyses
4. Contact Region - Rigid Body Dynamics Analyses

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Contact Region

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connection Group (p. 133).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) or Connection Group (p. 133)
object:

• Inserted automatically if you choose Create Automatic Connections through a right mouse
click Connections (or Contacts) object.

• Click Contact on Connections Context Tab and choose a contact type.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) folder (or Connection Group (p. 133)) object or in the Geo-
metry window, and select Insert > Manual Contact Region.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Create: When you select a Contact Region object (or multiple Contact Region objects), the
Create context menu option provides the following additional options:

Contact Sizing

Creates a Contact Sizing control under the Mesh folder.

Contact Tool

Creates a Contact Tool under the Connections folder. The application automatically
scopes the tool to the selected Contact Region(s) only.

Mesh Contact(s) or Connection(s)

Creates Mesh Connection and Contact Match objects from Contact Regions. The ap-
plication scopes the new Mesh Connection or Contact Match objects to the geometries
of the Contact Region(s) and sets the tolerance to be equal to the trim tolerance of the
contact region. The Mesh Connections and Contact Matches are added into new Mesh
Connection Group and Contact Match Group folders.

Environment Submenu

The Create option provides a submenu of options to create specific result objects for
environments that include the options shown below. The application inserts the corres-
ponding object under the Solution folder for the selected environment and automatically
scopes the object to the Contact Region (or Contact Regions).

– Force Reaction

– Moment Reaction

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Contact Tracker

– Contact Tool

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Contact/Target

• Set Default APDL Names

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Go to Connections for Duplicate Pairs: Available if connection object shares the same geometries
with other connection objects.

• Save Contact Region Settings

• Load Contact Region Settings

• Reset to Default

• Promote to Named Selection

API Reference
See the Contact Region section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Contact Region Settings

• Automatically Generated Connections

• Global Connection Settings - See the Connections Folder and Connection Group Folder sections.

• Connections Context

• Setting Contact Conditions Manually

• Contact Ease of Use Features

• Contact Tool and Results

• Contact Options Preferences

• Interface Delamination using Ansys Composite PrepPost (ACP)

• Mesh Connections

• Contact Matches

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Contact Region

1. Contact Region - Most Structural Analyses

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Interface: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Pre-Gener-

ated Interface.

Contact

Target

Shared Contact Body or Shared Target Body

Contact Bodies

Target Bodies

Edge Contact Type

Line-Line Detection

Beam-Beam Model

Protected

Contact Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Target Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Shell Thickness Effect

Definition Type

Friction Coefficient: Displays if Type = Frictional

Scope Mode

Behavior

Trim Contact

Trim Tolerance: Displays if Trim Contact is set to On.

Contact/Target APDL Name

Suppressed
Advanced Formulation

Detection Method

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Contact Region - Most Structural Analyses

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Penetration Tolerance

Elastic Slip Tolerance

Normal Stiffness

Normal Stiffness Factor: Displays if Normal Stiffness = Manual

Constraint Type: Displays if Formulation = MPC and scoping of

Contact Bodies or Target Bodies is to a surface body.

Update Stiffness: Displays if Formulation = Augmented Lagrange

or Pure Penalty

Stabilization Damping Factor: Helps reduce the risk of rigid body

motion. Available for Frictionless, Rough, and Frictional contact
types.

Thermal Conductance

Pinball Region

Pinball Radius: Displays Pinball Region = Radius.

Electric Conductance

Electric Conductance Value: If Electric Conductance = Manual

Time Step Controls: Displays if Type = Frictionless, Rough, or

Frictional

Restitution Factor: Rigid Body Dynamics Solver Only

Material: Displays if Formulation = Beam.

Radius: Displays if Formulation = Beam.

Geometric Interface Treatment
Modification
Offset: Displays if Interface Treatment = Add Offset

Contact Geometry Correction: Supporting properties include:

• Orientation

• Mean Pitch Diameter

• Pitch Distance

• Thread Angle

• Thread Type

• Handedness

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Contact Region

Basics of Contact Region object (p. 147)

2. Contact Region - Explicit Dynamics Analyses

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Contact

Target

Contact Bodies

Target Bodies
Definition Type

Friction Coefficient: Displays if Type = Frictional

Dynamic Coefficient: Displays if Type = Frictional

Decay Constant: Displays if Type = Frictional

Scope Mode

Behavior

Maximum Offset: Displays if Type = Bonded

Breakable: Displays if Type = Bonded

Normal Stress Limit: Displays if Type = Bonded and Breakable =

Stress Criteria

Normal Stress Exponent: Displays if Type = Bonded and Breakable

= Stress Criteria

Shear Stress Limit: Displays if Type = Bonded and Breakable =

Stress Criteria

Shear Stress Exponent: Displays if Type = Bonded and Breakable

= Stress Criteria

Suppressed

In LS-DYNA analyses, additional properties are available using the Contact Properties object, which can
be added under each Contact Region or Body Interaction object. This object enables advanced usage
of the contact.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Contact Region - Thermal and Electromagnetic Analyses

Basics of Contact Region object (p. 147)

3. Contact Region - Thermal and Electromagnetic Analyses

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Contact

Target

Contact Bodies

Target Bodies

Contact Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Target Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Definition Type

Friction Coefficient: If Type = Frictional

Scope Mode

Behavior

Suppressed
Advanced Formulation

Constraint Type: Displays if Formulation = MPC and scoping of

Contact Bodies or Target Bodies is to a surface body.

Interface Treatment

Offset: Displays if Interface Treatment = Add Offset.

Normal Stiffness (Magnetostatic analyses and all thermal analyses):

Displays if Formulation = Augmented Lagrange, Pure Penalty, or
MPC.

Normal Stiffness Factor (Magnetostatic analyses and all thermal

analyses): Displays if Normal Stiffness = Manual.

Update Stiffness (Magnetostatic analyses and all thermal analyses):

Displays if Formulation = Augmented Lagrange, Pure Penalty, or
MPC.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Contact Region

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Thermal Conductance (Magnetostatic analyses and all thermal
analyses).

Thermal Conductance Value (Magnetostatic analyses and all thermal

analyses): Displays if Thermal Conductance = Manual.

Electrical Conductance (Electric and Magnetostatic analyses)

Electrical Conductance Value (Electric and Magnetostatic analyses):

If Electric Conductance = Manual.

Pinball Region

Pinball Radius: Displays if Pinball Region = Radius.

Time Step Controls: Displays if Type = Frictionless, Rough, or

Frictional.

Basics of Contact Region object (p. 147)

4. Contact Region - Rigid Body Dynamics Analyses

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Contact

Target

Contact Bodies

Target Bodies

Contact Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Target Shell Face: Displays for surface bodies.

Definition Type
Advanced Restitution Factor
Statistics Connections: Displays the number of connections associated with
this parent object.

Active Connections: Displays the number of connections that are

currently active for this parent object (that is, not Suppressed).

Basics of Contact Region object (p. 147)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Contact Tool (Group)
Determines contact conditions on an assembly both before loading and as part of the final solution.

Applies to the following objects: Contact Tool, Frictional Stress, Gap, Initial Information, Penetration,
Pressure, Sliding Distance, and Status.

Object Properties (p. 155)

Tree Dependencies (p. 155)

Insertion Methods (p. 156)

Right-click Options (p. 156)

Additional Related
Information (p. 156)

Object Properties
For more information on this object's properties, see the Contact Tool section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects:

– For Contact Tool: Connections (p. 129) and Solution (p. 703).

– For Frictional Stress, Pressure, Sliding Distance, and Fluid Pressure: Contact Tool under Solu-
tion (p. 703) object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Contact Tool (Group)

– For Gap, Penetration, and Status: Contact Tool under Connections (p. 129) object or Solu-
tion (p. 703) object.

– For Initial Information: Contact Tool under Connections (p. 129) object only.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– For Contact Tool under Connections (p. 129) object: Comment (p. 97), Gap, Image (p. 283), Initial
Information, Penetration, and Status.

– For Contact Tool under Solution (p. 703) object: Comment (p. 97), Gap, Frictional Stress, Im-
age (p. 283), Penetration, Pressure, Sliding Distance, Fluid Pressure, and Status.

– For Frictional Stress, Gap, Penetration, Pressure, Sliding Distance, and Fluid Pressure:
Alert (p. 15), Comment (p. 97), Convergence (p. 159), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

– For Initial Information: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

– For Status: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• To insert a Contact Tool under Connections (p. 129) object, use any of the following once you have
selected the Connections object:

– Select the Contact Tool option from the Contact group of the Connections Context Tab.

– Right-click and select Insert > Contact Tool.

– Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Contact Tool.

• To insert a Contact Tool under Solution (p. 703) object, use any of the following methods once you
have selected the Solution object:

– Select the Contact Tool option from the Toolbox drop-down menu of the Solution Context Tab.

– Right-click and select Insert > Contact Tool > Contact Tool.

– Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Contact Tool > Contact Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Generate Initial Condition Results: Available for Contact Tool and all child objects when the
Contact Tool is inserted under a Connections (p. 129) object.

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Contact Tool and all child objects when the Contact Tool is
inserted under a Solution (p. 703) object.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Contact Tool

• Setting Connections

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Convergence
Controls the relative accuracy of a solution by refining solution results on a particular area of a model.
The Convergence object is applicable to Static Structural, Modal, Eigenvalue Buckling, Steady-State
Thermal, and Magnetostatic analyses.

Note:

Convergence is not supported if your analysis includes an active Contact Step Control.

The Convergence object has a number of requirements associated with it's use. See the Adaptive
Convergence section for a listing of all usage requirements.

Object Properties (p. 159)

Tree Dependencies (p. 160)

Insertion Methods (p. 160)

API Reference (p. 160)

Additional Related
Information (p. 160)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
Convergence

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type

Allowable Change
Results Last Change: Read-only indication of the most recent change in
convergence.

Converged: Read-only indication of the convergence state (Yes or No).

Tree Dependencies
Valid Parent Tree Objects: Several result objects (p. 665).

Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Right-click a result object (p. 665) and select Insert > Convergence. When a result object is active, you
can also right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Convergence.

API Reference
See the Convergence section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Adaptive Convergence

• Error (Structural)

• Error (Thermal)

• Mechanical Options - Convergence

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Coordinate System
Represents a local coordinate system that you can add under a Coordinate Systems (p. 167) object.

Object
Properties (p. 162)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 165)

Insertion
Methods (p. 165)

Right-click
Options (p. 165)

API
Reference (p. 165)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 165)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Coordinate System

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type

Options include Cartesian and Cylindrical.

Coordinate System

Options include Program Controlled and Manual.

They assign the coordinate system reference number

automatically or manually. If you specify Manual, the Coordin-
ate System ID property displays. Enter a value greater than
or equal to 12. Coordinate systems must have a unique ID.

APDL Name

When using the Mechanical APDL solver, this text-based field

enables you to create an APDL parameter (in the input file)
and assign its value to the reference number of the
coordinate system. This facilitates easy programmatic
identification of the coordinate system for later use/reference
in a Command object.

Suppressed

Options include Yes and No (default). Suppressing a

coordinate system removes the object from further treatment,
and writes no data to the input deck, and causes any objects
scoped to the coordinate system to become underdefined
(therefore invalidating solutions).

Origin Define By

Options include Geometry Selection (default), Named

Selection, and Global Coordinates.

Geometry

When the Define By is set to Geometry Selection, this

property displays. You use this property to select geometry
or mesh entities that define the origin of the Coordinate
System.

Named Selection

When the Define By is set to Named Selection, this property

displays. Select a user-defined Named Selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Origin X

Enter an X location on the coordinate axis from the (0, 0, 0)

location.

Origin Y

Enter a Y location on the coordinate axis from the (0, 0, 0)

location.

Origin Z

Enter a Z location on the coordinate axis from the (0, 0, 0)

location.

Location

Visible when the Define By property is set to Global

Coordinates. You can specify the property by:

• Selecting geometric entities (vertex, edge, or face).

• Selecting mesh entities (Node, Element Face, or

Element)

• Using the Hit Point Coordinate option on the

Graphics Toolbar.

Principal Axis Axis

Options include: X, Y, and Z. This property defines the

Principal Axis vector with respect to one of these planes.

Define By

Property options include:

Geometry Selection
Fixed Vector
Global X Axis
Global Y Axis
Global Z Axis
Hit Point Normal

Orientation About Principal Axis

Axis
Based on the Principal Axis settings above, define the
Orientation About Principal Axis vector with respect to the
X, Y, or Z plane.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Coordinate System

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Define By

Property options include:

Default
Geometry Selection
Global X
Global Y
Global Z
Fixed Vector

Directional Vectors X Axis Data

A read-only mathematical representation, in matrix form,

showing of the X vector orientation in space.

Y Axis Data

A read-only mathematical representation, in matrix form,

showing of the Y vector orientation in space.

Z Axis Data

A read-only mathematical representation, in matrix form,

showing of the Z vector orientation in space.

Transformations Base Configuration

Read-only property - Absolute.

Transformation Features

The following properties can be added to the active

coordinate system object from the Coordinate System
Context. They change the location and rotation of the original
definition of the coordinate system. These properties are
order-dependent and that order may be modified using the
Move Up and Move Down features of the Coordinate System
Context.

Offset X
Offset Y
Offset Z
Rotate X
Rotate Y
Rotate Z
Flip X

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Flip Y
Flip Z

Transformation Configuration

Read-only property that displays the transformed coordinate

point locations from the origin.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Coordinate Systems (Group) (p. 167).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after you select either the Coordinate Systems folder object, the
Global Coordinate System (p. 281) object, or any another child Coordinate System object:

• Select the Coordinate System option from the Insert group of the Coordinate System tab.

• Select the Coordinate System option from the Insert group of the Home tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Coordinate System.

• Right-click within the Geometry window and select Insert > Coordinate System.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Coordinate System

• Insert > Coordinate System at Center of Mass

• Create Section Plane

• Create Construction Surface

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Coordinate System section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Coordinate System

• Setting Up Coordinate Systems

• Creating Coordinate Systems

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Coordinate Systems (Group)
Houses all coordinate systems for the analysis. This includes a Global Coordinate System (p. 281)
(automatically generated) as well as any local Coordinate System (p. 161) objects.

Tree Dependencies (p. 167)

Insertion Methods (p. 167)

Right-click Options (p. 167)

API Reference (p. 168)

Additional Related
Information (p. 168)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Coordinate System (p. 161), Figure (p. 241), Global
Coordinate System (p. 281), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
The Coordinate Systems object is automatically inserted into the tree.

Note:

Only one Coordinate Systems (parent) object is valid per Model (p. 533) object.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Coordinate Systems (Group)

• Insert > Coordinate System

• Insert > Coordinate System at Center of Mass

API Reference
See the Coordinate Systems section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Setting Up Coordinate Systems

• Creating Coordinate Systems

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Corner Crack
Inserts a corner crack into a solid body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Corner Crack

Object Properties (p. 170)

Tree Dependencies (p. 172)

Insertion Methods (p. 172)

Right-click Options (p. 172)

API Reference (p. 173)

Additional Related Information (p. 173)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click in the Geometry
field, then click Apply.
Defin- Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system generated identification
i- value. The application uses this identifier when creating solution identifiers for fracture
tion parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system that defines the
orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified coordinate system must be directed
towards the normal of the crack plane and the crack plane always lies in the X-Z plane
of the specified coordinate system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Corner.

Major Radius: Specifies the major radius, which defines the size of the crack shape
along the Z axis (that is, the width of the crack). Enter a value greater than 0.

Minor Radius: Specifies the minor radius, which defines the size of the crack shape
along the X axis (that is, the depth of the crack). Enter a value greater than 0. You
can parameterize this property.

Mesh Method: This is a read-only property set to Tetrahedrons, the only supported
method.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the crack shape.
Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this property.

Growth Rate: This property specifies the factor with which the mesh layers will grow
along the radius of the crack. Specify a value greater than 1. The default value is 1.2.
The recommended value is equal to or greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: This property specifies the element size for the crack front. The
default value is computed using crack length. Specify a value greater than 0.

Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the crack shape. The
value you enter must be equal to or greater than 1. The default setting is 6.

Note:

The maximum number of mesh contours the Geometry window can

display is 100. However, you can specify a higher value and the
application will process it accordingly.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which you want to
compute the fracture result parameters. The value you enter must be less than or
equal to the value of Mesh Contours, and cannot be greater than 99. By default, the
value is Match Mesh Contours, indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Corner Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
to the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match Mesh Con-
tours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Corner Crack object. The default is No. The
application automatically suppresses the crack object if the scoped body becomes
suppressed.
Buf- This category includes the following properties:
fer
Zone • X Scale Factor
Scale
Factors • Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and Z directions,
relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling parameter, use the slider to
set a value from 2 to 50. The default is 2. The maximum dimension among the three
directions of the crack is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a
buffer zone.
Named Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh is generated.
Se- These Named Selections are a special type of Named Selection. For more information
lec- about this category and its properties, see the Defining a Corner Crack section as well
tions as the Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For information
Cre- about Named Selections in general, refer to Named Selections in the Mechanical Object
ation Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Corner Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu.
Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Corner Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Corner Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Cross Sections
Contains all Cross Section Objects (p. 177). Typically, when you import line bodies, Mechanical reads
whether each body has an associated cross section. Cross section data is presented as a Cross Section
object following import. Imported line bodies can include data for multiple cross sections. In addition,
you can use the options of the Cross Section Context Tab to manually define cross sections. or modify
the values of your imported cross section(s).

Important:

The application cannot complete the solution process if one or more cross sections share
the same name and will display an Error message when duplicate names are encountered.
You can manually change the names (in your CAD application or in Mechanical) or use the
context (right-click) menu option Rename Cross Sections with Same Name to have the
application change the duplicate names. Also note that, if you are using Model-to-Model
linking, Ansys recommends that you set the Workbench Project page Object Renaming
property accordingly.

Object Properties (p. 176)

Tree Dependencies (p. 176)

Insertion Methods (p. 176)

Right-click Options (p. 176)

API Reference (p. 176)

Additional Related
Information (p. 176)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Cross Sections

Object Properties
This object's Details includes only the Statistics category with the property Cross Sections that displays
the number of objects contained in the folder.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: The Cross Sections object automatically includes one or more child objects
(Cross Section Objects (p. 177)) that include the associated cross section data defined in the upstream
system.

Insertion Methods
The application automatically inserts this object as well as its associated child objects.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [available types of cross sections]

• Import/Update from Geometry Source

• Rename Cross Sections with Same Name

API Reference
See the Cross Sections section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Line Bodies

• Cross Section Objects (p. 177)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Cross Section Objects
Manages imported cross sections. The application automatically generates cross section objects when
you import a line body that includes cross sectional data. For each imported cross section, there is an
associated cross section object that displays the cross section type specified in a CAD application as
well as via External Model. These objects are contained in the Cross Sections folder (p. 175) and provide
data for the associated CAD cross section specifications of your imported line body. You can modify
cross section Dimension values in the Details of the object(s).

Important:

The application cannot complete the solution process if one or more cross sections share
the same name and will display an Error message when duplicate names are encountered.
You can manually change the names (in your CAD application or in Mechanical) or use the
context (right-click) menu option Rename Cross Sections with Same Name to have the
application change the duplicate names. Also note that, if you are using Model-to-Model
linking, Ansys recommends that you set the Workbench Project page Object Renaming
property accordingly.

And as illustrated below, you can use the options of the Cross Section Context menu to manually define
cross sections. Included with the context tab options is a Profile option. This option displays a window
that enables you to view the cross section dimensions as you make entries and upon completion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Cross Section Objects

Note:

You may wish to review the SECTYPE and SECDATA commands. These commands send
cross section data to the MAPDL solver.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Object Properties (p. 179)

Tree Dependencies (p. 180)

Insertion Methods (p. 181)

Right-click Options (p. 181)

API Reference (p. 181)

Additional Related
Information (p. 181)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Defini- Type: Displays the Element type used by the cross section.
tion
Import Type: Displays whether the cross section was imported or defined manually.
Dimen- The various Dimensions properties (R, B, H, etc.) are based on your selected cross
sions section type. See the Cross Section Types section as well as the individual cross
section type sections of the Ansys DesignModeler User's Guide for more information
about dimensions. Also refer to the SpaceClaim Direct Modeler documentation for
additional cross section information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
Cross Section Objects

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Rectangular I Hat
Section Section
Circular
Z Rectangular
Circular Section Tube
Tube
L User
Channel Section Integrated
Section
T User
Section Defined

Physical The Physical Properties category provides the following read-only properties that
Proper- display the associated cross section information provided by the upstream system
ties (that is, CAD application/External Model system):

• A: Displays the Area of the cross section.

• Iyy: Displays moment of inertia about the Y axis.

• Izz: Displays moment of inertia about the Z axis.

Note:

DesignModeler uses a different cross section coordinate system than

Mechanical (MAPDL solver). Mechanical displays Izz whereas
DesignModeler displays Ixx. In DesignModeler, the cross section lies
in the XYPlane and the Z direction corresponds to the edge tangent.
In the Mechanical environment, the cross section lies in the YZ plane
and uses the X direction as the edge tangent. This difference in
orientation has no bearing on the analysis.

External Model Line Body

For line body meshes imported through External Model, the following additional
properties display if included in the source file:

• Transverse Shear Stiffness XY

• Transverse Shear Stiffness XZ

See the Cross Section Types section of the Ansys DesignModeler User's Guide for
additional information about these properties. You can also refer to the SpaceClaim
Direct Modeler documentation for additional cross section information.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Cross Sections. (p. 175)

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Not applicable.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
The application automatically inserts available imported cross sections. You can also manually insert
and define cross section objects.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [available types of cross sections]

• Import/Update from Geometry Source

• Rename Cross Sections with Same Name

API Reference
See the Cross Section section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Line Bodies

• Cross Section (Ansys DesignModeler User's Guide)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Cylindrical Crack
Inserts a crack, with a cylindrical shape, into a solid body.

Object Properties (p. 183)

Tree Dependencies (p. 185)

Insertion Methods (p. 186)

Right-click Options (p. 186)

API Reference (p. 186)

Additional Related
Information (p. 186)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Cylindrical Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification value. The application uses this identifier
when creating solution identifiers for fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specify the coordinate system that defines the

orientation of the crack. The X axis of the specified coordinate system
must be directed towards the axis of the cylindrical crack and the
first crack front always lies in the Y-Z plane of the specified
coordinate system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Cylindrical.

Major Radius: Specifies the major radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the Y axis. Enter a value greater than 0. You
can parameterize this property.

Minor Radius: Specifies the minor radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the Z axis. Enter a value greater than 0. You
can parameterize this property.

Height: Specifies the height of the cylindrical crack to be inserted.

The height is defined from the origin of the coordinate system
(starting face of the cylinder) to the other end of the cylinder. You
can parameterize this property.

Important:

If the specified height is less than the gap between

the origin of the coordinate system and the free
surface of the solid geometry, the mesh generates
two crack fronts and two crack surfaces. Otherwise,
the mesh generates a single crack front and two
crack surfaces.

Mesh Method: This is a read-only property set to Tetrahedrons,

the only supported method.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Growth Rate: It specifies the factor with which the mesh layers will
grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a value greater than 1.
The default value is 1.2. The recommended value is equal to or
greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: It specifies the element size for the crack front.
The default value is computed using crack length. Specify a value
greater than 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the
crack shape. The value you enter must be equal to or greater than
1. The default setting is 6.

Note:

The maximum number of mesh contours the Geometry

window can display is 100. However, you can specify a
higher value and the application will process it
accordingly.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value you
enter must be less than or equal to the value of Mesh Contours,
and cannot be greater than 99. By default, the value is Match Mesh
Contours, indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal to
the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match
Mesh Contours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the object. The default is No.

The application automatically suppresses the crack object if the
scoped body becomes suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale This category includes the following properties:
Factors
• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and
Z directions, relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling
parameter, use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is
2. The diagonal length of the cylinder geometric bounding box is
multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer zone.
Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For more information about this category and its
properties, see the Defining a Cylindrical Crack section as well as the
Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For
information about Named Selections in general, refer to Named
Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Cylindrical Crack

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Cylindrical Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the Insert
menu. Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Cylinder Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Cylindrical Crack

• Fracture

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Design Constraint
Specifies certain manufacturing-based limitations to help alleviate design problems.

Object
Properties (p. 188)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 188)

Insertion
Methods (p. 188)

Right-click
Options (p. 188)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 188)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Design Constraint

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Design Constraint section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Structural Optimization Environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add a Design Constraint object, highlight the Structural Optimization environment and either:

• Select Design Constraint > [desired Design Constraint] from the Environment Context Tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > [desired Design Constraint].

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [Various Structural Optimization options]

• Commands

• Suppress/Unsuppress

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Design Constraint

• Structural Optimization in Mechanical

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Distributed Mass
3D analyses only. Distributes additional mass across faces or edges on your model. It can be scoped to
flexible parts only (Stiffness Behavior property set to Flexible).

It is supported for the following Mechanical systems: Eigenvalue Buckling, Modal (including pre-stress
effects), Harmonic Response (Full, linked MSUP, pre-stressed, and standalone), Random Vibration, Response
Spectrum, Static Structural, and Transient Structural (standalone and linked MSUP).

Object Properties (p. 189)

Tree Dependencies (p. 190)

Insertion Methods (p. 190)

Right-click Options (p. 190)

API Reference (p. 191)

Additional Related
Information (p. 191)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Distributed Mass

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry: Displayed when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection

(default). Displays the type of geometry (Face or Edge only) and the number of
faces to which the Distributed Mass has been applied using the selection tools.
Use the Face or Edge selection filter to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field,
then click Apply.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.
This field provides a drop-down list of available face- or edge-based user-defined
Named Selections.
Definition Mass Type: Specify the type. Options include Total Mass (default) and Mass per
Unit Area. Based on your selection, entries for one of the additional properties is
required:

• Total Mass: Specify the total mass applied to the scoped geometric entities.
You can set this property as a parameter.

• Mass per Unit Area: Specify the mass per unit area. You can set this property
as a parameter.

Suppressed

Element APDL Name: This property enables you to assign an APDL parameter
name to the surface effect element type. Using this name, you can programmatically
identify the mass element type and real constant set that you can reference and
use in a Commands (APDL) (p. 91) object.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Geometry (p. 265) object or Part (p. 565) object:

• Select Distributed Mass option from the Mass group on the Geometry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Geometry (p. 265) object, Part object, Body object, or in the Geometry window
> Insert > Distributed Mass.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Point Mass

– Distributed Mass

– Surface Coating

– Commands (APDL)

API Reference
See the Distributed Mass section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

Distributed Mass application.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Drop Height
Applies a velocity as an initial condition by calculating the velocity at which an object would be traveling
if dropped from rest from a specified height. Available for use in Explicit Dynamics analyses only.

Object
Properties (p. 194)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 194)

Insertion
Methods (p. 194)

API
Reference (p. 195)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 195)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Drop Height

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method, options include:

• Geometry Selection: Default setting, indicating that you apply

the feature to one or more bodies, which are chosen using
graphical selection tools.

– Geometry: Visible when the Scoping property is set to

Geometry Selection. In this case, use selection filters to pick
geometry, click the Geometry field, then click Apply.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is defined

by a Named Selection.

– Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping property is set

to Named Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of the
available Named Selections.

Definition Input Type: Options include Angular Velocity, Drop Height, or Velocity.

Define By: Defines how the drop height is specified. Options include:

• Drop Height:

– Drop Height: Visible when the Define by property is set to

Drop Height. Height from which object will be dropped from
rest prior to start of the analysis.

• Impact Velocity:

– Impact Velocity: Visible when the Define by property is set

to Impact Velocity. Magnitude of initial velocity.

Coordinate System: Use this property to specify the desired coordinate

system.

Direction: Direction in which initial velocity is applied.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Initial Conditions (p. 407).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image. (p. 283)

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Initial Conditions (p. 265) object:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Click Drop Height on the Initial Conditions Context tab.

• Right-click the Initial Conditions (p. 407) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert
> Drop Height.

API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Define Initial Conditions

• Using the Drop Test Wizard

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis Guide Overview

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Edge Crack
Inserts an edge crack into a solid body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Edge Crack

Object Properties (p. 198)

Tree Dependencies (p. 200)

Insertion Methods (p. 201)

Right-click Options (p. 201)

API Reference (p. 201)

Additional Related Information (p. 201)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification value. The application uses this identifier
when creating solution identifiers for fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system

that defines the orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified
coordinate system must be directed towards the normal of the crack
plane and the crack plane always lies in the X-Z plane of the specified
coordinate system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Edge.

Start Width: Specifies the width at the start of the crack. Enter a
value greater than 0.

End Width: Specifies the width at the end of the crack. Enter a value
greater than 0.

Mid Width: Specifies the width at the mid-point of the start and
end of the crack. Enter a value greater than 0.

Depth: Specifies the depth of the crack. Enter a value greater than
0.

Mesh Method: This is a read-only property set to Tetrahedrons,

the only supported method.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Growth Rate: This property is only visible when the Mesh Method
property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the factor with which
the mesh layers will grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a
value greater than 1. The default value is 1.2. The recommended
value is equal to or greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: This property specifies the element size for the
crack front. The default value is computed using crack length. Specify
a value greater than 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
Edge Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the
crack shape. The value you enter must be equal to or greater than
1. The default setting is 6.

Note:

The maximum number of mesh contours the Geo-

metry window can display is 100. However, you can
specify a higher value and the application will
process it accordingly.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value you
enter must be less than or equal to the value of Mesh Contours,
and cannot be greater than 99. By default, the value is Match Mesh
Contours, indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal to
the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match
Mesh Contours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Edge Crack object. The

default is No. The application automatically suppresses the crack
object if the scoped body becomes suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale This category includes the following properties:
Factors
• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and
Z directions, relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling
parameter, use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is
2. The maximum dimension among the three directions of the crack
is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer
zone. When the Mesh Method property is set to Hex-Dominant,
the crack dimensions also include fracture-affected zones.
Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For more information about this category and its
properties, see the Defining an Edge Crack section as well as the
Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For
information about Named Selections in general, refer to Named
Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Edge Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu.
Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Edge Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining an Edge Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Element Orientation
Modifies the coordinate system of individual solid and shell elements.

Object
Properties (p. 203)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 204)

Insertion
Methods (p. 205)

Right-click
Options (p. 205)

API
Reference (p. 205)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 205)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Element Orientation

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping, options include:

• Geometry Selection: Default setting, indicating that you apply

the feature to one or more bodies, which are chosen using
graphical selection tools.

– Geometry: Visible when the Scoping property is set to Geo-

metry Selection. Geometry scoping supports Body selection
and direct element selection (mesh required). Displays the
type of geometry (Body or Element) and the number of
geometric entities (for example: 1 Body, 2 Elements) to which
you have scoped the geometry.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is

defined by a Named Selection.

– Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping property is set

to Named Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of
the available geometry-based or element-based Named
Selections.

Definition Defined By: Defines how the orientation is specified. Options include
Surface and Edge Guide (default) and Coordinate System.

Suppressed

Coordinate System: Becomes available when you set the Defined By

property to Coordinate System. Use this property to specify the desired
coordinate system.
Surface Guide Scoping – Geometry Selection or Named Selection.

(Surface and Edge Geometry: Face selection, either geometry or named selection.
Guide option only)
Axis: Specify the axis (+/- X, +/- Y, or +/- Z) that aligns with the Surface
Guide normal.
Edge Guide Scoping – Geometry Selection or Named Selection.

(Surface and Edge Geometry: Edge selection, either geometry or named selection.
Guide option only)
Axis: Specify the axis (+/- X, +/- Y, or +/- Z) that aligns tangentially with
the Edge Guide.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Geometry object:

• Click Element Orientation option on the Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click the Geometry object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Element Ori-
entation.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Element Orientation

• Generate Orientations

• Suppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Element Orientation section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Element Orientation

• Setting Up Coordinate Systems

• Geometry Context Ribbon

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
End Release
Allows specified degrees of freedom to be released on a vertex between line bodies or a node between
beam (line body) elements.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
End Release

Object
Properties (p. 208)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 209)

Insertion
Methods (p. 210)

Right-click
Options (p. 210)

API
Reference (p. 210)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 210)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named
Selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Vertex Geometry: Specifies the vertex or node for the end release. Only
the Vertex and Node selection options are supported for specifying this
property, either through direct selection or using a Named Selection.

For Geometry Selection scoping, pick your geometry or mesh,

click in the Geometry field, After you’ve selected, the property
displays the geometric/mesh entities (1 Vertex, 1 Node).
For Named Selection scoping, select a user–defined vertex- or
node-based Named Selection from the drop-down list.

Edge Geometry: Specifies the edge or line body element for the end
release. Only the Edge and Element selection options are supported for
specifying this property, either through direct selection or using a Named
Selection.

For Geometry Selection scoping, pick your geometry or mesh,

click in the Geometry field, After you’ve selected, the property
displays the geometric/mesh entities (2 Edges, 2 Elements, etc.).
For Named Selection scoping, select a user–defined edge- or
element-based Named Selection from the drop-down list.

Independent Edges: Specifies whether the edges or elements selected

above are independent of one another or fixed together. Options include
Yes (default) and No.
Definition Coordinate System

Translation X

Translation Y

Translation Z

Rotation X

Rotation Y

Rotation Z

Behavior

Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
End Release

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Click End Release on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections object or in the Geometry window and then select Insert > End
Release.

Right-click Options
Relevant right-click options for this object are in the common right-click options (p. 2) list.

Note:

The description for Contact Region object also applies to the Mesh Connection object.

API Reference
See the End Release section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the End Releases section, under Connections, for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Environment (Group)
Holds all analysis related objects in a given Model (p. 533) object. The default name of the environment
object is the same as the name of the analysis type. All result objects of an analysis are grouped under
the Solution (p. 703) object.

Note:

The application creates reference files that contain analysis information that is read back into
the application during solution processing. Certain textual characters can create issues during
this reading process. Avoid the use of the following characters when renaming your environ-
ment:

• Quote character (“)

• Ampersand (&)

• Apostrophe (‘)

• Greater than and less than characters (< >)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Environment (Group)

Object Properties (p. 212)

Tree Dependencies (p. 213)

Insertion Methods (p. 213)

Right-click Options (p. 213)

API Reference (p. 214)

Additional Related
Information (p. 214)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Physics Definition Structural: Read-only property with the setting Yes.

Acoustics: Read-only property with the setting Yes.

Definition (read-only Physics Type
indications)
Analysis Type

Solver Target
Options Environment Temperature: The temperature of the body unless
this temperature is specified by a particular load such as a thermal
condition or an imported temperature. This will also be the
material reference temperature unless overridden by the Body
(see Reference Temperature under Define Part Behavior for more
information). Environment Temperature is not valid for any
type of thermal analysis.

Generate Input Only: Read-only property that identifies if a

system is only capable of generating an input file. The options
include Yes or No based on the status of the system. This

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
property is typically set to No. However, if you delete the Solu-
tion cell from your Mechanical system on the Workbench Project
Schematic (RBM Solution > Delete), the Mechanical Outline
tree for the system will not contain a Solution object and the
application automatically sets this property to Yes. In this
scenario, if you update the project, the system does not solve,
but it does generate an input file.
Additive Manufacturing AM Process Simulation: Displays when you insert an AM Process
object (p. 21). This property controls whether this analysis
simulates an additive manufacturing process. Options include
Program Controlled (default), No, and Yes. See the LPBF
Simulation Guide for more information.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Analysis Settings (p. 27), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283),
Initial Condition (for some analysis types), all load and support objects (p. 445), and Solution (p. 703).

Insertion Methods
Appears by default based on the analysis type chosen in the Project Schematic.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Import Load > [this menu lists available analyses]

• Transfer Data From/Unlink Data From: These options are available for Topology Optimization
environments only and enable you to link to or unlink from supported upstream analysis systems.
Multiple system can be selected. You can check the Environment Selection List property of the
Solution object (p. 703) to see the upstream analysis systems being used for the solution in your
Structural Optimization analysis.

• Insert > [options for this menu item vary based on the analysis type]

• Solve

• Create Automatic >

– FSI (Acoustics analyses only)

– Far-field Radiation Surface (Acoustics analyses only)

– FSI and Far-field Radiation Surface (Acoustics analyses only)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Environment (Group)

• Duplicate

Important:

When duplicating an analysis within Mechanical that includes loads with the Base
Excitation property set to Yes (Acceleration and/or Displacement), these loads will
lose their scoping during the duplication process.

• Clear Generated Data

• Export NASTRAN File (Static Structural or Modal environments only)

• Write System Coupling Files: Available when your analysis includes one or more Fluid Solid
Interface or System Coupling Region boundary conditions. For supported analysis types, this
option creates an input (.dat) file as well as a System Coupling (.scp) file that is needed to
run a System Coupling analysis that was created in one of System Coupling's interfaces.

• Group Children by Physics: Available during Acoustics analyses.

• Group All Similar Children

• Open Solver Files Directory

API Reference
See the Analysis section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Analysis Types

• Environment Context Tab

• Types of Loads

• Types of Supports

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Elliptical Crack
Inserts embedded void cracks into a solid body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Elliptical Crack

Object Properties (p. 216)

Tree Dependencies (p. 220)

Insertion Methods (p. 220)

Right-click Options (p. 220)

API Reference (p. 220)

Additional Related Information (p. 221)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification value. The application uses this identifier
when creating solution identifiers for fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system

that defines the orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified
coordinate system must be directed towards the normal of the crack
plane and the crack plane always lies in the X-Z plane of the specified
coordinate system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Elliptical.

Major Radius: Specifies the major radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the Z axis (that is, the width of the crack).
Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this property.

Minor Radius: Specifies the minor radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the X axis (that is, the depth of the crack).
Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this property.

Mesh Method: This property enables you to select the mesh method
to be used to mesh the crack. Options include Hex Dominant
(default) and Tetrahedrons.

Note:

When this crack intersects with the free surfaces of

a solid body, the Hex Dominant setting is not
supported.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Growth Rate: This property is only visible when the Mesh Method
property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the factor with which
the mesh layers will grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a
value greater than 1. The default value is 1.2. The recommended
value is equal to or greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: This property is only visible when the Mesh
Method property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the element
size for the crack front. The default value is computed using crack
length. Specify a value greater than 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Elliptical Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Crack Front Divisions: This property is only visible when the Mesh
Method property is set to Hex Dominant. It specifies the number
of divisions for the crack front. Your entry must be equal to or greater
than 3. The default value is 30.

Note:

The maximum number of crack front divisions the

Geometry window can display is 999. However, you
can specify a higher value and the application will
process it accordingly.

Fracture Affected Zone: This property is only visible when the Mesh
Method property is set to Hex Dominant. This is the region that
contains a crack. This property defines the height of the fracture
affected zone. Property options include:

• Program Controlled (default): The application calculates the

height. When selected, the Fracture Affected Zone Height
property is read-only.

• Manual: You manually specify the height in the Fracture Affected

Zone Height property when using this option.

Fracture Affected Zone Height: This property is only visible when

the Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. This value
specifies two things: 1) the height of the Fracture Affected Zone,
which is in the Y direction of the crack coordinate system; and 2)
the distance in totality by which the Fracture Affected Zone is
extended in the positive and negative Z direction of the crack
coordinate system from the crack front extremities.

The shape of a Fracture Affected Zone is rectangular, regardless of

the shape of the crack. Although buffer zones may overlap, you
should use care when defining multiple cracks so that the zones do
not overlap.

Important:

The crack generation process will fail if buffer zones

overlap.

Circumferential Divisions: This property is only visible when the

Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. It specifies the
number of circumferential divisions for the crack shape. The value

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
you enter must be a multiple of 8, and must be 8 or greater. The
default is 8.

Note:

The maximum number of circumferential divisions

the Geometry window can display is 360. However,
you can specify a higher value and the application
will process it accordingly.

Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the

crack shape. The value you enter must be equal to or greater than
1. The default setting is 6.

Note:

The maximum number of mesh contours the Geo-

metry window can display is 100. However, you can
specify a higher value and the application will
process it accordingly.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value you
enter must be less than or equal to the value of Mesh Contours,
and cannot be greater than 99. By default, the value is Match Mesh
Contours, indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal to
the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match
Mesh Contours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Elliptical Crack object. The

default is No. The application automatically suppresses the crack
object if the scoped body becomes suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale This category includes the following properties:
Factors
• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and
Z directions, relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling
parameter, use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is
2. The maximum dimension among the three directions of the crack
is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer
zone. When the Mesh Method property is set to Hex-Dominant,
the crack dimensions also include fracture-affected zones.
Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Elliptical Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Selection. For more information about this category and its
properties, see the Defining an Elliptical Crack section as well as the
Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For
information about Named Selections in general, refer to Named
Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Elliptical Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu.
Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Elliptical Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
• Defining an Elliptical Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Expansion Settings
Displays and edits the Expansion Settings Worksheet once your analysis is solved. You can then select
the right-click option.

The application automatically inserts this object beneath the Solution object when a Condensed
Geometry object is created.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Expansion Settings

Object
Properties (p. 224)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 225)

Insertion
Methods (p. 225)

Right-click
Options (p. 225)

API
Reference (p. 225)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 225)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Analysis Data Delete Unneeded Files: Yes (default) or No.
Management
Condensed Part Expansion: Program Controlled (default), On Demand,
Mechanical APDL.
Output Controls Stress: Yes (default) or No.

Strain: Yes (default) or No.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Nodal Forces: Yes or No (default).

General Miscellaneous: Yes or No (default).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Automatic upon insertion of a Condensed Geometry object. However, in the event you delete an ex-
isting Expansion Settings object, you can reinsert the object from the Solution object context (right-
click) menu (Insert > Expansion Settings) or from the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution
Context Tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Solve

• Run Expansions Only

• Evaluate All Results

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Expansion Settings section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following section for more information:

• Working with Substructures

• Condensed Geometry (p. 117)

• Condensed Part

• Expansion Settings

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fatigue Combination
Sums (that is, generates a sum total of ) the Damage results of multiple systems that each include a
Fatigue Tool (p. 231) object. This option only supports analyses that support the use of the Fatigue
Tool and Damage results.

Important:

If you have imported a legacy database (.wbpj or .wbpz), you must first clear the data of any
existing Fatigue Tools, and re-evaluate the results, in order to then use the Fatigue Com-
bination feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Fatigue Combination

Object
Properties (p. 228)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 229)

Insertion
Methods (p. 229)

API
Reference (p. 229)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 229)

Object Properties
As illustrated below, when you select the Fatigue Combination object, the Worksheet displays. The
Worksheet enables you to specify the Environment and Fatigue Tool of the Damage results that you
wish to sum. No Details view categories or properties exist for this object. See the Fatigue Tool object
reference (p. 231) page for the Details associated with Damage results.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Damage result.

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533) object:

• Choose Fatigue Combination on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click the Model (p. 533) object or in the Geometry window Insert > Fatigue Combination.

API Reference
See the Fatigue Combination section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Fatigue Combination application

• Fatigue Tool object (p. 231)

• Fatigue Results

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fatigue Tool (Group)
Determines life, damage, and factor of safety information using a stress-life or strain-life approach. The
Fatigue Tool folder is available for Static Structural, Transient Structural, Harmonic Response, and
Random Vibration (spectral fatigue) analyses only.

Applies to the following objects:

• Biaxiality Indication • Fatigue Tool

• Damage • Hysteresis

• Damage Matrix • Life

• Equivalent Alternating Stress • Rainflow Matrix

• Fatigue Sensitivity • Safety Factor

Fatigue Tool for a Structural analysis: Object

Properties (p. 234)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Fatigue Tool (Group)

Fatigue
Tool (p. 234)

Properties for
the Contour
Results Menu
Options (p. 236)

Properties for
the Graph
Results Menu
Options (p. 237)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 238)

Insertion
Methods (p. 238)

Right-click
Options (p. 239)

API
Reference (p. 239)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 239)

Fatigue Tool for a Harmonic Response analysis:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fatigue Tool for a Random Vibration analysis:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Fatigue Tool (Group)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Fatigue Tool
The Details view categories and properties differ based on the analysis type. For Static Structural,
Transient Structural, and Harmonic Response analyses, the Details of the Fatigue Tool include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Domain Domain Type: Read-only property that displays the following content
based on the analysis type:

• Time: Static or Transient Structural

• Time - Harmonic: Harmonic Response

• Frequency: Random Vibration

Materials Fatigue Strength Factor (Kf )

Loading Type

Loading Ratio: Only appears if the Type property is set to Ratio.

History Data Location: Only appears if the Type property is set to History
Data.

Scale Factor
Definition Display Time: Enter a time value (within the analysis time limit) to
display results at that moment of the analysis.
Options Analysis Type

Mean Stress Theory

Stress Component

Bin Size: Only appears if the Type property is set to History Data.

Use Quick Rainflow Counting: Only appears if the Type property is set
to History Data.

Infinite Life: Only appears if the Analysis Type property is set to Strain
Life; or if the Analysis Type property is set to Stress Life and the Type
property is set to History Data.

Maximum Data Points to Plot: Only appears if the Type property is set
to History Data.
Life Units Units Name

1 cycle is equal to

For a Random Vibration analysis, the Details of the Fatigue Tool include:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Domain Domain Type: Read-only property that displays the following content
based on the analysis type.

• Time: Static or Transient Structural

• Time - Harmonic: Harmonic Response

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Fatigue Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Frequency: Random Vibration

Options Method Selection: Specifies the method to calculate the Probability

Density Function (PDF) from the available PSD stress response.

Stress Component

Exposure Duration: Specifies the time duration for which the loading
is applied. The resulting damage is for this entire duration. By default,
this is set to 1 second This means that the calculated damage is damage
per second.

Properties for the Contour Results Menu Options

The properties for the Contour Results menu options (Life, Damage, Safety Factor, Biaxiality Indica-
tion, and Equivalent Alternating Stress) include:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default), Named
Selection, Path, or Surface. Based on your selection, related properties
display.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to

Geometry Selection (default). Shows the type of geometry
and the number of bodies to which the object has been applied
using the selection tools. Use selection filters to pick geometry,
click in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set
to Named Selection. Select a user-defined Named Selection
from the drop-down list.
Path: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Path. Select
a defined path from the drop-down list.
Surface: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Surface.
Select a defined surface from the drop-down list.

Geometry: When you specify Path or Surface as the Scoping Method,

this additional property displays in the Scope category. Use selection
filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Design Life: Only available for the Damage and Safety Factor objects.

Type: Read-only indication of the fatigue object name.

Identifier

Suppressed: Suppress the object as desired.

Integration Point Average Across Bodies: Averages results across separate bodies. The
Results default setting is No.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Results (read-only Minimum: Available for Life, Safety Factor, Biaxiality Indication,
indications of Equivalent Alternating Stress.
min/max)
Minimum Occurs On: Available for Life, Safety Factor, Biaxiality Indic-
ation, Equivalent Alternating Stress.

Maximum: Available for Damage, Biaxiality Indication, Equivalent

Alternating Stress.

Maximum Occurs On: Available for Damage, Biaxiality Indication,

Equivalent Alternating Stress.
Information - only Reported Frequency
available for
Harmonic Response
analyses.

Properties for the Graph Results Menu Options

The properties for the Graph Results menu options (Rainflow Matrix, Damage Matrix, Fatigue
Sensitivity, and Hysteresis) include:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Geometry: Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry
field, then click Apply.
Definition Sensitivity For: Only available for the Fatigue Sensitivity object.

Design Life: Only available for the Damage Matrix object and the Fa-
tigue Sensitivity object if the Sensitivity For property is set to Damage
or Safety Factor.

Suppressed
General Stress Strain Type: If set to Shear Stress, the General, Options, and
Results categories are replaced by a Definition category that includes
a Type setting.
Options Lower Variation: Available only for Fatigue Sensitivity.

Upper Variation: Available only for Fatigue Sensitivity.

Number of Fill Points: Available only for Fatigue Sensitivity.

Chart Viewing Style: Available only for Damage Matrix, Fatigue

Sensitivity, and Rainflow Matrix.

Points per Segment: Available only for Hysteresis.

Results - available The following are only available for Damage Matrix and Rainflow
only for Damage Matrix options:
Matrix, Hysteresis,
and Rainflow Matrix. • Minimum Range
Read-only indication

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Fatigue Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
of the following • Maximum Range
quantities.
• Minimum Mean

• Maximum Mean

The following are only available for the Hysteresis option:

• Minimum Strain

• Maximum Strain

• Minimum Stress

• Maximum Stress

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object:

– For Fatigue Tool: Solution (p. 703).

– For Biaxiality Indication, Damage, Damage Matrix, Equivalent Alternating Stress, Fatigue
Sensitivity, Hysteresis, Life, Rainflow Matrix, and Safety Factor: Fatigue Tool.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– For Fatigue Tool: Biaxiality Indication, Comment (p. 97), Damage, Damage Matrix, Equivalent
Alternating Stress, Fatigue Sensitivity, Hysteresis, Image (p. 283), Life, Rainflow Matrix, and
Safety Factor.

– For Biaxiality Indication, Damage, Equivalent Alternating Stress, Life, Safety Factor:
Alert (p. 15), Comment (p. 97), Convergence (p. 159), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

– For Damage Matrix, Fatigue Sensitivity, Hysteresis, and Rainflow Matrix: Comment (p. 97), and
Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• For Fatigue Tool, use any of the following methods after highlighting Solution (p. 703) object:

– Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Fatigue Tool.

– Click-right on the Solution (p. 703) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Fatigue
> Fatigue Tool.

• For all results of the Fatigue Tool, use any of the following methods after highlighting Fatigue Tool
object:

– Choose Contour Results or Graph Results drop-down menu and the [specific fatigue result] on
Fatigue Tool Context tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Click-right on the Fatigue Tool object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > [specific
fatigue result].

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Solve

• Evaluate All Results: Available for the Fatigue Tool and all tool child objects.

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Fatigue Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Fatigue Overview

• Fatigue Material Properties

• Fatigue Stress Life versus Strain Life

• Fatigue Analysis Application

• Fatigue Results

• Fatigue Combination (p. 227)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Figure
Captures any graphic displayed for a particular object in the Geometry window. A Figure object can
be further manipulated (rotated for example), unlike an Image (p. 283) object, which is a static screen
shot of the current model view or an imported static figure. Popular uses of a Figure object are for
presenting specific views and settings for later inclusion in a report.

Note:

The Figure feature supports the Use Geometry Setting option only for the Display Style
property when capturing figures on the Mesh (p. 475) object.

Object Properties (p. 241)

Tree Dependencies (p. 242)

Insertion Methods (p. 242)

API Reference (p. 242)

Additional Related
Information (p. 242)

Object Properties
Caption is the only property available for the Figure object. It provides an editable text field.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Figure

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: All objects except Alert (p. 15), Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97),
Convergence (p. 159), Image (p. 283), Project (p. 621), Result Tracker (p. 653), Solution Combina-
tion (p. 709), and Solution Information (p. 711).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Open the Images drop-down menu from the Insert group on the Home tab and select Figure. Note
that the Insert group is available from a number of Context tabs.

API Reference
See the Figure section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Inserting Comments, Images, and Figures

• Viewports

• Reports

• Home Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fracture
Contains all crack definitions within a model. Supported crack types include:

• Arbitrary Crack (p. 33)

• Semi-Elliptical Crack (p. 683)

• Elliptical Crack (p. 215)

• Ring Crack (p. 631)

• Corner Crack (p. 169)

• Edge Crack (p. 197)

• Through Crack (p. 773)

• Cylindrical Crack (p. 183)

• Pre-Meshed Crack (p. 607)

The application generates all crack types internally, except for a Pre-Meshed Crack which comes from
an external source. This object can contain any number of supported crack objects.

The Semi-Elliptical Crack, Elliptical Crack, Ring Crack, Arbitrary Crack, Corner Crack, Edge Crack,
Through Crack, and the Cylindrical Crack are analytical cracks.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Fracture

Object Properties (p. 244)

Tree Dependencies (p. 244)

Insertion Methods (p. 245)

Right-click Options (p. 245)

API Reference (p. 245)

Additional Related
Information (p. 245)

Object Properties
The Fracture object has only one category, Definition, and property, Re-mesh Hex-dominant to Tet-
rahedral. Options include On and Off (default). This property works in combination with the context
(right-click) menu option Generate All Crack Meshes. When you turn this property On and then select
Generate All Crack Meshes, the application automatically remeshes the body/bodies scoped to any
existing Arbitrary Crack or any analytical crack object(s) from a hex-dominant base mesh to a tetrahedral
mesh. In addition, for these objects, it will generate the initial crack mesh based on the scoping of the
crack surface.

Also note the following:

• Because all cracks, except a Pre-Meshed Crack, only support a tetrahedral base mesh, you must
execute this operation, Re-mesh Hex-dominant to Tetrahedral = On and select the context
(right-click) menu option Generate All Crack Meshes), when your fracture analysis includes an
crack scoped to bodies having hex-dominant based mesh.

• For a Multibody Assembly geometry, only crack-scoped bodies get remeshed, but for a Multibody
Part geometry, all shared bodies get remeshed.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Arbitrary Crack (p. 33), Semi-Elliptical Crack (p. 683), Elliptical Crack (p. 215),
Ring Crack (p. 631), Corner Crack (p. 169), Edge Crack (p. 197), Through Crack (p. 773), Cylindrical
Crack (p. 183), Pre-Meshed Crack (p. 607), Interface Delamination (p. 415), Contact Debonding (p. 145),
and SMART Crack Growth.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
• Select the Model object and select Fracture from the Define group on the Model Context tab.

• Right-click the Model object and select Insert > Fracture.

Note:

• The Model object supports one Fracture object only.

• You need to regenerate the base mesh for all bodies if you delete a Fracture object
that includes cracks (analytical or an Arbitrary Crack) for which the application intern-
ally generates crack meshes.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack (p. 33)

– Semi-Elliptical Crack (p. 683)

– Elliptical Crack (p. 215)

– Ring Crack (p. 631)

– Corner Crack (p. 169)

– Edge Crack (p. 197)

– Through Crack (p. 773)

– Cylindrical Crack (p. 183)

– Pre-Meshed Crack (p. 607)

– Interface Delamination (p. 415)

– Contact Debonding (p. 145)

– SMART Crack Growth

API Reference
See the Fracture section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Fracture Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
Fracture

• Interface Delamination and Contact Debonding

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fracture Tool (Group)
Defines fracture results for the crack types specified in your analysis. All fracture results are child objects
of the Fracture Tool. Use its properties to select the crack for which you want to generate results and
to specify desired crack fronts to evaluate result data.

Object Properties (p. 247)

Tree Dependencies (p. 248)

Insertion Methods (p. 248)

Right-click Options (p. 248)

API Reference (p. 248)

Additional Related
Information (p. 248)

Object Properties
For information specific to this object's properties, see the Fracture Results section of the Help.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Fracture Tool (Group)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object:

– The Solution (p. 703) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– There are a number of fracture-specific result objects associated with this tool. See the Define
Fracture Results section of the Help for information about these result objects.

– Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
• Select the Solution object and either:

– Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Fracture Tool.

– Right-click the Solution object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Fracture Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Fracture Results

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Fracture Tool and all child objects when the tool is inserted
under a Solution (p. 703) object.

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Fracture Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Fracture Results

• Adding a Fracture Tool

• Define Fracture Results

• Fracture Probes (p. 249)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Fracture Probes
Shows the time history of a fracture parameter (that is, SIFS, Crack Extension, etc.) for a specific crack
front node along the crack front (tip) only.

Important:

When you specify the Fracture Tool, if you set the Crack Selection Mode property to the
All Cracks option, the use of Fracture Probes is not supported.

Object Properties (p. 249)

Tree Dependencies (p. 250)

Insertion Methods (p. 250)

Right-click Options (p. 251)

API Reference (p. 251)

Additional Related
Information (p. 251)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only property set to fracture probe result type.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Fracture Probes

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Subtype: SIFS probes only. Specify SIFS subtype, K1, K2, or K3.

Active Contour: Appears for SIFS and J-Integral (JINT) probes only.
Specify the contour for which you want to extract the time history. The
default is the maximum solution contour of the crack.

Location Method: Read-only property set to Crack Length Percentage.

Crack Length Percentage: The default value is 0. Use this percentage

entry to select a node along the crack front tip you wish to examine.
By changing the Crack Length Percentage, you should receive time
history plot of the crack front node located along the crack front.

Suppressed: Suppress or unsuppress the object. The default is No.

Options Display Time: The default setting is End Time. Specify a time at which
you want to extract the results.
Results Provides read-only extracted values of the probe you select:

Result (Display Name depends on probe type)

Minimum Value Over Time

Maximum Value Over Time

Information Based on the selections made above, the following read-only result-based
properties are shown when probe is extracted:

Time

Load Step

Substep

Iteration Number

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The Fracture Tool (p. 247) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No child objects are supported for Fracture Probes.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Fracture Tool object and either:

– Select a desired probe from the Probes group on the Fracture Tool Context tab.

– Right-click the Fracture Tool object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Probe > [select
desired probe].

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Fracture Results

– Probes

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Fracture Tool and all child objects when the tool is inserted
under a Solution (p. 703) object.

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Duplicate Without Results

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Fracture Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Fracture Probes (Fracture Tool)

• Fracture Results

• Adding a Fracture Tool

• Define Fracture Results

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Gasket Mesh Control
Applies a sweep mesh in a chosen direction and drops midside nodes on gasket elements that are
parallel to the sweep direction.Available when Body (p. 55) object's Stiffness Behavior is set to Gasket.

Object
Properties (p. 253)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 254)

Insertion
Methods (p. 254)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 254)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Free Face Mesh Type

Mesh Method

Element Order

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Gasket Mesh Control

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Src/Trg Selection

Source

Target

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Body. (p. 55)

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Appears automatically when a Body (p. 55) object's Stiffness Behavior is set to Gasket.

Additional Related Information

• Gasket Bodies

• Gasket Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Gasket
Defines the gasket mesh control beneath the Mesh object when the Body (p. 55) object's Stiffness
Behavior is set to Flexible. This can be applied to multiple bodies, so it may be a more convenient
approach to setting up the gaskets if there are many gasket bodies. The MultiZone mesh method is
used for this approach.

Object Properties (p. 255)

Tree Dependencies (p. 256)

Insertion Methods (p. 256)

Additional Related
Information (p. 256)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default) and Named
Selections.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

Using the Body selection filter on the graphics toolbar, select the desired gasket
bodies. Click the Apply button to specify the scoping.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selec-
tion. It provides a drop-down menu of Named Selections.
Definition Element Order: Options include Use Global Setting (default), Linear, and
Quadratic.

Source Scoping Method: The options are Geometry Selection (default) and
Named Selections.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Gasket

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
Using the Face selection filter on the graphics toolbar, select the source faces.
Click the Apply button to specify the scoping.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selec-
tion. It provides a drop-down menu of Named Selections.

Free Face Mesh Type: Options include Quad/Tri (default), All Quad, and All
Tri.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh (p. 475).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
Use after highlighting the Mesh object. Can be set when a Body (p. 55) object's Stiffness Behavior is
set to Flexible.

Additional Related Information

• Gasket Bodies

• Gasket Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
General Axisymmetric
Creates a three-dimensional mesh in the circumferential direction on a surface body model that is based
on specified nodal planes and an axis. This feature supports edge and vertex scoping only. From these
surface model edges and vertices, you can generate three-dimensional node-based Named Selections
that you can then use as scoping items for other simulation options such as loading conditions and/or
results.

This feature uses the Mechanical APDL elements SOLID272 and SOLID273.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
General Axisymmetric

Object
Properties (p. 258)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 259)

Insertion
Methods (p. 259)

Right-click
Options (p. 259)

API
Reference (p. 260)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 260)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Read-only field. Geometry Selection is the only
supported option.

Geometry: Specify the geometry using geometry selections. You can

specify any planar surface body. Only Body scoping is supported.
Definition Nodal Planes: Specify the desired number of nodal planes. Your entry
defines the number of planes around the axis and on which nodes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
should be generated. The entry for this property can be either 1 or 3
through 12. A Nodal Planes entry of 2 is not supported.

Coordinate System: As needed, specify a coordinate system. The default

setting is the Global Coordinate System.

Axis: Specify the axis about which the axisymmetric mesh is generated.
Options include X Axis, Y Axis, and Z Axis. This setting must lie along
the body, it cannot intersect the body, and it must be specified on the
same plane as the selected surface body.

Suppressed
Graphics Nodal Planes Visible: Select the range of planes for which the mesh
or results can be displayed. The maximum number of planes that can
be displayed is defined by the Nodal Planes property. Options include
All (default) and Range. Changing the setting to Range specifies a
desired range, such as 1-6 or 6-12, of the number of planes that you
want to display for the mesh and results objects.

When you select Range, the following properties display:

• Start Plane: Specify the plane number for where you want the
display to start. The default value is 1.

• End Plane: Specify the plane number where the display ends.
The default setting is Last. Entering a value of zero is the same
as specifying Last.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Symmetry (p. 753).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Select the Symmetry object and select the General Axisymmetric option on the Symmetry Context
Tab.

• Right-click the Symmetry object and select Insert > General Axisymmetric.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > General Axisymmetric

• Suppress

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
General Axisymmetric

API Reference
See the General Axisymmetric section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• General Axisymmetric Elements

• General Axisymmetric Workflow in Mechanical

• General Axisymmetric Overview (Review Limitations)

• Defining Symmetry

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Generated Support
Generates a support structure consisting of finite elements for Additive Manufacturing simulations.
Elements are generated between the part geometry and the base plate geometry based on an existing
mesh and the criteria set in Support Group.

After inserting this object, select element faces of the part under which you want elements to be gen-
erated. Then right-click and select Generate Support Bodies to generate the elements. Elements are
generated straight down from there to fill the gap between the part and the base plate.

Object Properties (p. 262)

Tree Dependencies (p. 263)

Insertion Methods (p. 263)

Right-click Options (p. 264)

API Reference (p. 264)

Additional Related
Information (p. 264)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Generated Support

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default)
and Named Selections.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection. Using the Element Face selection filter on the graphics
toolbar, select the desired element faces and click Apply.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to

Named Selection. It provides a drop-down menu. Only element
face-based Named Selections are displayed in the drop-down menu.
Definition Nonlinear Material Effects: Options include Yes (default) and No. This
property applies nonlinear material effects to the finite element body.

Mode: Indicates whether you manually specified the Geometry Se-

lection or whether it was detected using the options of the Support
Group object.

Important:

Only automatically generated supports are affected

by the Generate on Remesh property of the Support
Group object

Visible: Show or hide the generated finite element body wherever

the mesh is displayed (using the Show Mesh option or when the
mesh object is selected).
Support Material Support Type: Options include User Defined (default) and Block.
Settings When you select the Block option, the following properties become
the only visible properties.

• Wall Thickness: Enter a thickness value (illustrated by T length

below).

• Wall Spacing: Enter a spacing value (illustrated by L length

below).

Multiplier Entry: Options include All (default) and Manual.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Material Multiplier

All Setting

When the Multiplier Entry property is set to All, the Mater-

ial Multiplier property displays. The Material Multiplier
property applies the same value to all of the material
multipliers listed below. The multiplication factors are
homogenization factors and, in each direction, reflect the
ratio of the support area projected onto the area of a fully
solid support.

Manual Setting

When the Multiplier Entry property is set to Manual, the

following multiplier properties display:

• Elastic Modulus Multiple in X/Y/Z

• Shear Modulus Multiple in XY/YZ/XZ

• Density Multiple

• Thermal Conductivity Multiple in X/Y/Z

Statistics Nodes: Read-only property that displays the nodes of the added
finite-element body.

Elements: Read-only property that displays the elements of the

added finite-element body.

Volume: Read-only property that displays the volume of the added

finite-element body.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Support Group (p. 743), which is under AM Process (p. 21) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
• Select the AM Process object and then select the Generated Support option from the AM Process
Context Tab.

• Right-click the AM Process object and then select the Insert > Generated Support.

• Select the Support Group object and then select the Generated Support option from the AM Process
Context Tab.

• Right-click the Support Group object and then select the Insert > Generated Support.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Generated Support

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert

– Predefined Support (p. 597)

– Generated Support (p. 261)

– STL Support (p. 727)

– Commands (p. 91)

• Create Named Selection of Generated Elements

• Hide Support

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Generate Support Bodies

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Generated AM Support section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• LPBF Simulation Guide

• Identify and/or Generate Supports

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Geometry
Contains the imported geometry in the form of an assembly or multibody part (objects) from a CAD
system or from SpaceClaim/DesignModeler. Assembly parameters, if available, are viewable under the
Geometry object. When you select a child object of the Geometry folder, the part (multi-body or oth-
erwise) or body highlights in a unique color. You can change the default color setting using the
Graphics preference Geometry Highlight Color in the Options dialog.

The Geometry Context Tab provides the options Attach Geometry and Replace Geometry. The Attach
Geometry option is available when you open an analysis system without a geometry. Once you import
a geometry into the application, the option is replaced with Replace Geometry. These selections provide
a drop-down menu with the options From File and Recent Geometry (available when once you have
used the option) to select the newly desired geometry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Geometry

Object
Properties (p. 266)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 270)

Insertion
Methods (p. 270)

Right-click
Options (p. 270)

API
Reference (p. 271)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 271)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Source: Read-only indication of the path and file name associated
with the geometry.

Type: Read-only indication of how the original geometry was created

(CAD product name or DesignModeler).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Length Unit: Displays the length unit assigned to the geometry. For
most imported geometries, the field is read-only because the unit
is defined by the CAD system during import. An exception includes
ACIS geometries when length units are not specified. For ACIS
geometries without specified length units, the application sets the
length unit to the display units and enables you to change the units
from the given drop-down menu.

Element Control: Allows manual control of the underlying

Mechanical APDL element options (KEYOPTS) for individual Part or
Body objects beneath the Geometry object. To manually set
Mechanical APDL element options, set Element Control to Manual,
then select the Part or Body object. Any element options that are
available for you to manually set appear in the Details view of the
Part or Body object. For example, the Brick Integration Scheme
setting for a Part or Body object becomes available only when Ele-
ment Control is set to Manual. When Element Control is set to
Program Controlled, all element options are automatically controlled
and no settings are displayed. The Mechanical APDL application
equivalent to this setting is the inclusion of the ETCON,SET command
in the input file, which automatically resets options for
current-technology elements to optimal settings. Refer to the Element
Reference for more information about Mechanical APDL elements
and element options.

Display Style: The default is Body Color which assigns unique colors
to individual bodies in a part. Other choices include Body Type,
Part Color, Assembly Color (Model assembly only), Shell Thickness
(surface bodies only), Material, Nonlinear Material Effects, Stiffness
Behavior, and By Cross Section (line bodies only).

2D Behavior: Appears only for a designated 2D simulation.

Bounding Box Length X

Length Y

Length Z
Properties Volume: Read-only property.

Mass: Read-only property. Appears only in the Mechanical

application.

Note:

• The Volume and Mass properties display with

"N/A" (Not Applicable) in their field when thickness
objects (Thickness, Face Thickness, Layered
Thickness, Imported Layered Thickness) are
present. In addition, if displayed as NA and the

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Geometry

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions

properties are parameterized, the parameter value

is set to zero. This includes parameter values
defined in Workbench.

• 2D surface bodies are dependent upon the 2D

Behavior setting of the Geometry object. Any
setting other than the Plane Stress setting causes
the above properties to display with the content
"N/A" in their field. However, when the 2D Beha-
vior property is set to By Body, you can change
the setting of the Behavior property for each
surface body object individually. These individual
settings affect what is displayed in the fields of
the Volume and Mass properties.

• If the material density is temperature dependent,

the Mass will be computed at the body
temperature, or at 22° C (default temperature for
an environment).

• Any suppressed Part or Body objects are not

included in the Volume and Mass property values
that are displayed.

• Bodies created using the Construction Body

(Body (p. 55) > Treatment), Body of Influence
(Mesh > Type), and Pull extrusion features, do not
contribute to mass or volume values.

Surface Area (approx.): Read-only property. Displays the

approximate surface area of the geometry. This value changes when
parts or bodies are suppressed.

Scale Factor Value: The value applied to imported geometry for

the purpose of modifying the size of the model. The scale factor
value of newly imported geometry is 1.0. You can modify this value.
Values changes are expected to be preserved on updated models.
Due to tolerances, models that are scaled (especially larger)
sometimes have problems meshing. The scale factor limit is from
1e-3 to 1e3. Factors entered beyond that range are ignored.

Note:

• Beam sections and shell thicknesses are not

affected by the Scale Factor Value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions

• Geometry scale factors should not be applied after

virtual cells have been added to the model. Doing
so may result in mesh failure.

2D Tolerance: For surface bodies (only), this property validates that

the geometry is two-dimensional (2D) by checking the value of the
Length Z property, using CAD units, in the Bounding Box category
(shown above). The default value is 1.e-005. If the application detects
a value greater than the Length Z, the Dimension property becomes
underdefined.
Statistics: Read-only Bodies
indication of the
entities that Active Bodies
comprise the
geometry. Active Nodes
Bodies are those
Elements
that are
unsuppressed Mesh Metric
compared to the
total number of
Bodies.
Update Options Assign Default Material: Controls the preference for default material
assignment when geometry is updated in Mechanical. When you
first import your geometry into Mechanical, any bodies that do not
have a material assigned to it are assigned the application's default
material. If you subsequently update your geometry from the source
application, and this property is set to No (default), Mechanical does
not assign the default material to new bodies. If the geometry update
includes a new body without an assigned material, the body becomes
underdefined and requires you to specify a material.

Property options include No (default) and Yes. Setting this property

to Yes instructs the application to always assign a default material
upon update. You can change the default setting of the property
by changing the setting of the Assign Default Material to New
Bodies Based on Update option of the Geometry category of the
Options preference.
Basic Geometry Solid Bodies
Options
Surface Bodies

Line Bodies

Parameters

Parameter Key

Attributes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Geometry

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selections

Material Properties
Advanced Geo- Use Associativity
metry Options
Coordinate Systems

Reader Mode Saves Updated File

Use Instances

Smart CAD Update

Compare Parts on Update

Attach File Via Temp File

Temporary Directory

Analysis Type

Mixed Import Resolution

Decompose Disjoint Geometry

Enclosure and Symmetry Processing

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Distributed Mass (p. 189), Element Orientation (p. 203),
Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Layered Section (p. 437), Part (p. 565), Point Mass (p. 593), Surface Coating,
Thickness (p. 769), Imported Element Orientation (p. 353), and Imported Thickness (p. 391).

Insertion Methods
Displays automatically when you open a geometry in Mechanical.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Point Mass

– Distributed Mass

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Surface Coating

– Imported Element Orientation (p. 353)

– Imported Thickness (p. 391)

– Thickness (p. 769) (Surface Body only)

– Layered Section (p. 437) (Surface Body only)

• Restore Assembly Grouping: Restores the hierarchy structure imported from a CAD file when
you change the grouping of the imported structure.

• Search Faces with Multiple Thicknesses

• Preview > Inflation

• Export - options include:

– Geometry: Exports the CAD geometry to a binary Part Manager Database (.pmdb) file.
You may your entire geometry, individual parts, and/or multiple parts. This option does
not support export at the body level of the geometry - only the part that includes the
body. This export option facilitates future geometry import into SpaceClaim, DesignModel-
er, as well as re-importing the file back into Mechanical.

– Ansys Viewer File (AVZ): Export result data as a Ansys Viewer File (.avz).

– STL File: Exports object information in Standard Tessellation Language (STL) file format
(ASCII only). This option is only available when the Export Format property of the Export
preferences is set to ASCII.

• Hide or Show > Solid Bodies/Surface Bodies/Line Bodies (option availability based on body
type).

• Update Geometry from Source

• Reset Body Colors

• Show Missing Tessellations

• Freeze Mesh on All Parts

API Reference
See the Geometry section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Specifying Geometry

• Attach Geometry

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Geometry Imports
Import geometry into Mechanical. The steps used to import geometry or external model files depend
upon how you have opened the application.

Mechanical Opened Independently

When you open Mechanical independently, the Geometry Imports folder does not include a child object.
Import one or more geometries, or an (external) model file, from this object. See the Attach Geometry
section for the steps to import geometry.

Mechanical Opened from Workbench

When you open Mechanical from Workbench, the Geometry Imports folder contains a child object,
Geometry Import. Imported geometries are referred to as "primary" and "secondary." The main distinction
is that the Primary Source corresponds to the project’s Geometry cell in Workbench. Secondary Sources
enable the importing of additional geometries purely within Mechanical.

If Mechanical is opened without a model specified, you can use this feature to import a Primary Source
geometry. This is shown in the example as the first child object Geometry Import (A3), where “(A3)”
refers to the corresponding Geometry cell in Workbench. The Primary Source is a default object and
always included.

As desired, you can incorporate additional "secondary" geometries into your analysis using the import
options of this feature. Using these features, you can simply exchange parts in an assembly during an
analysis.

The Geometry Imports Context tab provides options to import, update, and add geometries to your
simulation.

Geometry Imports Folder

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Geometry Imports

Object
Properties (p. 275)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 277)

Insertion
Methods (p. 277)

Limitations (p. 277)

Right-click
Options (p. 278)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 279)

Workbench-Based Geometry Import

Mechanical-Based Geometry Import

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for the objects of this feature are described below.

Geometry Imports Folder

The Geometry Imports folder has no Details pane properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Geometry Imports

Geometry Import Primary Source

The primary source Geometry Import object has the Details pane properties described below.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Source: Read-only indication of the path and file name associated
with the geometry.

Type: Read-only indication of how the original geometry was created

(CAD product name or DesignModeler).
Basic Geometry Parameters
Options
Parameter Key
Advanced Geo- Smart CAD Update
metry Options
Compare Parts on Update

Compare Parts Tolerance

Analysis Type

Geometry Import and Secondary Geometry Import Objects

The Geometry Import object when you open Mechanical independently and secondary Geometry
Import objects have the Details pane properties described below.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Source: Read-only indication of the path and file name associated
with the geometry.

Type: Read-only indication of how the original geometry was created

(CAD product name or DesignModeler).
Basic Geometry Solid Bodies
Options
Surface Bodies

Line Bodies

Parameters

Parameter Key

Attributes

Attribute Key

Named Selections

Named Selection Key

Material Properties

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Advanced Geo- Use Associativity
metry Options
Coordinate Systems

Coordinate System Key

Work Points

Reader Mode Saves Updated File

Use Instances

Smart CAD Update

Compare Parts on Update

Compare Parts Tolerance

Analysis Type

Mixed Import Resolution

Import Facet Quality

Clean Bodies on Import

Stitch Surfaces on Import

Stitch Tolerance

Decompose Disjoint Geometry

Enclosure and Symmetry Processing

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
All of the objects display automatically, either when the application is opened, or in the case of a sec-
ondary geometry, when it is imported.

Limitations
Note the following limitations for the use of this object:

• Parameters are not supported for secondary imports.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Geometry Imports

• If you have an analysis that includes model assembly, be sure to perform this operation before
importing any secondary geometries. Existing secondary geometries are lost during the model
assembly process.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for the objects include:

Geometry Imports

• Add Geometry Import >

– [list of recent models]: Select a recent model to import.

– From File: Open a file selection dialog to select a geometry file for import.

Geometry Import (Mechanical Opened Independently)

• Reload: Update the current geometry from the source.

• Reload From >

– [list of recent models]: Reload/replace the associated parts/bodies from the selected
recent geometry file.

– From File: Select this option to open a file selection dialog box. Reload/replace the
associated parts/bodies with the selected geometry file.

• Go To > Corresponding Bodies in Tree

Geometry Import (A3)

• Reload: Update the current geometry from the source.

• Replace with >

– [list of recent models]: Reload/replace the associated parts/bodies from the selected
recent geometry file.

– From File: Select this option to open a file selection dialog box. Reload/replace the
associated parts/bodies with the selected geometry file.

• Rename (F2): Note that the primary source object will always have the Workbench cell ID
(for example, "A3") appended to the name. You cannot remove this value.

• Go To > Corresponding Bodies in Tree

Geometry Import (Secondary)

• Reload: Reload using the current source and preferences.

• Reload From >

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – [list of recent models]: Reload/replace the associated parts/bodies from the selected
recent geometry file. Provides the capability to change the import preferences.

– From File: Select this option to open a file selection dialog box. Reload/replace the
associated parts/bodies with the selected geometry file. Provides the capability to
change the import preferences.

• Go To > Corresponding Bodies in Tree

Additional Related Information

See the Attach Geometry section for more information about the steps to import geometries.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Global Coordinate System
Represents the default coordinate system. The origin is defined as 0,0,0 in the model coordinate system.
This location serves as the reference location for any local Coordinate System (p. 161) objects inserted
under the Global Coordinate System object.

Object Properties (p. 281)

Tree Dependencies (p. 282)

Insertion Methods (p. 282)

Right-click Options (p. 282)

Additional Related
Information (p. 282)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

The following are all read-only status indications of the global coordinate system:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type
Mechanical APDL System Number - assigns the coordinate system
reference number (the first argument of the Mechanical APDL LOCAL
command).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
Global Coordinate System

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Origin Origin X
Origin Y
Origin Z
Directional X Axis Data
Vectors
Y Axis Data
Z Axis Data

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Coordinate Systems (p. 167).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Automatically inserted in the tree.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Create Section Plane

• Create Construction Surface

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Coordinate Systems

• Creating Coordinate Systems

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Image
Inserts a screen shot of your model, as shown in the Geometry window, and places it underneath the
currently selected object.

The Images drop-down menu also contains the following image insertion options:

• Image from File: Import an existing image and place it under the currently selected object. This
option supports multiple file formats.png (default), .jpg, etc.

• Image Plane from File: Import an image and place it on or around your model based on the
XY-plane of the selected coordinate system. The image object for this option is always placed
as a child object of the Model object.

The option is used primarily with the Construction Line feature to overlay and accurately sketch
line segments. However, it has many applications. For example, you can place logos on your
model, specify a background, set up physical rulers to help measure deformations, incorporate
image planes into custom ACT extensions, etc.

See below for a description of the properties associated with the Image object created using
this option.

Inserted images also appear in Reports. The Image object is a static picture of the current model view.
It differs from the Figure (p. 241) object in that it cannot be manipulated (rotated for example).

Note:

Duplicating an image in the tree will result in both the original object and the copied object
using the same image file on disk. Altering or deleting either the original or the copied object
will result in modification and/or deletion of the image file on disk. Both items in the tree
will be affected by the change to one of the objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Image

Object Properties (p. 284)

Tree Dependencies (p. 285)

Insertion Methods (p. 285)

Right-click Options (p. 285)

API Reference (p. 285)

Additional Related
Information (p. 285)

Object Properties
Objects created using the Image and Image from File options do not include details properties. For
the Image Plane from File option, the Details pane properties are listed below.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Image Plane Proper- Image File: References the file path of the imported image. Once the
ties image is read-in, the file does not need to remain in the same location
on disk since its data will be embedded in the project upon saving.

Image Pixel Width: Read-only field of the image's width dimension.

Image Pixel Height: Read-only field of the image's height dimension.

Coordinate System: Specify where to place your image based on a

Coordinate System.

Show Coordinate System: Show the selected Coordinate System triad

on the model. Options include Yes or No (default).

Width: Specify the physical width of your image. For the best results,
it is recommended that the ratio of physical width to physical height
matches the aspect ratio of your image.

Height: Specify the physical height of your image. For the best results,
it is recommended that the ratio of physical width to physical height
matches the aspect ratio of your image.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Translucency: Increasing the value makes your image more and more
transparent which may help you sketch a more accurate line.

Horizontal Flip: Reverse your image horizontally.

Vertical Flip: Reverse your image vertically.

Show Always: Options include Yes (default) and No. For the Yes setting,
the plane image displays regardless of which object you have selected.
When set to No, the plane image is only displayed when you select the
object.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects:

– For importing images: All objects.

– For importing Plane images: Model.

– For static image captures: Same parent tree objects as for Figure (p. 241).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Comment (p. 97).

Insertion Methods
Open the Images drop-down menu from the Insert group on the Home tab and select Image.

To import an image, select either Image from File or Image Plane from File and then select your desired
image file.

Note:

The Insert group is available from a number of Context tabs.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Refresh Image from File: Only available for Image Plane from File option.

API Reference
See the Image section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Image

• Insert

• Inserting Comments, Images, and Figures

• Reporting

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Import Summary
Displays a listing of upstream source file data in the Worksheet. This data is summarized in tabular form.
It provides four specific tables:

• TABLE 1: Displays the quantities for each imported entity. This includes all upstream data, not
only the data from the External Model system. You can scroll through this table if your model
contains a large number of bodies.

• TABLE 2: Displays the number of nodes and elements associated with each body. It also displays
the geometry type. This includes all upstream data, not only the data from the External Model
system. Based on the number of data items imported, this table presents data items in a format
that includes navigational options. When the external file includes over 50 data items, only the
first 50 are displayed. Use the display and navigational options to present the data items as de-
sired.

• TABLE 3: Displays the commands that the application processed, including how many times the
command was processed.

• TABLE 4: Displays the commands that were not processed, including how many times the
command was not processed.

This object has no associated Details view properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Bolt Pretensions and Premeshed Bolt
Pretensions
Provides access to an external system’s pretension data for a source file that includes bolt pretension
loads. The import process places this object under an Imported folder beneath the Connections parent
folder.

Object
Properties (p. 289)

Worksheet
Properties (p. 289)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 290)

Insertion
Methods (p. 290)

Right-click
Options (p. 290)

API
Reference (p. 290)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 290)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the imported source data listed below.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
Imported: Bolt Pretensions and Premeshed Bolt Pretensions

Property Description
ID Displays the identifier associated with the bolt pretension load in
the source input file.
Pretension Node ID The Node Identifier (ID) value is read-in from the source file. This
node location is displayed using the red arrows in the Geometry
window. The red arrows also indicate the directions for how the
application applies the bolt pretension load on the node. You can
modify the Node ID name in order to more easily perform
post-processing tasks as well as accessing the pretension node using
the Node ID name in a Commands object. Also see the Reference
Node Naming topic for additional node naming information.
Scoping The Scoping column displays the associated Named Selection for
the scoped element faces (for Bolt Pretensions) or scoped node pairs
(for Premeshed Bolt Pretensions) that are read-in from the source
file.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Suppress

Note:

Review the User Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and Interface Options
section for all of the actions you can take when working with Worksheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Bolt Pretensions section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting inform-
ation.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Bolt Pretensions and Premeshed Bolt Pretensions

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Boundary Conditions
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes constraint and loading conditions. The import
process places this object under the Model parent folder. This import option only supports importing
node-based Displacements and Forces from the source file. Once you have imported these supported
typed into Mechanical, additional options for imported Constraints include rotational displacement,
Temperature, and Voltage. For imported Loads additional options include node-based Moments, Heat
Flow, Current, and gravity (Acceleration). Examples are illustrated below as ribbon options.

Constraints Example Object

Properties (p. 294)

Worksheet
Properties (p. 296)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 296)

Insertion
Methods (p. 296)

Right-click
Options (p. 296)

Context Tab
Options (p. 297)

Load Step
Support (p. 298)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 298)
Nodal Loads Example

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Imported: Boundary Conditions

Surface Loads Example

Object Properties
The Boundary Conditions object does not have any associated Details view properties. The Details
view properties for the Constraints, Nodal Loads, and Surface Loads objects are identical and include
the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).

Applied By: Defines how node-based loads and constraints are applied.
Options include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Program Co trolled (default): Based on the node count, the
application applies boundary conditions directly to the nodes
unless the number of nodes is greater than 500, then a
component is created for application.

• Direct: The application applies boundary conditions directly to

the nodes.

• Components: The application creates a nodal component to

apply the boundary conditions.

Convection Proper- Applied By: Defines how a convection load is applied. Options include:
[a]
ties
• Direct (default): The application applies the convection load
directly onto the elements of the faces or edges of the scoped
geometry.

• Surface Effect: The application applies the convection load onto

surface effect elements that overlay the elements of the scoped
geometry.

Note:

If the Surface Load object contains any other loads, in

addition to convection loads, the application uses the
Surface Effect option regardless of the property’s setting
– any other setting is ignored.

Convection Matrix: Specifies the convection matrix using one of the

following options:

• Program Controlled: The application determines whether to

use a diagonal or consistent film coefficient matrix.

• Consistent (default): Consistent film coefficient matrix.

Tip:

This option is suggested for high order tetrahedron

elements (SOLID291).

• Diagonal: Diagonal film coefficient matrix.

Graphics Properties Each Constraint, Nodal Load, and Surface Load object (Force,
Displacement, Pressure, etc. ) has a row that enables you to modify the
color of the graphical representation of the condition in the Geometry
window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Imported: Boundary Conditions

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and
From All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).
[a] This category only displays when a convection load is contained in the External Model file.

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data. As needed, review the
common interface options available using the right-click context menu for individual rows and/or when
you select multiple Worksheet rows.

Property Description
ID Displays the load/constraint identifier from the source (like SID field
from Nastran). For sources which do not provide identifiers, it is just
the index of load in the worksheet.
Scope Displays either the Named Selection associated with the nodes for
the imported displacement or a label of the node set and the count
of the nodes included in the node set.
All Other Columns All of the other Worksheet columns display load/constraint
(Displacement component values from the imported file as well as any values that
X/Y/Z, Rotation you define.
X/Y/Z, Pressure,
etc.)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Constraints, Nodal Loads, and Surface Loads.

Insertion Methods
The Boundary Conditions object is automatically generated via External Model.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Promote > Scope

• Edit Items > [Varies Based on Load Type]

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Context Tab Options

The Context tab options listed below display when you select the Constraints, Nodal Loads, or the
Surface Loads objects. These Context tabs enable you to insert (or delete) additional DOFs to the ex-
isting Constraints/Nodal Loads/Surface Loads. Once added, the DOFs show up in the worksheet, where
you can then specify desired values.

The Context tab enables you to turn the display of any of the inserted options, Displacement, Rotation,
etc., on or off. In addition, the Context tab for Nodal Loads and Surface Load provides two options that
change the display of vectors from a Proportional display to a Uniform display.

Constraints Context Options

Nodal Loads Context Options

Surface Loads Context Options

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Imported: Boundary Conditions

Load Step Support

The imported Constraint/Nodal Load/Surface Load/Acceleration objects support step dependent
loading. Selecting a row in the worksheet activates the Tabular Data window that displays the con-
straint/load values for each step present in the analysis. You can edit the data in tabular view to apply
values varying across steps. In addition, user has the ability to activate/deactivate the constraint/load
components for each step through the context (right-click) menu on the Tabular Data window. See
the Activating and Deactivating Loads topic for additional information.

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Import Workflow and Interface Options

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Composite Plies
Provides ply/layer data from an upstream External Model system. This object is similar to the Imported
Plies (p. 379) object of the same name created when you import ply/layer data from an upstream system
other than External Model, except that for this object, the Plies data is presented using the Worksheet
and the Tabular Data pane, as illustrated below.

Imported Plies Object Example Imported Plies

Object
Properties (p. 300)

Plies Object
Properties (p. 300)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 301)

Insertion
Methods (p. 301)

Right-click
Options (p. 301)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 301)

Plies Object Example

Tabular Data Example

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Imported: Composite Plies

Imported Plies Object Properties

The Details view properties for the Imported Plies object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only property with the field content "Imported Plies".

Suppressed: Select Yes to suppress this object.

Note:

The Suppression option is only available when the external

system shares the model with the downstream analysis
system.

Material Nonlinear Effects: Select Yes to include the nonlinear effects from the
material properties. The reference temperature specified for the body
on which a ply is defined is used as the reference temperature for the
plies.

Thermal Strain Effects: Select Yes to send the coefficient of thermal

expansion to the solver.

Note:

These fields are not supported for an Explicit Dynamics

analysis.

Plies Object Properties

Details

The Details properties for the Plies child object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default),
and From All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Read Only: Options include Yes (default) and No.

Worksheet

When you select the Plies object, the Worksheet displays and includes the following properties.

Property Description
ID Read-only display of the ID for the ply that is contained in the source file.
Scoping Read-only display of the number of elements contained in the ply.
Layers Read-only property that displays the number of layers/items that are
included in Tabular Data.
Offset Type Read-only display of the Offset Type of the ply included in the source
file.
Offset Read-only value of the Offset of the ply included in the source file.

Tabular Data

When you select a Worksheet row, the Tabular Data window displays and includes the following
properties.

Property Description
Layer Read-only display of the layer number.
Thickness Read-only display of the thickness of the ply.
Material This is the material assigned to the ply. You can change ply materials.
Theta Read-only display of the ply fiber angle.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The Imported Plies folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Object: Plies object.

Insertion Methods
This object, and its child object, are inserted upon import from External Model.

Right-click Options
Relevant right-click options for this object are in the common right-click options (p. 2) list.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Composite Plies

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Constraint Equations or Coupling
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes constraint equations and couplings. The import
process places this object under an Imported folder beneath the Connections parent folder.

Imported Constraint Equations Object Object Properties (p. 304)

Worksheet Properties (p. 304)

Tree Dependencies (p. 305)

Insertion Methods (p. 305)

Right-click Options (p. 305)

API Reference (p. 305)

Additional Related
Information (p. 305)

Imported Constraint Equation Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Imported: Constraint Equations or Coupling

Imported Coupling Data

Object Properties
The Details pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Constraint Equation/Coupling Equation: Enables you to pick the
graphics display color of the associated data.
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default),
and From All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Property Description
Type Displays the data is for a constraint equation (CE) or coupling (CP).
ID Displays the element ID contained in the source input file.
Equation Displays the associated constraint equation.
Coupling DOF Displays the coupled degrees of freedom.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Edit Items > Coupling DOF

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Constraint Equations section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting
information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Constraint Equations or Coupling

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Imported: Constraint Equations or Coupling

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Contacts
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes contacts. The import process places this object
under an Imported folder beneath the Connections parent folder.

Imported Contacts Object Object Properties (p. 308)

Worksheet Properties (p. 308)

Tree Dependencies (p. 309)

Insertion Methods (p. 309)

Right-click Options (p. 310)

API Reference (p. 310)

Additional Related
Information (p. 310)

External system's contact data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Imported: Contacts

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the imported source data listed below.

Note:

The Worksheet view for the Imported Contacts only provides the basic options for controlling
contact behavior, and all the advanced options are treated as Program Controlled. For ad-
vanced control on Imported Contacts, use the Promote feature to create native Contact Region
objects (p. 147) in the tree Outline and then edit the appropriate fields as desired.

Note:

Review the User Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and Interface Options
section for all of the actions you can take when working with Worksheet data.

Property Description
ID Displays the element ID contained in the source input file.
Source Displays the element set associated with the contact side of the pair.
Target Displays the element set associated with the target side of the pair.
Type Displays the contact Type specified in the source file. You can change
the Type setting using the drop-down menu.
Friction Coefficient Displays the Friction Coefficient imported from the source file for
frictional contact applications. You can edit this field. It is displayed only
for frictional contact applications. It is applicable only for frictional
contact applications. If multiple load steps are included in the source
file, only the Friction Coefficient from the first load step is imported.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Property Description
Behavior Displays the Behavior of the contact pair specified in the source file.
You can change the Behavior setting using the drop-down menu.
Formulation Displays the Formulation specified in the source file. You can change
the Formulation setting using the drop-down menu.
Thermal Conduct- Applies to thermal analyses or a structural analysis linked to a thermal
ance analysis. You can edit this field and enter a positive (only) Thermal
Conductance value. The Units for this value are based on the types of
contact involved. For 3D element faces, the units are HEAT/(TIME *
TEMPERATURE* AREA).
Normal Stiffness Drop-down menu that displays the normal stiffness type. Options include
Program Controlled (default), Factor, and Absolute Value. Refer to
the Normal Stiffness description in the Contact section for additional
information.
Normal Stiffness Displays the Normal Stiffness Value. The setting is applicable when the
Value Normal Stiffness property is set to either Factor or Absolute Value.
You can edit the value. There is no unit of measure for this value when
Factor is specified. The unit of measure for this value, when the Normal
Stiffness property is set to Absolute Value, is specific weight (Force
per volume, F/L3) for a traction based model and stiffness (F/L) for or a
force based model. Refer to the Normal Stiffness description in the
Contact section for additional information.
Interface Treatment Defines how the contact pair is treated. It is not valid when the Type is set
to Bonded or No Separation. Mechanical Interface Treatment properties
are supported, as well as the following ABAQUS keywords:

• *CONTACT INTERFACE: Offset Only, Ramped Effects.

• *CONTACT INTERFACE, SHRINK: Add Offset, Ramped Effect.

• *CLEARANCE: Offset Only, No Ramping.

Offset The setting is applicable to the Interface Treatment setting. It is not valid
when the Type is set to Bonded or No Separation or if the Interface
Treatment property is set to Adjust to Touch.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Imported: Contacts

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Edit Items >

– Type > [Type Options]

– Behavior > [Behavior Options]

– Formulation > [Formulation Options]

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Imported Contacts section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Contacts

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Coordinate Systems
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes coordinate systems. The import process places
this object under an Imported folder beneath the Connections parent folder.

Imported Coordinate Systems Object Object Properties (p. 312)

Worksheet Properties (p. 312)

Tree Dependencies (p. 312)

Insertion Methods (p. 313)

Right-click Options (p. 313)

API Reference (p. 313)

Additional Related
Information (p. 313)

External system's coordinate system data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Imported: Coordinate Systems

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
ID Displays the element ID contained in the source input file.
Type Displays the type of coordinate system (Cartesian or Cylindrical).
Origin Displays the Location.
X Axis Data Displays the position of the X coordinate.
Y Axis Data Displays the position of the Y coordinate.
Z Axis Data Displays the position of the Z coordinate.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Promote > Coordinate System

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Coordinate Systems section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting in-
formation.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Coordinate Systems

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Element Orientations (External Model)
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes element orientations. The import process
places this object under an Imported folder beneath the Geometry parent folder.

Imported Element Orientations Object Object Properties (p. 316)

Worksheet Properties (p. 316)

Tree Dependencies (p. 316)

Insertion Methods (p. 317)

Right-click Options (p. 317)

API Reference (p. 317)

Additional Related
Information (p. 317)

External system's element orientations data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
Imported: Element Orientations (External Model)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
ID Displays the element ID contained in the source input file.
Element Set Displays the number of elements within the set.
Coordinate System Displays the coordinate system of the element.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Hide > Solid Bodies/Surface Bodies/Line Bodies

• Promote >

– Element Orientation

– Coordinate System

– Named Selection

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Element Orientations section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting
information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Element Orientations

• External Model

• Element Orientations

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Flexible Remote Connectors
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes flexible remote connections based on the
stiffness of the external data provided. The import process places these objects under an Imported
folder beneath the Connections parent folder.

Imported Flexible Remote Connectors Object Object Properties (p. 320)

Worksheet Properties (p. 320)

Tree Dependencies (p. 321)

Insertion Methods (p. 321)

Right-click Options (p. 321)

Tabular Data (p. 322)

API Reference (p. 322)

Additional Related
Information (p. 322)

External system's flexible remote connectors data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Imported: Flexible Remote Connectors

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Color: Enables you to pick a graphics display color.
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
Type Indicates the type of connection from the imported file. For CDB
files, the column displays Remote Point. For ABAQUS files, the column
displays Distributed Coupling. For NASTRAN files, the column
displays RBE3.
ID Displays the element Identifier from the source file.
Reference Node ID This value is the ID of the node that is attached to the participating
nodes. You can edit this property to assign a custom name to the
Reference Node ID. The corresponding node is identified by the
specified name in the solver file and can be accessed using command
snippets. See the Reference Node Naming topic for additional
information.
DOFs Degrees of Freedom (DOFs) for the connectors.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Property Description
Participating A listing of the number of nodes (or Node ID for a single node) that
Nodes are connected to the Reference Node through force-distributed
constraint.
Weight Participat- Determines the type of weight participation. It provides a drop-down
ing Factor list of options, however, based on the data contained in the source
file, the application makes a default selection. Options include:

• Uniform

• User Defined

• Program Controlled

The nodes can have Uniform participation or user-defined weights

or Linear participation (in case of Distributed Coupling). For
example, Uniform weight participation indicates that the force is
distributed uniformly on to the participating nodes.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Promote > Remote Point

• Edit Items >

– Reference Node ID

– DOFs

– Weight Participating Factor > Program Controlled/Uniform

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
Imported: Flexible Remote Connectors

Tabular Data
When you select a connection (row) in the Worksheet that contains dependent nodal DOFs, the Tabular
Data window displays and includes the degree of freedom for each participating node.

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and In-
terface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Worksheet
data.

API Reference
See the Imported Flexible Remote Connectors section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific
scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Flexible Remote Connections

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Nodal Orientations
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes nodal orientations. The import process places
this object under an Imported folder beneath the Geometry parent folder.

Imported Nodal Orientations Object Object

Properties (p. 325)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
Imported: Nodal Orientations

Worksheet
Properties (p. 325)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 325)

Insertion
Methods (p. 325)

Right-click
Options (p. 326)

API
Reference (p. 326)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 326)

External system's nodal orientations data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows:Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
ID Displays the node ID contained in the source input file.
Location Indicates the X, Y, Z coordinates of the source node relative to the
Global Coordinate system.
Orientation Indicates the Euler angles of the source node relative to the Global
Coordinate system.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Imported: Nodal Orientations

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Nodal Orientations section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting in-
formation.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Nodal Orientations

• External Model

• Specifying Named Selections in the Mechanical Application

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Point Masses
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes point masses. The import process places this
object under an Imported folder beneath the Geometry parent folder.

Imported Point Masses Object Object Properties (p. 328)

Worksheet Properties (p. 328)

Tree Dependencies (p. 329)

Insertion Methods (p. 329)

Right-click Options (p. 329)

API Reference (p. 329)

Additional Related
Information (p. 330)

External system's point masses data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
Imported: Point Masses

Important:

If your imported Point Mass is connected to a body through an imported connection, such
as a Remote Connection, Constraint Equation, or Spring, Mechanical does not include the
imported Point Mass in any Rotational Velocity or Rotational Acceleration scoping.

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Color: Enables you to pick a graphics display color.
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
ID Displays the command identifier from the source input file.
Reference Node ID Displays the node ID contained in the Nastran or Abaqus source file.
The corresponding node is identified by the specified name in the
solver file and can be accessed using command snippets. See the
Reference Node Naming topic for additional information.
Location Displays the location of the point mass.
Mass Total mass of the point mass.
Mass Moment of Displays the mass moment of inertia in the X/Y/Z direction measure
Inertia X/Y/Z with respect to the nodal coordinate system.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Property Description
Mass Moment of Displays the mass moment of inertia with respect to the XY plane
Inertia XY in the nodal coordinate system.
Mass Moment of Displays the mass moment of inertia with respect to the XZ plane
Inertia XZ in the nodal coordinate system.
Mass Moment of Displays the mass moment of inertia with respect to the YZ plane
Inertia YZ in the nodal coordinate system.
Offset X/Y/Z The distance between the nodal location and the center of mass in
the X/Y/Z direction. Any non-zero value is invalid. You can change
the value in this field.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Edit Items > [Base on Worksheet Content]

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Point Masses section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
Imported: Point Masses

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Point Mass

• External Model

• Point Mass

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Rigid Remote Connectors
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes rigid remote connections based on the stiffness
of the external data provided. The import process places these objects under an Imported folder beneath
the Connections parent folder.

Imported Rigid Remote Connectors Object Object Properties (p. 332)

Worksheet Properties (p. 332)

Tree Dependencies (p. 333)

Insertion Methods (p. 333)

Right-click Options (p. 333)

API Reference (p. 333)

Additional Related
Information (p. 333)

External system's rigid remote connectors data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Imported: Rigid Remote Connectors

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Color: Enables you to pick a graphics display color.
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
Type Indicates the type of connection from the imported file. For CDB
files, the column displays Remote Point. For ABAQUS files, the column
displays Kinematic Coupling. For NASTRAN files, the column displays
RBE2.
ID Displays element identifier from the source file for NASTRAN or
ABAQUS. For CDB, it is the real constant ID.
Reference Node ID This value is the ID of the node that is attached to the participating
nodes. You can edit this property to assign a custom name to the
Reference Node Id. The corresponding node is identified by the
specified name in the solver file and can be accessed using command
snippets. See the Assigning Custom Names to Reference Nodes and
Accessing them in Solver File topic for additional information.
DOFs Degrees of Freedom (DOFs) for the connectors.
Participating A listing of the number of nodes (or Node ID for a single node) that
Nodes are constrained to the Reference node for translation and rotation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Promote > Remote Point

• Edit Items >

– Reference Node ID

– DOFs

• Filter Worksheet Based on State >

– Underdefined

– Suppressed

• Export Text File

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Rigid Remote Connectors section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting
information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Rigid Remote Connections

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Shell Thicknesses
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes shell thicknesses. The import process places
this object under an Imported folder beneath the Geometry parent folder.

Imported Shell Thicknesses Object Object Properties (p. 336)

Worksheet Properties (p. 336)

Tree Dependencies (p. 336)

Insertion Methods (p. 336)

Right-click Options (p. 337)

API Reference (p. 337)

Additional Related
Information (p. 337)

External system's shell thicknesses data:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Imported: Shell Thicknesses

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
ID Displays the element Identifier from the source input file.
Element Set The number of elements within the set.
Sheet Thickness The thickness of the sheet specified in the source file.
Offset Type Drop-down menu of offset options, including Top, Bottom, Middle,
and User Defined.
Sheet Offset You use this property when the Offset Type property is set to User
Defined.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Hide > Solid Bodies/Surface Bodies/Line Bodies

• Edit Items >

– Sheet Thickness

– Offset Type > Top/Middle/Bottom/user Defined

• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Shell Thickness section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Shell Thicknesses

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported: Spring Connectors
Provides access to an external system’s data that includes springs or bushings. The import process
places this object under an Imported folder beneath the Connections parent folder.

Spring Example Object

Properties (p. 341)

Worksheet
Properties (p. 341)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 342)

Right-click
Options (p. 342)

API
Reference (p. 343)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 343)

Spring Data Example

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Imported: Spring Connectors

Bushing Example

Bushing Data Example

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Suppressed: Yes or No (default).
Graphics Properties Color: Enables you to pick graphics display color of grounded as well as
non-grounded springs.
Show Rows: Options include None, From Current Page (default), and From
All Pages.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only display of the name of the source system file.
Read Only: Yes or No (default).

Worksheet Properties
The columns of the Worksheet display the following imported source data:

Property Description
Type Indicates the type of connection from the imported source file.
Options include:

• Single dof: This option indicates that the spring is being

applied in the local nodal coordinate system in a single degree
of Freedom (DOF) direction (ux or uy or uz or rotx or roty or
rotz)

• Multi dof: This option indicates that the spring is being

applied in more than one DOF.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Imported: Spring Connectors

Property Description
ID Displays the node Identifier from the source input file.
Nodes Indicates the nodes included with the spring. The nodes are
contained in braces ("{}") and the element ID associated with the
displayed nodes precedes the braces. For example, as shown in the
image above, "nodes23{2, 104}" indicates element ID 23 includes
nodes 2 and 104. You can double-click this field and edit the
application assigned name.
Grounded Node If a field of this column indicates None, then the participating nodes
are constrained. If a field displays one of the node IDs, then that
node ID is constrained in all DOFs. This column provides a drop-down
list with the option None as well as a listing of the node IDs.
Stiffness Displays the stiffness constants in all DOFs or one DOF depending
on the Type of spring connector.
Damping Displays the structural damping coefficient applied in all DOFs or
one DOF depending on the Type of spring connector.
Coordinate System Displays the coordinate system of the elements. The Coordinate
System can be specified as a node or a vector.
Location Displays the location of the spring damper element and is displayed
based on either relative position or the coordinates with respect to
the local/global coordinate system.
Location Coordin- Displays the coordinate system for the coordinates of the spring
ate System damper location.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The generic Imported folder is automatically generated during the import
process.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is an automatically generated object of the External Model feature.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Edit Items >

– Node

– Ground Node

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Suppress

Note:

Review the Import Workflow and Interface Options topic in the Import Workflow and
Interface Options section for all of the actions you can take when working with Work-
sheet data.

API Reference
See the Imported Spring Connectors section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting in-
formation.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Importing Mesh-Based Geometry

• Imported Springs (p. 339)

• External Model

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Condensed Part
Defines a single imported superelement with the overall inertial and flexibility behavior summarized
on a reduced set of degrees of freedom. The object also enables the synthesis of vibration behavior of
more complex structures by assembling the geometry of the Imported Condensed Parts object with
other parts during Harmonic Response (MSUP only), Modal, Random Vibration, and Response Spectrum
analyses.

Object
Properties (p. 346)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 346)

Insertion
Methods (p. 346)

Right-click
Options (p. 347)

API
Reference (p. 347)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 347)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Imported Condensed Part

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Geometry: Read-only property that displays the number of nodes imported.
Defin- Suppressed
i-
tion Import File Format: Displays the supported file types: Exported Condensed Part (.cpa),
Generation Pass Output (.sub), and Super Element Matrix (.dmig).

Condensed Part File: Opens a dialog to define the path to the import file.

Locating System: Specify the desired Coordinate System to orientate the imported
superelement.

Node Offset: Has a default setting of Program Controlled that equates to the value zero.
Using this setting the application automatically offsets the node number based on the
Mesh. Any value that is greater than zero offsets the Node Ids by that value.

Actual Node Offset: Read-only property that displays the node offset value used by the
solver.

Import Status: Read-only property showing the status of import workflow process.
Ana- Solver Files Directory: Read-only property indicating the location of the solution files for
lys- this analysis.
is
Data Solver Unit System: Read-only property showing the unit system of the imported
Man- superelement.
age-
ment
In- Normal Modes Extracted: For .cpa files (only), this read-only property displays the
form- number of normal modes extracted during the Generation Pass analysis using the CMSOPT
a- command.
tion

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Condensed Geometry (p. 117).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Condensed Geometry object:

• Select the Imported Condensed Part option from the Condensed Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click the Condensed Geometry object and select Insert > Imported Condensed Part.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and then select Insert > Imported Condensed Part.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Imported Condensed Part: Insert a new Imported Condensed Part object.

• Import Condensed Part: Perform the import process on the selected Imported Condensed
Part object(s).

• Suppress

• Clear Generated Data

• Open Solver Files Directory

API Reference
See the Imported Condensed Part section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting inform-
ation.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Substructure Analysis

• Condensed Geometry (p. 117)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Element Orientation (Group)
Houses element orientation data (in the form of Imported Element Orientation (p. 353) objects) imported
from External Data. It is a folder object. The child objects of this folder enable you to map coordinate
system data points onto the elements of your model in order to specify the coordinate systems of se-
lected elements.

Object
Properties (p. 349)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 350)

Insertion
Methods (p. 350)

Right-click
Options (p. 350)

API
Reference (p. 351)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 351)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for the Imported Element Orientation object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Imported Element Orientation (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type

A read-only description of the object type: Imported Data.

Interpolation Type

A read-only description of the Interpolation Type: External File.

Suppressed

Include or exclude the object in your analysis (Yes or No).

Source

Read-only property that describes the upstream data source. If you

import data from an upstream External Data system in Workbench,
the entry indicates the corresponding cell of the system, such as
A2::Setup1. If you Import Data from Mechanical, the entry is set to
External Data.

Data Managerment Delete Mapped Data Files: Deletes the files generated by the
application during the mapping process. Options include Yes and No.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Element Orientation, Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283)
objects.

Insertion Methods
Read-only property that describes the upstream data source. If you import data from an upstream Ex-
ternal Data system in Workbench, the entry indicates the corresponding cell of the system, such as
A2::Setup1. If you Import Data from Mechanical the entry is set to External Data.

This object appears automatically when you import data from an upstream External Data system in
Workbench.

Alternatively, you can use the Imported Element Orientation option of the Geometry (p. 265) object
context toolbar in Mechanical. This option is also available from the context (right-click) menu option
Insert of the Geometry object as well as the context menu of the geometry window. When selected,
the application automatically inserts an Imported Element Orientation folder in the Outline as well
as an Element Orientation child object.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert>Element Orientation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Edit: If you have already selected a file, this option re-opens the External Data dialog, enabling
you to modify the imported object's details.

• Import Element Orientation: Map the data.

• Reload: Reloads data from the source file(s).

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Imported Load Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External Data

• Imported Element Orientation (p. 353) object

• Element Orientation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Element Orientation (External Data)
Maps coordinate system data points from External Data onto the elements of your model in order to
specify the coordinate systems of selected elements.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Imported Element Orientation (External Data)

Object
Properties (p. 354)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 357)

Insertion
Methods (p. 357)

Right-click
Options (p. 357)

API
Reference (p. 358)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 358)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include but are not limited to the properties listed below.
Review Appendix B. Data Transfer Mesh Mapping for additional information about the mapping-based
categories and settings for the object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry

Displayed when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection (default). Displays the type of geometry and the
number of geometric entities to which the object has been
applied using the selection tools. Use the selection filter to pick
geometry, click in the Geometry field, then click Apply.

Named Selection

Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.

This field provides a drop-down list of available user-defined
Named Selections.

Definition Type

A read-only property that describes the object: Element Orientation.

Suppressed

Suppress the object as desired.

Coordinate System

Provides a drop-down menu that includes the imported Source

Coordinate System, the Global Coordinate System, and any
user-defined Coordinate Systems.

Settings Mapping Control

Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual.

Mapping

A read-only property that describes the setting: Profile

Preserving.

Weighting

Select the type of weighting to be performed. This option can

be changed only if the Mapping Control property is set to
Manual. The default read-only setting is Triangulation.

When the Mapping Control property is set to Program

Controlled, this property becomes active and has the default
setting is Direct Assignment.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Imported Element Orientation (External Data)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Transfer Type

When the Mapping Control property is set to Program

Controlled, this read-only property displays with the setting
Volumetric.

Rigid Transformation Mesh Alignment

Provides a drop-down menu that includes the options Use

Origin and Euler Angles and Use Coordinate Systems.

Origin XYZ and Theta XY/YZ/ZX

Display when the Mesh Alignment property is set to Use Origin

and Euler Angles. You use these properties to change the
source point coordinate locations.

Source/Target Coordinate System

Display when the Mesh Alignment is set to Use Coordinate

System.

Graphics Controls Display Source Points

Toggle display of source point data. Options include Off

(default) and On.

Display Source Point Ids

Toggle display of source point data identifiers. Options include

Off (default) and On.

Display Interior Source Point

Displayed when either of the above properties are set to On.

Toggle the display of internal source point data. Options include
Off (default) and On.

Named Selection The following properties enable you to create Named Selections for
Creation Mapped, Unmapped, and Outside elements identified during the
mapping process.

Unmapped Elements

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option

displays the Name property. Rename the default entry for this
property as desired.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mapped Elements

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option

displays the Name property. Rename the default entry for this
property as desired.

Outside Elements

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option

displays the Name property. Rename the default entry for this
property as desired.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Imported Element Orientation (p. 349) group.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Element Orientation, Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283)
objects.

Insertion Methods
This object appears automatically when your upstream External Data system contains the appropriate
data.

Alternatively, you can use the Imported Element Orientation option of the Geometry (p. 265) object
context toolbar in Mechanical. This option is also available from the context (right-click) menu option
Insert of the Geometry object as well as the context menu of the geometry window. When selected,
the application automatically inserts an Imported Element Orientation folder in the Outline as well
as an Element Orientation child object.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Validation (p. 781)

• Import Element Orientation: Map the imported data.

• Export > Text File

• Clear Generated Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Imported Element Orientation (External Data)

API Reference
See the Imported Element Orientation section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting in-
formation.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• External Data

• Imported Element Orientation (p. 349) group object

• Element Orientation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Load (Group)
Contains loads that you want to apply in the current analysis. You can import these loads from either
an:

• Upstream analysis system. The object is labeled Imported Loads (A6), where "A6" is an example
upstream system identifier. The application automatically creates the Imported Loads object.

• Mechanical APDL Result File. The object is labeled Imported Load (MAPDL Results File). For
this object, you specify a file path to an existing result file (file.rst or file.rth).

• Fluids Results File: The object is labeled Imported Load (Fluids Results File). For this object,
specify a file path to an existing result file (Fluent or CFX result files, including .dat.h5, .dat.gz,
and .res files).

• External Data File: The object is labeled Imported Load (A2), where "A2" is an example upstream
External Data system identifier or Imported Load (External Data).

In addition, the object provides context (right-click) menu options to add valid loads to the folder. The
content of this section pertains to the Imported Load folder object as well as the imported/inserted
load child objects.

Import Load Object

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Imported Load (Group)

Import Load
(Upstream
System/Result
File) Object
Properties (p. 361)

Imported Load
Child Object
Properties (p. 362)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 366)

Insertion
Methods (p. 366)

Right-click
Options (p. 366)

API
Reference (p. 367)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 367)

Child Load Object

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Import Load (Upstream System/Result File) Object Properties
The Details view properties for the Imported Load folder object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only indication.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Imported Load (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Interpolation Type: Typically a read-only indicator of the application
specified option for the property. Depending upon the analysis
configuration and mapping, this property may provide selectable options.

Suppressed: Options include Yes and No (default).

Source: Displays the name of the Source system.

The following properties are available when you import load data from
a Mechanical result file.

Source Dimension: Options include 2D (default for 2D analysis)

and 3D (default for 3D analysis).
Result File: Use the field's option to open a dialog and browse
to and select your file.
Result File Timestamp: Timestamp of when the result file was
modified.
Result File Unit System: If the result file has a unit system, this
property is read-only and displays the given unit system. If the
result file does not have a unit system, this property enables
you to specify a desired result file unit system.
Data Management Delete Mapped Data Files: Deletes the files generated by the
application during the mapping process. The default setting is Yes
except for Imported Thicknesses. For Imported Thickness
(Group) (p. 387) objects, you can set this option to No if you do not plan
to run an Explicit Dynamics analysis.

Note:

This property does not display for Explicit Dynamics

analyses because the files generated during the mapping
process are required for the solution process.

Additive Manufactur- Transfer Temperatures During Solve: Display when you insert an AM
ing Process object. The property controls the transfer of temperatures from
the Transient Thermal analysis during the solution process. Options
include Yes (default) and No. See the LPBF Simulation Guide for more
information.

Transfer Step: The step in the AM process during which the transfer
of temperatures will occur. Options include Build Step (default) and
Heat Treatment Step.

Imported Load Child Object Properties

The Details properties listed below are a comprehensive look at the child objects for the Imported
Load folder. Based on the type of load you have imported, and the system from which it is imported,
the display of the properties can vary.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Supported scoping options vary per load type.

Geometry

Displayed when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection

(default). Displays the type of geometry or mesh entity and the
number of entities to which the object has been applied using the
selection tools. Use the selection filters to pick geometry or mesh,
select the Geometry field, and then click Apply.

Named Selection

Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.

This field provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named
Selections.

Definition Type

A read-only property that describes the object: [Imported Load Type].

Apply To

Displays for certain loads imported from External Data. It enables

you to specify whether to apply the load to the centroid of an
Elements (default) or to the Corner Nodes of each element.

Apply As

If you are importing a Temperature (Imported Temperature) load

or a Thermal Condition (Imported Body Temperature) from an
External Data system for a Coupled Field Transient, Steady-State
Thermal, Transient Thermal, and Thermal-Electric analysis, this
property becomes available. Using this property, you can apply the
load as either a Boundary Condition (default) or an Initial
Condition. The Initial Condition option applies the load from the
External Data system as an initial condition on the scoped geometry
or mesh.

Loaded Area

Becomes available when you import Pressure loads from an External

Data system. Options include Deformed and Initial (default). The
Initial option treats the scoped surface area as a constant
throughout the analysis. Using the Deformed option, the application
incorporates the change in the surface area as a result of deformation
throughout the analysis. The selection for this property can be of
significance during large deflection problems.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Imported Load (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Tabular Loading

Options include Program Controlled (default), Ramped, Stepped,

and Off.

Note:

When you set this property to either Program Controlled

or Off, the application may display the data in the Graph
as ramped. This may not represent how the application
sends the load data to the solver.

Mapped Data

This property is only available when you have an Imported Velocity.

Options include To Input File (default) and To Binary File.

Apply To Initial Mesh

Available for Imported Displacement, Imported Body Temperature,

and Imported Pressure loads when a Nonlinear Adaptive Region is
present. Options include Yes (default) and No. Using the Yes option
applies the loading and constraint directly on the initial mesh for
each load step for nonlinear adaptivity. Using the No option applies
the loading on the current mesh. For more information, see the
Initial-Mesh Loading and Constraint section in the Nonlinear
Adaptivity Analysis Guide of the Mechanical APDL documentation.

Suppressed

Include or exclude the object in your analysis (Yes or No).

Source

Read-only property that displays the linked upstream system.

Source File

Options in Worksheet (default), All, and Range.

Overrides Constraints

Options include No (default) and Yes.

Source Bodies

Options include All (default), Manual, and Named Selection

(Imported Velocity only).

• When you set the property to Manual, the property Material IDs
also displays. You may specify one or more source bodies using
their Material ID value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• When you set the property to Named Selection, the Source
Component property also displays. This property provides a
drop-down menu that enables you to select a Named Selection
defined in the upstream system.

Specify RPM

This property is only available when the Mapped Data property is

set to To Binary File. As such, the Imported Velocity has a source
file that is RPM-based. Options include:

• Single (default): Applies the Imported Velocity on single RPM

load step.

• All: Applies the Imported Velocity on all RPM load steps.

• By RPM Set: Selecting this option displays the RPM Set

Numbers property displays. Use the RPM Set Numbers
property to specify the desired RPM set or sets in the
supported format (1, 2, 5-10). These values correspond to the
number of Number of Steps property defined in the Step
Controls category of the Analysis Settings object.

RPM Selection

This property provides a drop-down list of available RPM values

included in the RPM-based source file. If you set the Mapped Data
property to To Binary File, the values available from this property
are based on the setting of the Specify RPM property.

Source Frequency

Specify the source frequencies used for mapping. Options include:

• All (default): The application processes all frequency values

in the solution.

• Range: Specify a range of frequency values. Selecting this

option displays a Minimum and Maximum property you use
to define a minimum and a maximum value for the frequency
range for the solution.

• Worksheet: The application processes all of the frequency

values of the Data View worksheet. You can change
worksheet content as desired.

• By Order: This option displays the Order Numbers property.

Use the Order Numbers property to enter one or more order
numbers in the supported format (1, 2, 5-10). The application
processes the source frequencies with respect to the
order-based frequencies using the following calculation:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Imported Load (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Order Frequency = (Order x RPM)/60

Submodeling Type

Read-only indicating 3D to 3D or 2D to 3D.

Transfer Key

See the Submodeling section of the Special Analysis documentation,

based on how you have your systems linked.

Source Time

See the Imported Boundary Conditions section of the Mechanical

User's Guide.

For properties associated with data transfer, such as Mapping Controls, Rigid Transformation properties,
Graphics and Legend Controls and Named Selection Creation, see the Data Transfer Mesh Mapping
for details about the associated properties.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), and valid load type objects.

Insertion Methods
• If you are importing load data from an upstream system, the application automatically places the
object beneath the analysis Environment object.

• If you wish to import load data from a result file, insert the object using the Imported Load menu
of the option on the Environment Context tab. You can also use the context (right-click) menu option
available from the Environment object or from within the Geometry window to insert imported
load data. Menu options include:

– MAPDL Result File

– Fluids Results File

– External Data

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [Imported Load Type based on analysis]

• Import Load

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Refresh Imported Load (Imported Load object only)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

• Group Similar Objects

Child load objects include the above options as well as the option Export > Export Text File.

API Reference
See the Imported Load Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Imported Boundary Conditions

• Load Mapping Workflow Specification

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Material Fields (Group)
Contains all of the Imported Material Field objects used to import the initial user-defined field variable
values from External Data and map to the mesh. These user-defined Field Variable, are created in the
Engineering Data workspace.

Object
Properties (p. 369)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 370)

Insertion
Methods (p. 370)

Right-click
Options (p. 370)

API
Reference (p. 370)

Additional
Related
Informations (p. 370)

Object Properties
The Details pane properties for the Imported Material Fields object folder include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
Imported Material Fields (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type

A read-only description of the object type: Imported Data.

Interpolation Type

A read-only description of the Interpolation Type property.

Suppressed

Include or exclude the object in your analysis (Yes or No).

Source

Read-only display of the External Data source system.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), and Imported Material
Field (p. 373) objects.

Insertion Methods
This object appears automatically when you have a properly specified Material Field Data in an External
Data system linked to the Mechanical Model cell on the Workbench Project Schematic.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Material Field

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Imported Load Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Importing Material Fields Application

• Imported Material Field (p. 373)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• External Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Material Field
Imports the initial user-defined field variable values from External Data and map to the mesh. These
user-defined Field Variable, are created in the Engineering Data workspace.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
Imported Material Field

Object
Properties (p. 375)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 377)

Insertion
Methods (p. 377)

Right-click
Options (p. 378)

API
Reference (p. 378)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 378)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include, but are not limited to, the properties listed below.
See Appendix B. Data Transfer Mesh Mapping for additional information about other categories and
settings for the Imported Material Field object.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry

Displayed when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection

(default). Displays the type of geometry and the number of geometric
entities to which the object has been applied using the selection tools.
Use the selection filter to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field, then
click Apply.

Named Selection

Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection. This field
provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named Selections.

Definition Type

A read-only property that describes the object: Imported Material Field.

Apply To

Options include Elements (default) and Corner Nodes. This property specifies
whether the external values are mapped to all the nodes of the elements of
the mesh or to the corner nodes only.

Suppressed

Suppress the object as desired.

Graphics Display Material Field

Controls
When you have more than one material field variable specified in the
worksheet, this option enables you to select the variable you wish to
display.

Display Source Points

Toggle display of source point data. Options include Off (default) and On.

Display Source Point Ids

Toggle display of source point data identifiers. Options include Off (default)
and On.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Imported Material Field

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Display Interior Source Point

Toggle display of internal source point data. Options include Off (default)
and On.

Settings Mapping Control

Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual.

Mapping

A read-only property that describes the setting: Profile Preserving.

Weighting

Select the type of weighting to be performed. This option can be changed

only if the Mapping Control property is set to Manual. The default setting
is Triangulation.

Transfer Type

A read-only property that describes the setting: Volumetric.

Rigid Mesh Alignment

Transformation
Provides a drop-down menu that includes the options Use Origin and
Euler Angles and Use Coordinate Systems.

Origin XYZ and Theta XY/YZ/ZX

These properties display when the Mesh Alignment property is set to

Use Origin and Euler Angles. You use these properties to change the
source point coordinate locations.

Source/Target Coordinate System

These properties display when the Mesh Alignment is set to Use

Coordinate System.

Legend Legend Range

Controls
Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual.

Minimum

Displays when the Legend Range property is set to Manual. The default
setting is Program Controlled. Select the field to make a manual entry.

Maximum

Displays when the Legend Range property is set to Manual. The default
setting is Program Controlled. Select the field to make a manual entry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Minimum Source

A read-only property that describes the setting: Program Controlled.

Maximum Source

A read-only property that describes the setting: Program Controlled.

Named The following properties enable you to create Named Selections for Mapped,
Selection Unmapped, and Outside elements identified during the mapping process.
Creation
Unmapped Nodes

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays
the Name property. Rename the default as desired.

Mapped Nodes

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays
the Name property. Rename the default as desired.

Outside Nodes

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays
the Name property. Rename the default as desired.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Imported Material Fields group.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283) objects.

Insertion Methods
This object appears automatically as a child object of the Imported Material Field (p. 373) group when
you have a properly specified Material Field Data in an External Data system linked to the Mechanical
Model cell on the Workbench Project page.

To add additional Imported Material Field objects after highlighting the Imported Material Fields
group object:

• Select the Imported Material Field option on the Imported Material Fields Context tab.

• Right-click theImported Material Fields folder and then select Insert > Material Field.

• Select the Imported Material Fields folder and then in the Geometry window, select geometry,
then right-click and select Insert > Material Field.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 377
Imported Material Field

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Export > Export Text File

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Imported Material Field section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Importing Material Fields

• Imported Material Fields Group (p. 369) object

• External Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
378 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Plies
Provides ply/layer data that has been made available from an external upstream system, such as Ansys
Composite PrepPost.

Object
Properties (p. 379)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 380)

Insertion
Methods (p. 380)

Right-click
Options (p. 380)

API
Reference (p. 381)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 381)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Appears as Imported Plies and is a read-only field.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 379
Imported Plies

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Suppressed: Select Yes to suppress this object.

Note:

The Suppression option is only available when the external system

shares the model with the downstream analysis system.

Material Nonlinear Effects: Select Yes to include the nonlinear effects from the material
properties. The reference temperature specified for the body on which a ply is
defined is used as the reference temperature for the plies.

Thermal Strain Effects: Select Yes to send the coefficient of thermal expansion to
the solver.

Note:

These fields are not supported for an Explicit Dynamics analysis.

Graphic Layer to Display: Provides a slider that enables you to select the Layer of the
Proper- model you wish to display in the Geometry window. The default is setting is All
ties Layers (numerical value = 0). The layer number will correspond to the layer number
used by the Mechanical APDL solver, which may not match the layer number of
the system providing the layered data.

Note:

This property is only available when the external system shares the
model with the downstream analysis system.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Automatically inserted when importing ply/layer data from an external system.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for child objects of an
Imported Plies object include:

• Insert for Environment

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
380 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Reset to ACP Ply Grouping: Restore the original ply structure provided by ACP.

• Create Ply Named Selection: This option creates Worksheet-based Named Selections for all of
the child objects of the ply group.

• Suppress

API Reference
See the External Enhanced Model section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting inform-
ation.

Additional Related Information

• Specifying Surface Body Layered Sections

• Composite Analysis

• Composite Analysis

• Composite Failure Tool

• Analysis Ply (p. 25)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 381
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
382 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Remote Loads
Houses force and moment boundary conditions created by an external analysis, such as Maxwell. The
application automatically creates this object when your harmonic system is linked to an upstream
Maxwell system, or you can create the object manually and import an external Maxwell file. For linked
systems, you can only use these loading conditions during a Harmonic Response analysis. When importing
a Maxwell file, the application supports Coupled Field Harmonic and Harmonic Acoustics analyses in
addition to a Harmonic Response analysis. Use the Imported Remote Loads option available in the
Loads drop-down menu of the Environment tab, to manually insert an object and specify an external
Maxwell file.

Object
Properties (p. 384)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 385)

Insertion
Methods (p. 385)

Right-click
Options (p. 385)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 385)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 383
Imported Remote Loads

Object Properties
The Details view properties for the Imported Remote Loads object folder include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include:

• Geometry Selection (default): Indicates that the boundary condition is applied to a

geometry or geometries that are chosen using graphical selection tools.

Geometry: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection. Displays
the type of geometry (Body, Face, etc.) and the number of geometric entities (for
example: 1 Body, 2 Edges) to which the boundary has been applied using the selection
tools.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is defined by a Named Selection.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection. This
field provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named Selections.

Defin- Transfer File: Only available when you manually select the Imported Remote Loads
i- option from the Environment tab. You use this property to import Remote Force and
tion Remote Moment boundary conditions an external Maxwell file. Select the property's field
to display an import dialog.

Solution: Provides a drop-down list of the available solutions that were generated in the
upstream application. When multiple solutions are available, your selection defines which
solution data is applied to the imported load.

Grouping: This property specifies that the loads are grouped by scoping location. That is,
one load per location for all RPMs instead of one load per location and RPM. Options for
this property include No (default) and By Location. If you group remote loads, use the
RPM Selection property of the individual loads to view the imported load data for each
RPM step, presented in the Tabular Data window.

Data Type: This property enables you to select which remote loads to import. Options for
this property include Forces and Moments, Forces Only, and Moments Only.

Remote Points: Using this property, you select whether or not to display Remote Points
as objects in the Outline pane. Options include Internal (default) and Globally Available.
The Globally Available setting makes the Remote Points available in the Outline.

On Data Refresh: Available only when the Remote Points property is set to Globally
Available. Its options include:

• Reuse Remote Points: This is the default setting. This option reuses the previously
added remote points and only updates the scoping and location, if necessary.

• Regenerate Remote Points: Deletes the remote points that were created during
the previous import and adds new remote points when the data is imported.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
384 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Number Of Frequencies to Consider: With this property, you can specify the number of
Maxwell frequencies to use in the analysis. The application automatically includes the first
frequency, by default, and up to the value you specify.

Import Status: Read-only property that displays the status of the import. Status conditions
include the following:

• Data Unavailable: No data is available to perform the import.

• Obsolete: The data is available to be imported, but no data has been imported or
the data is obsolete and should be re-imported.

• Update: All data has been imported.

• Import Failed: An error occurred during the import process and no data was
imported

Suppressed: The default value is No.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Environment (Group) (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: The automatically generated groups of remote forces and moments.

Insertion Methods
• This object displays by default when you link an upstream Maxwell system to a Harmonic Response
analysis in the Workbench Project Schematic.

Or...

• Right-click the environment object and select Insert > Imported Remote Loads.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Imported Remote Loads

• Generate Remote Loads

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Go to Objects in Worksheet

Additional Related Information

See the Importing Forces and Moments section for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
386 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Thickness (Group)
Specifies the shell thickness data imported from external files. You import thickness data into Mechan-
ical by:

• Linking the Model cell of a supported system to the Setup cell of an upstream External Data
system in the Project Schematic and opening the Mechanical from Workbench. Once open, the
application automatically inserts an Imported Thickness folder in the Outline as well as an
Imported Thickness child object. See the steps in the Importing Data section of the External
Data System documentation for the steps to configure your systems in Workbench.

• Use the Imported Thickness option of the Geometry object context toolbar in Mechanical. This
option is also available from the context (right-click) menu option Insert of the Geometry object
as well as the context menu of the geometry window. When selected, the application automat-
ically inserts an Imported Thickness folder in the Outline as well as an Imported Thickness
object.

For a 3D analysis, imported data is specified as shell thickness. For a 2D analysis, it is defined as a plane
element thickness. Plane element thicknesses are calculated as an average value from nodal thickness
values and it is input as a real constant for the element.

Object Properties (p. 388)

Tree Dependencies (p. 388)

Insertion Methods (p. 388)

Right-click Options (p. 388)

API Reference (p. 389)

Additional Related
Information (p. 389)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 387
Imported Thickness (Group)

Object Properties
The Details pane for the Imported Thickness folder includes the following properties .

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type

A read-only type description with the entry: Imported Data.

Interpolation Type

Read-only field with the entry: External File.

Suppressed

Controls whether the Imported Thickness characteristics are

considered in the solving of the simulation.

Source

Read-only property that describes the upstream data source. If you

import data from an upstream External Data system in Workbench,
the entry indicates the corresponding cell of the system, such as
A2::Setup1. If you Import Data into Mechanical, the entry is set to
External Data.

Data Management Delete Mapped Data Files: Deletes the files generated by the
application during the mapping process. Options include Yes and No
(default).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), and Imported Thickness (p. 391) objects.

Insertion Methods
• Automatically generated from Workbench configured systems.

• Select the Geometry object and select the Imported Thickness option from the Shells group on
the Geometry Context Tab. You can also right-click the Geometry object, or within the Geometry
window, and select Insert > Imported Thickness.

• Created through a link to an upstream Polyflow system.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Thickness

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
388 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Import Thickness: Import the data.

• Edit: If you have already selected a file, this option re-opens the External Data dialog enabling
you to modify the imported object's details.

• Reload: Reloads data from the source file(s).

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Imported Load Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• External Data

• Polyflow to Mechanical Data Transfer

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 389
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
390 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Thickness
Imports shell thickness data from external files. You import thickness data into Mechanical by:

• Linking the Model cell of a supported system to the Setup cell of an upstream External Data
system in the Project Schematic and opening the Mechanical from Workbench. Once open, the
application automatically inserts an Imported Thickness folder in the Outline as well as an
Imported Thickness child object. See the steps in the Importing Data section of the External
Data System documentation for the steps to configure your systems in Workbench.

• Using the Imported Thickness option of the Geometry object context toolbar in Mechanical.
This option is also available from the context (right-click) menu option Insert of the Geometry
object as well as the context menu of the geometry window. When selected, the application
automatically inserts an Imported Thickness folder in the Outline as well as an Imported
Thickness object.

Solver Notes:

• For the Mechanical APDL solver, thickness on 3D shells is represented at the nodal level via the
SECFUNCTION command. For 2D plane stress, thicknesses are calculated as an average value
from the element's nodal thickness values and it is input as a real constant for the element.

• For the Explicit Dynamics solver the element's nodal thicknesses are converted to an average
element thickness.

• For the LS-DYNA solver, thicknesses are applied to the nodes. This is also true for 2D analyses.

Applies to: Imported Thickness object folder and all thickness child objects under the folder.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391
Imported Thickness

Object
Properties (p. 393)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 393)

Insertion
Methods (p. 393)

Right-click
Options (p. 394)

API
Reference (p. 394)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 394)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
392 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The common Details properties are listed below. Additional properties may be included. See the Ap-
pendix B. Data Transfer Mesh Mapping section for additional information about other categories, such
as Settings, Graphics Controls, etc.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection or Named
Selection.

Geometry: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geo-
metry field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection. Specify a desired Named Selection from the drop-down
list.
Definition Type: Read-only field that describes the object - Imported Thickness.

Suppressed: Select Yes to suppress Imported Thickness.

External Data Identifier: Choose the appropriate data identifier which

represents the thickness data from the file.

Scale: The amount by which the imported thickness values are scaled
before being used for display or solution.

Offset: An offset that is added to the imported thickness values

before being used for display or solution.

Shell Offset: Enter an offset value as desired.

Advanced Unmapped Data Value: You can specify a thickness value for the
unmapped target nodes using the Unmapped Data Value property.
By default, a zero thickness value is assigned to the unmapped nodes.
For the Ansys solver, the thickness value at each node must be
greater than zero. See External Data in the Mechanical User's Guide
for details.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Imported Thickness (p. 387) group.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Automatically generated from Workbench configured systems.

• Select the Geometry object and select the Imported Thickness option from the Shells group on
the Geometry Context Tab. You can also right-click the Geometry object, or within the Geometry
window, and select Insert > Imported Thickness.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 393
Imported Thickness

• Right-click the Imported Thickness group object and select Insert > Thickness.

• Select the Imported Thickness group folder and then select the Thickness option on the Imported
Fields Context tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Search Faces with Multiple Thicknesses

API Reference
See the Imported Thickness section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• External Data

• Specifying Surface Body Thickness

• Variable Data

• Polyflow to Mechanical Data Transfer

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
394 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Trace (Group)
Includes the imported metal traces from a Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs) 3D Layout design to model the
effects of metal traces in PCBs. You can add additional valid traces to this folder.

Object Properties (p. 395)

Tree Dependencies (p. 396)

Insertion Methods (p. 396)

Right-click Options (p. 396)

API Reference (p. 396)

Additional Related
Information (p. 397)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for the Imported Trace group object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 395
Imported Trace (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Defini- Type
tion
A read-only property that describes the object - Imported Data.

Interpolation Type

A read-only description of the Interpolation Type property.

Suppressed

Suppress the object as desired.

Source

The source system.

Data Delete Mapped Data Files: Options include Yes and No (default).
Manage-
ment

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Imported Trace, Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), and
Imported Trace objects.

Insertion Methods
Appears by default when you import Trace Mapping through an External Data system.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Trace

• Import Trace

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Clear Generated Data

• Group Similar Objects

API Reference
See the Imported Load Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
396 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the ECAD Analysis using Trace Mapping section for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 397
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
398 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Trace
Manages the complexities of Printed Circuit Boards (PCBs), significantly reducing the time needed to
generate a geometry and mesh.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 399
Imported Trace

Object
Properties (p. 401)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 403)

Insertion
Methods (p. 404)

Right-click
Options (p. 404)

API
Reference (p. 404)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 404)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
400 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details pane for the Imported Trace object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry

Displayed when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection (default).

Displays the type of geometry and the number of bodies to which the object has
been applied using the selection tools. Use the selection filter to pick geometry,
click in the Geometry field, then click Apply.

Named Selection

Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection. This field provides
a drop-down list of available user-defined Named Selections.

Defin- Type
i-
tion A read-only property that describes the object : Imported Trace.

Suppressed

Suppress the object as desired (Yes/No).

External Data Identifier

Once you have imported data from Workbench using an External Data, this property
provides a drop-down list of available ECAD files from the files specified in the external
system. Once you import External Data directly into Mechanical, this property displays
a unique identifier for the external file, such as File1.

Shell Offset (Shells Only)

Set the desired shell offset.

Graph- Layer
ics
Con- This property is available for Surface bodies only. It enables you to view the metal
trols fraction data from that layer on the mesh.

Component

Options include Average (default), X Component, Z Component, and Z

Component.

Display Source Points

Toggle display of source point data. Options include Off (default) and On.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 401
Imported Trace

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Set- Mapping Control
tings
Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual. See the Data Transfer
Mesh Mapping section for additional information.

Mapping

A read-only property that describes the setting - Profile Preserving

Weighting

A read-only property that describes the setting - Shape Function

Interpolation

Options include Nondirectional (default) and Directional. The Nondirectional

option calculates effective conductivity by averaging the trace data in each
element. Using the Directional option, the application calculates the effective
orthotropic conductivity for each element using the position and values of the
trace data within each element.

Transfer Type

A read-only property that describes the setting - Volumetric

Ri- Mesh Alignment

gid
Trans- Provides a drop-down menu that includes the options Use Origin and Euler
form- Angles and Use Coordinate Systems.
a-
tion Origin X/Y/Z and Theta XY/YZ/ZX

Display when the Mesh Alignment property is set to Use Origin and Euler
Angles. You use these properties to change the source point coordinate locations.

Source/Target Coordinate System

Display when the Mesh Alignment is set to Use Coordinate System.

See the Rigid Transformation topic in the Data Transfer Mesh Mapping section of the
Mechanical User's Guide for more information about the use of these properties.
Le- Legend Range
gend
Con- Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual.
trols
Minimum

Displays when the Legend Range property is set to Manual. The default setting
is Program Controlled. Select the field to make a manual entry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
402 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Maximum

Displays when the Legend Range property is set to Manual. The default setting
is Program Controlled. Select the field to make a manual entry.

Named The following properties enable you to create Named Selections for Mapped, Unmapped,
Se- and Outside elements identified during the mapping process.
lec-
tion Unmapped Elements
Cre-
ation Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays the Name
property. Rename the default as desired.

Mapped Elements

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays the Name
property. Rename the default as desired.

Outside Elements

Options include Off (default) and On. Selecting the On option displays the Name
property. Rename the default as desired.

Ma- Modeling
ter-
ial Options include Average (default) and Black/White. Black/White material
modeling assigns the Trace material to elements with Average Metal Fraction >
0.5 and Dielectric Material to elements with Average Metal Fraction <= 0.5, whereas
the Average option calculates material properties as a function of Metal Fraction.
See the Trace Analysis section for additional details.

Dis- Use these properties to you specify the grid density count to create the trace metal
cret- distribution of the board. The grid density count is 200 x 200 by default. Depending on
iz- the trace resolution and the computational costs desired, you can change the values for
a- the rows and columns to receive optimum results.
tion
• X-Discretization

• Y-Discretization

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Imported Trace folder object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 403
Imported Trace

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Trace Coordinate System, Imported Data Transfer Summary (p. 405),
Validation (p. 781), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283) objects.

Note:

The Trace Coordinate System is a system generated read-only coordinate system object.
The location of this coordinate system is a combination of the transformation defined in
the External Data system and the transformation defined by the Details pane properties
of the Rigid Transformation category for this object.

Insertion Methods
• Appears by default when a Mechanical Model cell is connected to an External Data system.

• Right-click the Imported Trace group object and select Insert > Trace.

• When the Imported Trace group folder is selected, select the Trace option on the Imported Fields
Context tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Validation

• Export > Export Text File

• Suppress

• Create Material Plot (p. 465)

• Clear Generated Data

• Group Similar Objects

API Reference
See the Imported Trace section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• ECAD Analysis using Trace Mapping

• Imported Trace Folder (p. 395)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
404 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Imported Data/Load Transfer Summary
Summarizes mapped source data as compared to target data for imported load and/or data objects.
Common data includes source/target element count, number of mapped nodes, and the percentage
of correctly mapped nodes. Data information differs based on the type of source data, thickness, element
orientation, trace metal fractions, etc.

The labeling of the object is also dependent upon the imported data type:

• Imported Data Transfer Summary: Imported Thickness (p. 391), Imported Trace (p. 399), Imported
Material Field (p. 373).

• Imported Load Transfer Summary: All other imported objects, such as Imported Load (p. 359)
objects and Imported Element Orientation (p. 353) objects.

Object Properties (p. 406)

Tree Dependencies (p. 406)

Insertion Methods (p. 406)

Right-click Options (p. 406)

Additional Related
Information (p. 406)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 405
Imported Data/Load Transfer Summary

Object Properties
The Details pane for this object contains only one category (Author) and one text entry field (Name).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Imported Element Orientation (p. 353), Various Imported Load
Types (p. 359), Imported Thickness (p. 391), or Imported Trace (p. 399) objects.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No reassociated child objects.

Insertion Methods
This is a system generated object created during the import process.

Right-click Options
This object includes only common right-click options (p. 2).

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information about this object.

• Trace Mapping in Mechanical

• Imported Body Force Density

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
406 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Initial Conditions
Houses initial condition objects for use in a Transient Structural Analysis (Velocity (p. 785) only) or an
Explicit Dynamics analysis (Velocity (p. 785) and Angular Velocity and Drop Height (p. 193)) (p. 29).

Initial Conditions Object for Explicit Dynamics Tree

Dependencies (p. 408)

Insertion
Methods (p. 408)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 408)

Initial Conditions Object for Transient

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 407
Initial Conditions

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Transient Structural [for Velocity only], or Explicit Dynamics environ-
ment (p. 211) object [for either Velocity or Angular Velocity].

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Angular Velocity (p. 29) (Explicit Dynamics object only), Comment (p. 97),
Drop Height (p. 193) (Explicit Dynamics object only), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Pre-Stress (p. 611)
(Explicit Dynamics object only), and Velocity (p. 785).

Insertion Methods
Appears by default for a Transient Structural analysis or an explicit dynamics analysis.

Additional Related Information

• Define Initial Conditions

• Transient Structural Analysis

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis Guide

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
408 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Initial Physics Options
Specifies the initial temperature and reference temperature of the parts/bodies specified as either
Thermal or Structural (using the Physics Region object (p. 585)) during a Coupled Field Static or Coupled
Field Transient analysis. For the thermal field, you specify an Initial Temperature as either Uniform or
Non-Uniform (Transient only and currently a beta option). For the structural field, you specify a Reference
Temperature.

Object Properties (p. 409)

Tree Dependencies (p. 410)

Insertion Methods (p. 410)

Right-click Options (p. 410)

API Reference (p. 410)

Additional Related
Information (p. 410)

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following:

Category Properties/Options/Description
Thermal Settings Initial Temperature: For a Coupled Field Static analysis, this is a
read-only property set to Uniform Temperature. For a Coupled Field
Transient analysis, you can specify this property as either a Uniform
Temperature or a Non-Uniform Temperature (beta).

Initial Temperature Value: This is the Uniform Temperature value.

The default value is 22° C (or 71.6° F).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 409
Initial Physics Options

Category Properties/Options/Description
Structural Settings Reference Temperature: Specifies the Reference Temperature of the
Static Structural portion of the analysis. The default value is 22° C (or
71.6° F).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Coupled Field Static and Coupled Field Transient.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: This object does not support any child objects.

Insertion Methods
Appears by default for Coupled Field Static and Coupled Field Transient analyses.

Right-click Options
Relevant right-click options for this object are in the common right-click options (p. 2) list.

API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Coupled Field Static

• Coupled Field Transient

• Coupled Field Analysis Types

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
410 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Initial Temperature
Defines an initial temperature or an initial temperature distribution for use in a Steady-State Thermal
or Transient Thermal analysis.

Initial Temperature Object for Steady-State Thermal Object

Properties (p. 412)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 412)

Insertion
Methods (p. 413)

Right-click
Options (p. 413)

API
Reference (p. 413)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 413)

Initial Temperature Object for Transient Thermal

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 411
Initial Temperature

Object Properties
The Details pane for this for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Initial Temperature: For a Steady-State Thermal analysis, this property is read-only
and is set to Uniform Temperature. For a Transient Thermal analysis, the options
include Uniform Temperature (default) or Non-Uniform Temperature.

Initial Temperature Value: Displays when you set the Initial Temperature property
to Uniform Temperature. The default value is 22° C (or 71.6° F).

Initial Temperature Environment: You use this property to specify the upstream
thermal analysis you wish to link to current analysis. The application uses the
temperature result from the selected thermal analysis in current analysis as the
initial temperature.

Time: Displays when you set the Initial Temperature property to Non-Uniform
Temperature. Enter the time from the selected thermal analysis that you want to
use as the starting point to begin your current thermal analysis. The default value
is End Time.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Steady-State Thermal or Transient Thermal analysis environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
412 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Appears by default for a steady-state thermal analysis or a transient thermal analysis.

Right-click Options
Relevant right-click options for this object are in the common right-click options (p. 2) list.

API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Define Initial Conditions

• Steady-State Thermal Analysis

• Transient Thermal Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 413
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
414 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Interface Delamination
Simulates the separation of two materials across an interface.

Object
Properties (p. 415)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 417)

Insertion
Methods (p. 417)

Right-click
Options (p. 418)

API
Reference (p. 418)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 418)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 415
Interface Delamination

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only field that describes the object - Interface
Delamination.

Method: Specifies the formulation used to introduce the fracture

mechanism, either Virtual Crack Closure Technique (VCCT - default)
or Cohesive Zone Material (CZM).

Failure Criteria Option: Options include:

• Energy-Release rate: Displays when VCCT is the specified

as Method. It requires you to specify a Critical Rate value.
This value determines the energy release rate in one direction.

• Material Data Table: Displays when VCCT is the specified

as Method. This property defines the energy release rate in
all three fracture modes. It provides a fly-out menu for Mater-
ial selection or specification. Material definitions are created
in Engineering Data.

Material: Displays when CZM is the specified as Method. It provides

a fly-out menu for Material selection or specification. Material
definitions are created in Engineering Data.

Suppressed: Excludes the object in the analysis.

Scope Initial Crack: Displays when VCCT is specified as Method. Select a
user-defined Pre-Meshed Crack (p. 607).

Generation Method: Specify as either Matched Meshing or Node

Matching. If interface layers imported from Ansys Composite
PrepPost (ACP) application are available, a third option, Pre-Gener-
ated Interface is also available. This property is automatically set to
Pre-Generated Interface for Interface Delamination objects
automatically generated during the import process for the interface
layers.

Scoping Method: Displayed when Node Matching is specified as

the Generation Method. Options include Geometry Selection
(default) and Named Selection. Specifies that the Source and Target
properties are defined using the graphical selection tools or that the
geometry is defined by from a drop-down list of available
user–defined Named Selections. This option assumes that the existing
mesh is already matched.

Source: Displayed when Node Matching is specified as the Gener-

ation Method. Specify the face on the model that will be the source.

Target: Displayed when Node Matching is specified as the Genera-

tion Method. Specify the face on the model that will be the target.

Match Control: Displayed when Matched Meshing is specified as

the Generation Method. The Match Control property references a

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
416 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
pre-defined Mesh Match Control. The pre-defined Match Control
requires two independent parts that have the same (brick)
element/node pattern.

Interface (ACP Only): Only available when you create your composite
geometry in the ACP application. Select the appropriate Interface
Layer from the provided drop-down menu.
Step Controls for Displays when VCCT is specified as Method. It provides the following
Crack Growth properties. If Auto Time Stepping is set to Manual the time step
properties can be modified, otherwise they are read-only.

Auto Time Stepping: Options include Program Controlled (default)

or Manual.

Initial Time Step: Initial time step when crack growth initiates.

Minimum Time Step: Minimum time step for subsequent crack

growth.

Maximum Time Step: Maximum time step for subsequent crack

growth.
Node Matching Displays when Node Matching is specified as Generation Method.
Tolerance It provides the following properties.

Tolerance Type: Options include Program Controlled (default) or

Manual.

Distance Tolerance: Can be modified when the Tolerance Type is

set to Manual, otherwise it is read-only - that is, the value is defined
by the application. Node matching requires that each node has a
corresponding mate (Source and Target). This tolerance value defines
the search radius for determining the matching between Source and
Target nodes.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Fracture object:

• Click the Interface Delamination option on the Fracture Context Tab.

• Right-click the Fracture (p. 243) object, Interface Delamination object, or Contact Debond-
ing (p. 145) object and select Insert > Interface Delamination.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 417
Interface Delamination

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Interface Delamination

– Contact Debonding

– SMART Crack Growth

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Interface Delamination section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Interface Delamination and Contact Debonding

• Fracture Analysis

• Crack

• Pre-Meshed Crack

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
418 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Interstage
Connects the faces of the cyclically symmetric bodies specified by two different Stage (p. 731) objects
in a Multiple Cyclic Symmetry simulation.

Object Properties (p. 419)

Tree Dependencies (p. 420)

Insertion Methods (p. 420)

Right-click Options (p. 420)

API Reference (p. 421)

Additional Related
Information (p. 421)

Object Properties
The Details pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419
Interstage

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Select how you want to scope the connection, using either a
Geometry Selection (default) or a Named Selection.

Source (Face selection only): Select the face or faces of the bodies included in the
Stage you wish to define as the Source side of the connection.

Target (Face selection only): Select the face or faces of the bodies included in the
Stage you wish to define as the Target side of the connection.

Contact Bodies: Read-only property that displays the name (from Geometry object)
of the part included in the Source side of the connection. If more than one part
or body is selected, the field displays the value Multiple.

Target Bodies: Read-only property that displays the name (from Geometry object)
of the part included in the Target side of the connection. If more than one part
or body is selected, the field displays the value Multiple.
Definition Suppressed: Options include Yes or No (default). It removes (and re-includes) the
object from analysis processes.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Object: Connection Group (p. 133).

• Valid Child Objects: Figure (p. 241) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Connections folder or any child object of the folder and:

• Select the Interstage option from the Connect group of the Connections Context tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Interstage.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Interstage.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Connection Group (p. 133)

Manual Contact Region (p. 147)

– Spot Welds

– Interstage

– Joint

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
420 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Spring

– Bearing (p. 49)

– Beam

– AM Bond (p. 17)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Contact/Target

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

API Reference
See the Stage section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Multistage Cyclic Symmetry Analysis Guide

• Multistage Cyclic Symmetry Analysis

• Stage (p. 731)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 421
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
422 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Joint
Defines conditions for reference and mobile pairs that make up a joint. Several Joint objects can appear
as child objects under a Connection Group (p. 133) object. The Connection Group object name auto-
matically changes to Joints.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 423
Joint

Object
Properties (p. 424)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 434)

Insertion
Methods (p. 434)

Right-click
Options (p. 434)

API
Reference (p. 435)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 435)

Object Properties
The Details View for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
424 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property Name and Description
Definition Connection Type

The Connection Type property specifies the joint as either a Body-Body

scoping (multiple faces) or a Body-Ground scoping (multiple faces). When
defined as Body-Body, you need to define Reference category and Mobile
category properties. When you specify the Connection Type as
body-to-ground, the application assumes that the reference element of the
joint is grounded (fixed).

Type

The Type property provides a drop-down list of joint type options. See the
Specifying Remote Points section for descriptions of each type.

Note:

The General joint enables you to specify each degree of freedom

as being either Fixed or Free.

Formulation

You use this property to specify a desired element type for the Bushing Joint.
The options for this property include MPC (Multi-Point Constraint) and
Bushing. These options enable you to specify the underlying element type
for the Bushing Joint. The MPC option uses the MPC184 element and the
Bushing option uses the COMBI250 element.

Important:

The Bushing option is only supported for the following

analysis types:

• All Substructure analyses when the Joint as included

in the Condensed Part.

• Modal and Harmonic Response.

• Static Structural when you active Beta Options.

When you specify the Bushing option, the Element Coordinate System
property also displays. As needed, specify a user-defined coordinate system.
The default setting for this property is Global Coordinate System.

Important:

When you set the Formulation property to Bushing:

• The Element Coordinate System is the first coordinate

system used to apply rotation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 425
Joint

Category Property Name and Description

• This is followed by nodal rotations per promoted Remote

Points (Reference or Mobile), such as the NROTAT
command that rotates nodal coordinate systems into the
active system. In addition, rotations from these remote
points modify the element matrix (see the Input Data topic
of the COMBI250 element reference).

• This is then followed by the normal processing sequence

for rotations.

Here is an example of Element Coordinate System annotations

("rings" about each axis), prior to and after rotation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
426 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property Name and Description

Solver Element Type (MAPDL Solver Only)

The Solver Element Type property enables you to specify the type of element
to use in a fixed joint. Options include:

• Program Controlled (default): When selected, an Mechanical APDL

joint element is used unless a rigid body exists in the model.

• Joint Element: this selection uses the MPC184 element. This option
enables you to use the Joint probe. In addition, this option may allow
you to experience convergence improvements if you are attaching a
shell or line body to a node or vertex.

• Contact/Direct: this selection uses the TARGE170 element for

Body-Body joints and a DOF constraint for Body-Ground joints. This
option helps to avoid solver pivoting as well as MPC overconstraint.

Torsional Stiffness

The Torsional Stiffness property defines the measure of the resistance of a

shaft to a twisting or torsional force. You can add torsional stiffness only for
cylindrical and revolute joints.

Torsional Damping

The Torsional Damping property defines the measure of resistance to the

angular vibration to a shaft or body along its axis of rotation. You can add
torsional damping only for cylindrical and revolute joints.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 427
Joint

Category Property Name and Description

Suppressed

Includes or excludes the joint object in the analysis.

Element APDL Name

This optional property enables you to manually define an APDL parameter

(in the input file) and assign its value to the element of the Joint. This
facilitates easy programmatic identification of the Joint's element for later
use/reference in a Commands object.

Reference Scoping Method

This property enables you to choose to scope using a Geometry Selection

(default), Named Selection, or a user-defined Remote Point.

Note:

If you scope a joint to a user-defined Remote Point, it is required

that the remote point be located at the origin (0.0, 0.0, 0.0) of the
Reference Coordinate System of the remote point.

Applied By

This property specifies the joint as a Remote Attachment (default) or a Direct

Attachment. The Remote Attachment option uses either a user-defined or
a system-generated Remote Point as a scoping mechanism. Remote
Attachment is the required Applied By property setting if the geometry
scoping is to a single face or multiple faces, a single edge or multiple edges,
or multiple vertices. The Direct Attachment option enables you to scope
directly to a single vertex (Geometry) or a node (using an individually selected
node or a node-based Named Selection) for flexible bodies (only) on your
model. Direct Attachment is not allowed if scoped to solid bodies, as they
do not have rotational degrees of freedom.

Note:

Direct Attachment is not allowed for the Explicit Dynamics solver.

Scope (or Reference Component or Remote Point)

Based on the selected Scoping Method, this property displays as either "
Scope ", " Reference Component ", or " Remote Points ".

When Geometry Selection is selected as the Scoping Method, this property

displays with the label " Scope " and enables you to define the geometry to
which the joint is applied. Once a geometry is selected, click in the Scope
field and then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
428 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property Name and Description
When Named Selection is selected as the Scoping Method, this property
provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named Selections.

When Remote Point is selected as the Scoping Method, this property displays
with the label " Remote Points ". This property provides a drop-down list of
available user-defined Remote Points. This property is not available when the
Applied By property is specified as Direct Attachment.

Body

This read-only property displays the corresponding part/geometry name.

Coordinate System

The scoping of a joint must be accompanied by the definition of a joint

coordinate system. This coordinate system defines the location of the joint.
It is imperative that the joint coordinate system be fully associative with the
geometry, otherwise, the coordinate system could move in unexpected ways
when the Configure tool is used to define the initial position of the joint (see
the Applying Joints section). A warning message is issued if you attempt to
use the Configure tool with a joint whose coordinate system is not fully
associative.

Under the Reference category, the Coordinate System property provides a

default Reference Coordinate System. This coordinate system accompanies
a joint when the joint is added to the tree. This applies for joints whose
Connection Type is either Body-Ground or Body-Body. When a joint is
added, an associated coordinate system is automatically generated at a
location based on the selected geometry (face, edge, or vertex). You can
modify the Reference Coordinate System’s orientation axis by modifying the
details of the Reference Coordinate System object contained in the joint
object.

Additional information about Modifying Joint Coordinate Systems is also

available, including the following topics:

• Modify Coordinate System Geometry Scoping

• Change Coordinate System Orientation

Scoping a joint directly to a vertex or a node using the Direct Attachment

option fixes the coordinate system to that location. Note that the Reference
Coordinate System property displays automatically and is read-only.

Behavior

For remote attachments, use the Behavior property to specify the scoped
geometry as either Rigid, Deformable, or Beam. If the Scope Method
property of the Joint is set to Remote Point, the Joint will then assume the
Behavior defined in the referenced Remote Point as well as other related
properties. Refer to the Geometry Behaviors section for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429
Joint

Category Property Name and Description

Formulation

When the Behavior property is set to either Rigid or Deformable, you use
this property to specify the contact algorithm used for a particular reference
computation. If you set the Scope Method property to Remote Point, the
Joint uses the Formulation defined for the Remote Point. Property options
include:

• MPC (default): This option creates multipoint constraint equations

internally during the Mechanical APDL solution to tie the bodies
together.

• Lagrange Multiplier: This option enforces zero penetration when the

contact is closed, making use of a Lagrange multiplier on the normal
direction and a penalty method in the tangential direction. This
formulation helps to overcome over-constraint problems better than
the MPC formulation.

For more information, see the Selecting a Contact Algorithm (KEYOPT(2))

topic in the Mechanical APDL Contact Technology Guide.

Relaxation Method

This property is only available when the Formulation property is set to MPC.
You use this property to eliminate overconstraint present in the joint reference
condition. Property options include No (default) and Yes. If you set the Scope
Method property to Remote Point, the joint uses the setting of the Relaxa-
tion Method property defined for the Remote Point.

For more information, see the Overconstraint Detection and Elimination

section of the Mechanical APDL Contact Technology Guide.

Pinball Region

Use the Pinball Region property to define where the joint attaches to face(s)
if the default location is not desirable. By default, the entire face is tied to the
joint element. This may not be desirable, warranting the input of a Pinball
Region setting, for the following reasons:

• If the scoping is to a topology with a large number of nodes, this can lead
to an inefficient solution in terms of memory and speed.

• Overlap between the joint scoped faces and other displacement type
boundary conditions can lead to over constraint and as a result, solver
failures.

Note:

• The Pinball Region, Behavior, Formulation, and Relaxation

Method settings are applicable to underlying bodies that are
flexible.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
430 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property Name and Description

• If a Joint’s Reference and Mobile category are scoped to

separate Remote Points, the Pinball Region, Behavior, Formula-
tion, and Relaxation Method properties for each category
become read-only and are set to the respective remote points.

• The Pinball Region, Behavior, Formulation and Relaxation

Method properties are not applicable when the Applied By
property is set to Direct Attachment.

Mobile Scoping Method

This property enables you to choose to scope using a Geometry Selection

(default), Named Selection, or a user-defined Remote Point.

Note:

If you scope a joint to a user-defined Remote Point, it is required

that the remote point be located at the origin (0.0, 0.0, 0.0) of the
Reference Coordinate System of the remote point.

Applied By

This property specifies the joint as a Remote Attachment (default) or a Direct

Attachment. The Remote Attachment option uses either a user-defined or
a system-generated Remote Point as a scoping mechanism. Remote
Attachment is the required Applied By property setting if the geometry
scoping is to a single face or multiple faces, a single edge or multiple edges,
or a single vertex or multiple vertices. The Direct Attachment option allows
you to scope directly to a single vertex (Geometry) or a node (using an
individually selected node or a node-based Named Selection) to flexible bodies
(only) on your model. Direct Attachment is not allowed if scoped to solid
bodies, as they do not have rotational degrees of freedom.

Note:

Direct Attachment is not allowed for the Explicit Dynamics solver.

Scope (or Mobile Component or Remote Point)

Based on the selected Scoping Method, this property displays as either "
Scope ", " Mobile Component ", or " Remote Points ".

When Geometry Selection is selected as the Scoping Method, this property

displays with the label " Scope " and enables you to define the geometry to
which the joint is applied. Once a geometry is selected, click in the Scope
field and then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 431
Joint

Category Property Name and Description

When Named Selection is selected as the Scoping Method, provides a
drop-down list of available user-defined Named Selections.

When Remote Point is selected as the Scoping Method, this property displays
with the label " Remote Points ". This property provides a drop-down list of
available user-defined Remote Points. This property is not available when the
Applied By property is specified as Direct Attachment.

Body

This property is available under both the Reference and Mobile categories.
This read-only property displays the corresponding part/geometry name.

Coordinate System

The Mobile category provides the support for the relative motion between
the parts of a joint. A Mobile Coordinate System is automatically defined
but is only displayed in the tree when the Initial Position property is set to
Override.

Scoping a joint directly to a vertex or a node using the Direct Attachment

option fixes the coordinate system to that location. When scoping directly to
a node or vertex using the Direct Attachment option, the default setting for
the Initial Position property is Override even though the Initial Position
property doesn't display in the Details. Rather, the Coordinate System
automatically displays and is read-only.

Note:

For the Mechanical APDL solver, Body-Ground joints use the

Coordinate System defined on the Mobile side if Override is active,
when scoped to a Remote Point, or when using the Direct
Attachment option.

Initial Position

This property applies to remote attachments only (direct attachments fix the
coordinate system). It provides a drop-down list with the options Unchanged
and Override. The Unchanged option indicates the use of the same
coordinate system for the Reference category and the Mobile category and
the Override option causes a Coordinate System property to display in the
Mobile category with the default setting Mobile Coordinate System.

Caution:

If you are scoping a joint to a Remote Point, you cannot scope

the Initial Position setting of a Joint's Mobile category as
Unchanged. This is also true when the Direct Attachment

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
432 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Property Name and Description

option is used because the Initial Position property is not

available (Override is active).

Behavior

For remote attachments, use the Behavior property to specify the scoped
geometry as either Rigid, Deformable, or Beam. If the Scope Method
property of the Joint is set to Remote Point, the Joint will then assume the
Behavior defined in the referenced Remote Point as well as other related
properties. Refer to the Geometry Behaviors section for more information.

Formulation

When the Behavior property is set to either Rigid or Deformable, you use
this property to specify the contact algorithm used for a particular reference
computation. If you set the Scope Method property to Remote Point, the
Joint uses the Formulation defined for the Remote Point. Property options
include:

• MPC (default): This option creates multipoint constraint equations

internally during the Mechanical APDL solution to tie the bodies
together.

• Lagrange Multiplier: This option enforces zero penetration when the

contact is closed, making use of a Lagrange multiplier on the normal
direction and a penalty method in the tangential direction. This
formulation helps to overcome over-constraint problems better than
the MPC formulation.

For more information, see the Selecting a Contact Algorithm (KEYOPT(2))

topic in the Mechanical APDL Contact Technology Guide.

Relaxation Method

This property is only available when the Formulation property is set to MPC.
You use this property to eliminate overconstraint present in the joint mobile
condition. Property options include No (default) and Yes. If you set the Scope
Method property to Remote Point, the joint uses the setting of the Relaxa-
tion Method property defined for the Remote Point.

For more information, see the Overconstraint Detection and Elimination

section of the Mechanical APDL Contact Technology Guide.

Pinball Region

For remote attachments, use the Pinball Region property to define where
the joint attaches to face(s) if the default location is not desirable. By default,
the entire face is tied to the joint element. This may not be desirable,
warranting the input of a Pinball Region setting, for the following reasons:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433
Joint

Category Property Name and Description

• If the scoping is to a topology with a large number of nodes, this can
lead to an inefficient solution in terms of memory and speed.

• Overlap between the joint scoped faces and other displacement type
boundary conditions can lead to over constraint and as a result, solver
failures.

Note:

• The Pinball Region, Behavior, Formulation, and Relaxa-

tion Method properties are not visible when the Applied
By method is Direct Attachment.

• The Pinball Region and Behavior settings are applicable

to underlying bodies that are flexible.

• If a Joint’s Reference and Mobile category are scoped to

separate Remote Points, the Behavior and Pinball Region
properties for each category become read-only and are set
to the respective remote points.

Stops See the Joint Stops and Locks section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connection Group (p. 133).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Coordinate System (p. 161), Figure (p. 241), and Im-
age (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Inserted automatically if joints are defined in the CAD model and you choose Create Automatic
Connections through a right-click click the Connections (or Joints) object.

• Click Body-Ground > {type of joint} or Body-Body > {type of joint} on Connections Context
Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) (or Joints) object or in the Geometry window and select
Insert > Joint.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Disable/Enable Transparency

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
434 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Reference/Mobile

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Go to Connections for Duplicate Pairs - available if connection object shares the same geometries
with other connection objects.

• Promote to Remote Point (Remote Attachment Only)

• Promote to Named Selection

API Reference
See the Joint section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Joints

• Joint Load

• Connections Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
436 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Layered Section
Creates layers (one or more) on a surface body to create a composite. And, for a surface body that in-
cludes multiple faces, you can create layers on each/any face.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 437
Layered Section

Object
Properties (p. 438)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 439)

Insertion
Methods (p. 440)

Right-click
Options (p. 440)

API
Reference (p. 440)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 440)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
438 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geo-
metry field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection.
Definition Coordinate System

Offset Type (this field is not supported for an Explicit Dynamics

analysis)

Membrane Offset: Displays when you set the Offset Type property
to User Defined. Enter an offset value.

Layers: Worksheet is the default and selectable option for this

property that opens the Worksheet for data entry.

Suppressed
Material Nonlinear Effects: Select yes to include the nonlinear effects from
the material properties. The reference temperature specified for the
body on which a layered section is defined is used as the reference
temperature for the layers.

Thermal Strain Effects: Select yes to send the coefficient of thermal

expansion to the solver.

Note:

These fields are not supported for an Explicit Dynamics

analysis.

Graphic Properties Layer to Display: Provides a slider that enables you to select the
Layer of the model you wish to display in the Geometry window.
The default is setting is All Layers (numerical value = 0).
Properties Total Thickness: Read-only property that displays a total of the
Thickness values defined in the Worksheet.

Total Mass: Read-only property of the calculated total mass of all

of the layers in the Layered Section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 439
Layered Section

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Geometry (p. 265) object:

• Select the Layered Section option on Geometry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Geometry (p. 265) object and select Insert > Layered Section.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Search Faces with Multiple Thicknesses

API Reference
See the Layered Section section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Specifying Surface Body Layered Sections

• Geometry Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
440 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Line Chart (LS-DYNA Only)
During LS-DYNA analyses, plot a two-dimensional graph in the X and Y directions, for supported input
data. Once you specify your data, you can then apply an operation or filter to your graph.

Object
Properties (p. 441)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 442)

Insertion
Methods (p. 442)

Right-click (p. 443)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 443)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Source Type: Options include Existing Objects and Imported File.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 441
Line Chart (LS-DYNA Only)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Source Object: Based on your selection for the above property, use this property
to select one or more objects you wish to chart (result tracker or line chart objects)
or to open a dialog to select a desired file.

Input Unit System: Read-only property displaying the supported unit system.

Operation Type[a]: Specify a desired operation to perform on your dataset. Options

include:

• None: Reset any previous operations and redisplay the plot of the original
dataset.

• Integration: Generate and plot a new dataset based on the integral

operation.

• Differentiation: Generate and plot a new dataset based on the

differentiation operation.

Filter Type[a]: Specify a desired filter to apply to your dataset. Options include:

• None: Reset any previous filters and redisplay the plot of the original dataset.

• Butterworth: Apply the Butterworth filter to create and plot a new dataset.

• SAE: Apply the SAE filter to create and plot a new dataset.

Cutoff Frequency: This property displays when you select one of the above filters.
It defines a cutoff frequency value for the applied filter.

Cutoff Frequency Limit: This property displays when you select one of the above
filters. It is a read-only property that displays the cutoff frequency limit for the
current dataset. The limit indicates the maximum value for the cutoff frequency
that can still support filtering. This value helps you fine tune your Cutoff Frequency
property entry.

Display Original: Options include No (default) and Yes.

[a] You cannot use the options of the Operation Type property and the Filter Type property
in combination. Specifying an Option Type automatically causes the Filter Type property
to be set to None, and vice versa. In addition, these properties are only supported for objects
or files that include one dataset.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add a Line Chart object, highlight the Solution object and either:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
442 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Select the Line Chart option from the Solution Context Tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Line Chart.

You can also right-click within the Geometry window and select Insert > Line Chart.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Probe > [supported probe types]

• User Defined Result

• Python Result

• Line Chart

Additional Related Information

Also see the Line Chart Results (LS-DYNA Only) section for the steps to create and define this object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 443
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
444 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Loads, Supports, and Conditions (Group)
Define the individual loads, supports, and conditions used as boundary conditions in the environment
for a model.

Applies to the following objects: Absorption Element, Absorption Surface, Acceleration, Bearing Load,
Bolt Pretension, Compression Only Support, Conductor, Constraint Equation, Contact Step Control,
Convection, Coupling, Current, Cylindrical Support, Detonation Point, Diffuse Sound Field, Displacement,
Elastic Support, Far-Field Radiation Surface, Nodal Displacement, Nodal Rotation, Free Surface, Fixed
Rotation, Fixed Support, Fluid Solid Interface, Force, Frictionless Support, Generalized Plane Strain, Heat
Flow, Heat Flux, Hydrostatic Pressure, Impedance Boundary (Explicit Dynamics), Impendance Boundary
(Acoustic), Impedance Sheet, Imported CFD Pressure, Incident Wave Source, Internal Heat Generation,
Mass Flow Rate, Joint Load, Limit Boundary, Line Pressure, Low Reduced Frequency Model, Magnetic
Flux Parallel, Mass Source, Moment, Nodal Orientation, Nodal Force, Nodal Pressure, Geometry Based
Adaptivity, Nonlinear Adaptive Region, Element Birth and Death, Perfectly Insulated, Pipe Idealization,
Pipe Pressure, Pipe Temperature, Plastic Heating, Port, Pressure, Pressure (Acoustic), Port In Duct, PSD
Base Excitation, Radiation, Radiation Boundary, Remote Displacement, Remote Force, Rigid Wall, Rotating
Force, Rotational Acceleration, Rotational Velocity, RS Base Excitation, Simply Supported, Standard Earth
Gravity, Static Pressure, Surface Velocity, Symmetry Plane, System Coupling Region, Temperature
(Acoustic), Temperature, Thermal Condition, Thermo-Viscous BLI Boundary, Transfer Admittance Matrix,
Velocity, Viscoelastic Heating, and Voltage.

Support object for a Static Structural analysis: Object

Properties (p. 447)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 445
Loads, Supports, and Conditions (Group)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 447)

Insertion
Methods (p. 448)

Right-click
Options (p. 448)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 448)

Load object for a Static Structural analysis:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
446 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
See the Applying Boundary Conditions section for more information about Loads, Supports, and Condi-
tions.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object:

– For Magnetostatic Analysis only: Source Conductor when specifying a Current or Voltage.

– For all other objects: An analysis environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– For Magnetostatic Analysis Source Conductor: Comment (p. 97), Current, Figure (p. 241), Im-
age (p. 283), and Voltage (Solid Source Conductor only).

– For all other objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image. (p. 283)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 447
Loads, Supports, and Conditions (Group)

Insertion Methods
• For Current or Voltage, scope to a body, then use any of the following methods:

– Select Conductor or Current on the Environment Context Tab, then select Current or Voltage.

– Right-click the Magnetostatic object, or in the Geometry window Inser t> Conductor then Insert
> Current or Voltage.

• For all other objects, use any of the following methods after highlighting Environment (p. 211) object:

– Choose Inertial, or Load, or Supports, or Conditions > {load, support, or condition name} on
Environment Context Tab.

– Right-click the Environment (p. 211) object, any load, support, or condition object, or in the Geo-
metry window Insert > {load, support, or condition name}.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [various boundary condition options]

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Promote to Named Selection: Available for most boundary condition objects. It enables you to
create a Named Selection based on the scoping of the load. It also automatically changes the
Scoping Method of the load to Named Selection and automatically specifies the newly created
Named Selection in the scoping.

• Promote to Coordinate System: Available for Bolt Pretension loads scoped to one or more
Edges, Faces, or Element Faces that have the accompanying Coordinate System Behavior
property set to Program Controlled. The Program Controlled option enables the application
to calculate and define the internal coordinate system for this feature.

When you promote a Coordinate System, the application automatically 1) adds a new Coordinate
System object the to Coordinate Systems folder, 2) sets the Coordinate System Behavior
property to Manual, and 3) specifies the newly promoted Coordinate System to the scoping.

• Show All Bodies

• Invert Visibility

• Group Similar Objects

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Apply Loads and Supports

• Types of Boundary Conditions

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
448 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Manufacturing Constraint
Specifies contraints and other restrictions to ensure manufacturable designs in a Structural Optimization
analysis.

Object
Properties (p. 450)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 450)

Insertion
Methods (p. 450)

Right-click
Options (p. 450)

API
Reference (p. 450)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 450)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 449
Manufacturing Constraint

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Manufacturing Constraint section.

Tree Dependencies
• Only one Manufacturing Constraint object is permitted in the tree.

• Valid Parent Tree Object: Structural Optimization Environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add a Manufacturing Constraint object, highlight the Structural Optimization environment and
either:

• Select Manufacturing Constraint > [desired Manufacturing Constraint] from the Environment
Context Tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > [desired Manufacturing Constraint].

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [Various Structural Optimization options]

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Manufacturing Constraint section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting inform-
ation.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Manufacturing Constraint

• Structural Optimization

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
450 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Material
Represents a material which is contained in your Project. Individual materials (for example, Structural
Steel) are contained in the Materials folder object. The Materials folder object holds all of the materials
that you have added to the Engineering Data workspace or your CAD application, for your analysis.
When you select a material, the Engineering Data Material Window displays. This window enables you
to import materials, view material data properties, and/or open the Engineering Data workspace to
make changes to material properties and data.

Object Properties (p. 452)

Tree Dependencies (p. 452)

Insertion Methods (p. 452)

Right-click Options (p. 452)

API Reference (p. 452)

Additional Related
Information (p. 453)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 451
Material

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are read-only and display statistical-based information about
the object's contents. The properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Common Material Provides a list of common material property values, such as Density
Properties and Young's Modulus. If a material property is based on tabular
data, it is indicated by the value “table” with a parenthetical of the
associated field variable. For example, a temperature dependent
Thermal Conductivity value could have a value of “table(T) = 148.62
W/m · °C.” Field variable nomenclature is described in the supported
properties section. The displayed value is computed using the default
value at each of the material field variable. Also note that table data
can include multiple variables (for example, T,C,U).

In addition, the following properties are included in this category:

Nonlinear Behavior: Read-only property that displays the value

True or False based upon whether the material has nonlinear
material models.
Full Details: Opens the Engineering Data Workspace so that you
can view all of the data for the material.
Statistics Assigned Bodies: Displays the number of bodies to which the
selected material is assigned.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Material objects do not have any associated child objects.

Insertion Methods
A material is automatically inserted or removed, if present or not in the Engineering Data workspace,
when you refresh of the Model is made.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Create Material Assignment

• Create Material Combination

API Reference
See the Material section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
452 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for more information:

• Engineering Data Material Window

• Materials Group (p. 469)

• Material Assignment

• Engineering Data Workspace

• CAD Materials

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 453
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
454 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Material Assignment
Assigns a material to multiple bodies and control its behavior, like nonlinear effects, thermal strain cal-
culation, reference temperature, etc. It also allows for a convenient way for users to edit material
properties through a Commands (p. 91) object.

Important:

• If you scope a Material Assignment object to elements, the application does not validate
that the assigned material includes all required material properties to assure a successful
solution.

• Material Assignment element scoping does not support rigid bodies (Stiffness Behavior
set to Rigid).

• The Material Assignment feature is not supported by LS-DYNA.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455
Material Assignment

Object
Properties (p. 456)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 458)

Insertion
Methods (p. 458)

Right-click
Options (p. 458)

API
Reference (p. 458)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 459)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
456 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping, options include:

• Geometry Selection: Default setting, indicating that you apply

the feature to one or more bodies, which are chosen using
graphical selection tools.

– Geometry: Visible when the Scoping property is set to Geo-

metry Selection. Geometry scoping supports Body and
Element selections only. Displays the type of geometry/mesh
and the number of geometric/mesh entities (for example: 3
Bodies, 14 Elements) to which you have scoped the geometry.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is

defined by a Named Selection.

– Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping property is set

to Named Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of
the available body- or element-based Named Selections.

Definition Material Name: You use the fly-out menu of this property to specify
your desired material. This property can be designated as a parameter.
Structural Steel is the application's default material. The availability
and definition of the materials displayed in the menu is based on the
materials that you have included in the analysis using the Engineering
Data workspace or a CAD application. The menu includes the options
New Material and Import. Both of these options open the Engineering
Data workspace and enable you to create, edit, or import materials.

Nonlinear Effects: Options include Yes (default) and No. This property
instructs the application to include the nonlinear effects from the
material properties.

Thermal Strain Effects: Options include Yes (default) and No. This
property instructs the application to send the coefficient of thermal
expansion to the solver.

Reference Temperature: The reference temperature specified for the

body is used as the reference temperature.

Field Coordinate System: When the selected material includes one or

more properties that includes one or more of the coordinate field
variables (Coordinate X, Coordinate Y, or Coordinate Z) the selection
indicates the origin for the material field. The default (Default
Coordinate System) makes use of a body's Coordinate System. Options
include Default Coordinate System (default), Global Coordinate
System, and if available, user-defined coordinate systems.

Suppressed
Common Material Provides a list of common material property values, such as Density
Properties and Young's Modulus. If a material property is based on tabular data,
it is indicated by the value “table” with a parenthetical of the associated

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 457
Material Assignment

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
field variable. For example, a temperature dependent Thermal
Conductivity value could have a value of “table(T) = 148.62 W/m · °C.”
Field variable nomenclature is described in the supported properties
section. The displayed value is computed using the default value at
each of the material field variable. Also note that table data can include
multiple variables (for example, T,C,U).

In addition, the following properties are included in this category:

Nonlinear Behavior: Read-only property that displays the value

True or False based upon whether the material has nonlinear
material models.
Full Details: Opens the Engineering Data Workspace so that you
can view all of the data for the material.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Select the Materials (p. 469) object and either the bodies in the Outline or the graphics window,
right-click and select Create Material Assignment.

• Select the Materials (p. 469) object and then select the Material Assignment option on Material
Context tab.

• Right-click the Materials (p. 469) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Material
Assignment.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Material Assignment

– Commands

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Material Assignment section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
458 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
See the following sections for more information:

• Specifying Materials

• Setting Up Coordinate Systems

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 459
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
460 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Material Combination
Assigns a combination of different materials, specifically their material properties, to a body or part.

Object
Properties (p. 462)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 462)

Insertion
Methods (p. 462)

Right-click
Options (p. 462)

API
Reference (p. 463)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 463)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 461
Material Combination

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Materials Add Material: You use the flyout menu of this property to display the
Engineering Data Materials pane and select materials for combination.
Common Material Provides a list of common material property values, such as Density
Properties and Young's Modulus. If a material property is based on tabular data,
it is indicated by the value “table” with a parenthetical of the associated
field variable. For example, a temperature dependent Thermal
Conductivity value could have a value of “table(T) = 148.62 W/m · °C.”
Field variable nomenclature is described in the Supported Properties
section. The displayed value is computed using the default value at
each of the material field variable. Also note that table data can include
multiple variables (for example, T,C,U).

In addition, the following properties are included in this category:

Nonlinear Behavior: Read-only property that displays the value

True or False based upon whether the material has nonlinear
material models.
Full Details: Opens the Engineering Data Workspace so that you
can view all of the data for the material.
Statistics Assigned Bodies: Displays the number of bodies to which the selected
material combination is assigned.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Right-click the Materials object and select Insert > Material Combination.

• Select the Materials object and then select the Material Combination option on Materials Context
tab.

• Select multiple materials from the group folder and then either right-click and select Create Material
Combination or select the Material Combination option on Materials Context tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Create Material Assignment

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
462 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Create Material Combination

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Material section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Material Combination Application

• Engineering Data Materials pane

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
464 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Material Plot
Plots a material's property values on your model as contours. You scope the object using geometry
selections or by specifying Named Selections. Once your Material Plot object is defined and generated,
the Geometry window displays the contours associated with the material properties on the specified
geometry/geometries.

Object Properties (p. 465)

Tree Dependencies (p. 466)

Insertion Methods (p. 466)

Right-click Options (p. 467)

API Reference (p. 467)

Additional Related
Information (p. 467)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 465
Material Plot

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping, options include:

• Geometry Selection: Default setting, indicating that you apply the

feature to one or more geometric entities that you select using
graphical selection tools.

– Geometry: Visible when the Scoping property is set to Geo-

metry Selection. Geometry scoping supports Body, Face, Edge,
and Element selection. Displays the type of geometry (Body, etc.)
and the number of geometric entities (for example: 1 Body, 2
Bodies) to which you have scoped the geometry.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is defined

by a Named Selection.

– Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping property is set to

Named Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of the
available geometry-based Named Selections. Named selections
must be defined by supported scoping: Body, Face, Edge, and
Element.

Definition Material Property: Displays a list of supported material properties based

on the materials of your model.

Material Property Component: The options listed for this property include
dependent variables associated with the selected material property.
Examples include Bulk Modulus, Poisson's Ratio, Shear Modulus, and
Young's Modulus.

Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Materials (p. 469).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Materials object:

• Click Material Plot option on the Materials Context tab.

• Right-click the Materials object and select Insert > Material Plot.

• In the Geometry window, select geometry, and then right-click and select Insert > Material
Plot.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
466 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Generate Material Plot

• Suppress

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Material Plot section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Material Plot Application

• Materials Context tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 467
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
468 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Materials (Group)
Holds all material related objects for a given Model object. By default, when you select this object, the
Engineering Data: Material View pane displays (not supported on Linux). From here, you can search for
and add materials to your analysis, making them available for assignment.

Selecting a material in the pane displays the data sheet for the material.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 469
Materials (Group)

Object Properties (p. 470)

Tree Dependencies (p. 471)

Insertion Methods (p. 471)

Materials Folder Display (p. 471)

Right-click Options (p. 471)

API Reference (p. 472)

Additional Related
Information (p. 472)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object, as listed below, are read-only and display statistical-based
information about the object's contents.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
470 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Stat- Materials: Displays the number of material objects contained in the folder.
ist-
ics Material Assignment: Displays the number of Material Assignment objects contained
in the folder.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Material (p. 451), Imported Material Fields, Material Assignment, Material
Plot, and Imported Trace (Group) (p. 395).

Insertion Methods
The Materials folder is automatically inserted.

Materials Folder Display

When you have the Materials folder selected, you can display the geometry by selecting the Geometry
tab at the bottom of the window, as illustrated below. From this view, parts with different material as-
signments display with a unique color.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Material Assignment

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 471
Materials (Group)

– Material Plot

– Material Combination

• Group All Similar Children

• Refresh Materials

API Reference
See the Materials section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Imported Material Fields

• Material Assignment

• Material Plot

• Material Combination

• Engineering Data Workspace

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
472 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Measures
Specify User Defined Criteria. Only one instance of this object can be added to an analysis.

Object
Properties (p. 473)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 473)

Insertion
Methods (p. 474)

Right-click (p. 474)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 474)

Object Properties
This object has no associated properties.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Primary Criterion and Composite Criteria.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 473
Measures

Insertion Methods
To add this object to the Outline:

• Select the Model object and then select Measures from the Define group on the Model Context
tab.

• Right-click the Model object and select Insert > Measures.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert: Options include Primary Criterion and Composite Criteria.

• Evaluate All Measures: This option calculates a Result property value for all defined criteria
objects. Available for the Measures object as well as all child objects.

• Rename Based on Definition: The application automatically renames the child objects of the
folder based on their type. For example, when the Base Result property for a Primary Criterion
object is set to Mass, the object would be automatically renamed Mass Criteria.

• Clear Generated Data: Clears all child object data. Available for the Measures object as well as
all child objects.

Additional Related Information

See the User Defined Criteria section of the Mechanical User's Guide for the steps to use this object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
474 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh
Manages all meshing functions and tools for a model. Includes global controls that govern the entire
mesh.

Object Properties (p. 475)

Tree Dependencies (p. 480)

Insertion Methods (p. 480)

Right-click Options (p. 480)

API Reference (p. 482)

Additional Related
Information (p. 482)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 475
Mesh

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Display Display Style: Enables you to change the display of the mesh in the
graphical display window based on different criteria. The Display
Style options include the following:

• Use Geometry Setting (default): The display of the mesh in

the Geometry window is based on the setting of the Display
Style property of the Geometry object (p. 265).

• Mesh Metric information, which includes:

Shell Thickness (visible for surface/shell bodies only)

Element Quality
Aspect Ratio, based on either Triangle elements or
Quadrilateral elements
Jacobian Ratio (MAPDL, Corner Nodes, or Gauss Points)
Warping Factor
Parallel Deviation
Maximum Corner Angle
Skewness
Orthogonal Quality
Characteristic Length (Autodyn)
Minimum Tri Angle
Maximum Tri Angle
Minimum Quad Angle
Maximum Quad Angle
Warping Angle
Tet Collapse
Aspect Ratio (Explicit)
Minimum Element Edge Length
Maximum Element Edge Length
Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA)

• Knockdown Factors: Visible only when your analysis includes

an STL Support (p. 727) object and only once the STL Support
object’s mesh has been generated. The option enables you
to view the STL Support's elements with color-coded
knockdown factors while you have the Mesh object selected.

Note:

The use of Display Style to color mesh according to

quality and the use of Mesh Metrics to view quality
statistics are mutually exclusive. For example, when you

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
476 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions

are viewing Mesh Metrics, you cannot also view the mesh
quality by color.

Defaults Physics Preference

Solver Preference (appears if Physics Preference is CFD)

Export Format (appears if Physics Preference is CFD and Solver

Preference is Fluent)

Export Preview Surface Mesh (appears if Physics Preference is

CFD, Solver Preference is Fluent, and Export Format is Standard)

Export Unit (appears if Physics Preference is CFD and Solver

Preference is Polyflow)

Note:

Solver Preference also appears in the Mechanical

application if the Physics Preference is Mechanical in a
Transient Structural or Rigid Dynamics system during
the initial geometry attach. See Solver Preference for
more information.

Element Order

Element Size
Sizing Use Adaptive Sizing

Resolution

Initial Size Seed

Transition

Span Angle Center

Capture Curvature

Capture Proximity

Curvature Min Size

Curvature Normal Angle

Proximity Gap Factor

Proximity Size Function Sources

Proximity Min Size

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 477
Mesh

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Use Uniform Size Function for Sheets

Growth Rate

Max Size

Enable Washers

Mesh Defeaturing

Defeature Size

Bounding Box Diagonal

Average Surface Area

Minimum Edge Length

Quality Check Mesh Quality

Error Limits

Target Element Quality

Target Skewness

Target Jacobian Ratio (Corner Nodes)

Target Characteristic Length (LS-DYNA)

Target Aspect Ratio (Explicit)

Smoothing

Mesh Metric
Inflation Use Automatic Inflation

Inflation Option

Transition Ratio

Maximum Layers

Growth Rate

Number of Layers

Maximum Thickness

First Layer Height

First Aspect Ratio

Aspect Ratio (Base/Height)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
478 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Inflation Algorithm

Inflation Element Type

View Advanced Options

Collision Avoidance

Fix First Layer

Maximum Height over Base

Gap Factor

Growth Rate Type

Maximum Angle

Fillet Ratio

Use Post Smoothing

Smoothing Iterations
Batch Connections Mesh Based Connection

Mesh Type

Triangle Reduction
Advanced Number of CPUs for Parallel Part Meshing

Straight Sided Element: Appears if the model includes an enclosure

from DesignModeler.

Rigid Body Behavior

Triangle Surface Mesher

Topology Checking

Use Sheet Thickness for Pinch

Pinch Tolerance

Generate Pinch on Refresh

Sheet Loop Removal

Loop Removal Tolerance

Statistics Nodes: Read-only indication.

Elements: Read-only indication.

Show Detailed Statistics: Read-only indication.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 479
Mesh

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Model Assembly The Model Assembly category and Read Only property display
when you have assembled files from upstream sources (Mechanical
Model, analysis systems, etc.). Options include Yes (default) and No.
See the Mesh Modification section for more information.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: All mesh control tool objects (p. 493), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and
Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Appears by default when geometry is attached.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Mesh Workflows

– Method

– Sizing

– Contact Sizing

– Refinement

– Face Meshing

– Mesh Copy

– Match Control

– Pinch

– Inflation

– Weld

– Feature Suppress

– Repair Topology

– Connect

– Quad Layer

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
480 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Deviation

– Gasket (p. 255)

– Mesh Connection Group (p. 483)

– Manual Mesh Connection (p. 489)

– Contact Match Group (p. 483)

– Contact Match (p. 489)

– Node Merge Group (p. 547)

– Node Merge (p. 551)

– Node Move (p. 555)

– Pull

• Update

• Generate Mesh

• Preview >

– Surface Mesh

– Inflation

– Weld Geometry

– Weld Mesh

• Show >

– Removable Loops

– Sweepable Bodies

– Mappable Faces

– Suppressible Features

– Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections

– Program Controlled Inflation Surfaces

• Create Pinch Controls

• Export >

– STL File (Binary is the default format setting).

– Ansys Viewer File (AVZ): export mesh data as a Ansys Viewer File (.avz)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 481
Mesh

• Group All Similar Children

• Clear Generated Data

• Rename

• Start Recording

API Reference
See the Mesh section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Meshing Capabilities in Workbench

• Mesh Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
482 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group
Defines mesh connections/contact matches between selected topologies. Includes global settings in
Details that apply to all Mesh Connection or Contact Match child objects.

Note:

See the object reference pages for Mesh Edit (p. 497) and Node Merge Group (p. 547) for
information about other objects related to Mesh Connections, Contact Matches, and Mesh
Editing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 483
Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group

Object
Properties (p. 484)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 486)

Insertion
Methods (p. 486)

Right-click
Options (p. 487)

API
Reference (p. 487)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 487)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.

Geometry: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
484 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to
Named Selection.
Auto Detection Tolerance Type: Options include Slider, Value, and Use Sheet
Thickness. Bodies in an assembly that were created in a CAD system
may not have been placed precisely, resulting in small overlaps or
gaps along the connections between bodies. You can account for
any imprecision by specifying detection tolerance. This tolerance
can be specified by a value when this property is set to Slider or
Value, or sheet thickness of surface bodies when the type is set to
Use Sheet Thickness.

Tolerance Slider: Appears when the Tolerance Type property is

set to Slider. To tighten the mesh connection or contact match
detection, move the slider bar closer to +100 and to loosen the
detection, move the slider bar closer to -100. A tighter tolerance
means that the bodies have to be within a smaller region (of either
gap or overlap) to be considered; a looser tolerance will have the
opposite effect. Be aware that as you adjust the tolerance, the
number of mesh connection pairs or contact matches could increase
or decrease.

Tolerance Value: Appears when the Tolerance Type is set to Slider

or Value. It is a read-only property if the Tolerance Type is set to
Slider and displays the tolerance value based on the slider setting.
When the Tolerance Type is set to Value, you can enter an exact
distance for the detection tolerance.

Thickness Scale Factor: Displays when the Tolerance Type property

is set to Use Sheet Thickness. The default value is 1. For Edge/Edge
pairing (see below), the largest thickness among the surface bodies
involved is used; however, if the pairing is Face/Edge, the thickness
of the surface body with the face geometry is used.

Use Range: Appears if the Tolerance Type property is set to Slider

or Value. Options include Yes and No (default). If set to Yes, mesh
connection detection searches within a range from Tolerance Value
to Min Distance Value inclusive and the following additional
properties display:

• Min Distance Percent: Appears if Use Range is set to Yes.

This is the percentage of the Tolerance Value to determine
the Min Distance Value. The default is 10 percent. You can
move the slider to adjust the percentage between 0 and 100.

• Min Distance Value: Appears if Use Range is set to Yes. This

is a read-only field that displays the value derived from: Min
Distance Value = Min Distance Percentage * Tolerance
Value/100.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 485
Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Group By: For mesh connections, options include None and Faces
(default). For contact matches, options include None, Bodies
(default), Parts, and Faces. This property allows you to group the
automatically generated mesh connection or contact match objects.
For example, setting Group By to Faces for a mesh connection
group means that mesh connection faces and edges that lie on the
same parts will be included into a single mesh connection object.

Search Across: Enables automatic detection through the following

options:

• Bodies (default): Between bodies.

• Parts: Between bodies of different parts, that is, not between

bodies within the same multibody part.

• Anywhere: Detects any mesh connections/contact matches

regardless of where the geometry lies, including different
parts. However, if a mesh connection is within the same body,
this option finds only Face/Face mesh connections, even if
the Face/Edge setting is turned On.

Face Angle Tolerance: For faces that will be excluded from the
proximity detection pair, this property defines the minimum angle
between the primary face and secondary edge entity above which
the two face pairs will be ignored from proximity detection. The
default value is 70°.

Edge Overlap Tolerance: This tolerance value is the minimum

percentage that an edge may overlap the face and is included as a
valid proximity detection pair. The default value is 25%.
Statistics Connections: Displays the number of connections associated with
this parent object.

Active Connections: Displays the number of connections that are

currently active for this parent object (that is, not Suppressed).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Edit (p. 497).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Mesh Connection or Contact Match, Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241),
and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Mesh Edit object or another Mesh Connection
Group or Contact Match Group object:

• Click Mesh Connection Group or Contact Match Group on the Model Context Tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
486 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Right-click Mesh Edit object or on another Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group
object or in the Geometry window; then Insert Mesh Connection Group or Insert Contact
Match Group.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Mesh Connection Group (p. 483)

– Manual Mesh Connection (p. 489)

– Contact Match Group (p. 483)

– Contact Match (p. 489)

• Detect Connections

• Generate

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Create Named Selection

• Delete Children

API Reference
See the Mesh Connection Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Editing

• Mesh Connection

• Contact Match

• Mesh Edit (p. 497)

• Mesh Connection/Contact Match object (p. 489)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 487
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
488 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Connection/Contact Match
Defines mesh connection/contact match conditions for individual topology pairs. Multiple Mesh Con-
nection or Contact Match objects can appear as child objects under a Mesh Connection Group or
Contact Match Group object.

Note:

See the object reference pages for Mesh Edit (p. 497) and Node Merge Group (p. 547) for
information about other objects related to Mesh Connections, Contact Matches, and Mesh
Editing.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 489
Mesh Connection/Contact Match

Object
Properties (p. 490)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 491)

Insertion
Methods (p. 491)

Right-click
Options (p. 491)

API
Reference (p. 492)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 492)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Geometry Selection or Named Selection.
Primary Geometry
Secondary Geometry
Primary Bodies: Read-only indication.
Secondary Bodies: Read-only indication.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
490 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Scope Mode: Read-only indication of Manual or Automatic.
Tolerance Type
Tolerance Slider: Appears if Tolerance Type = Tolerance Slider.
Tolerance Value: Appears if Tolerance Type = Tolerance Slider (read-only)
or Tolerance Value.
Thickness Scale Factor: Appears if Tolerance Type = Use Sheet Thickness.
Suppressed
Snap to Boundary (valid for mesh connections only)
Snap Type (valid for mesh connections only): Appears if Snap to Boundary
= Yes.
Snap Tolerance (valid for mesh connections only): Appears if Snap Type
= Manual Tolerance.
Master Element Size Factor (valid for mesh connections only): Appears if
Snap Type = Element Size Factor.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Connection Group (p. 483) (for mesh connections) or Contact Match
Group (p. 483) (for contact matches).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Mesh Edit (p. 497) object or a Mesh Connection
Group/Contact Match Group object:

• Assuming that you have accurately defined the required properties, Mesh Connection and
Contact Match objects can be inserted automatically if you select Detect Connections from
the right mouse click context menu via the Mesh Edit object or a Mesh Connection
Group/Contact Match Group object.

• Click Manual Mesh Connection or Contact Match on the Mesh Context tab.

• Right-click the Mesh Edit object or the Mesh Connection Group/Contact Match Group object
or in the Geometry window; then Insert > Manual Mesh Connection or Insert > Contact
Match.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Generate: Update the mesh for the selected contact match or mesh connection

• Suppress/Unsuppress

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 491
Mesh Connection/Contact Match

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Primary/Secondary (valid for Edge-to-Edge Mesh Connection only)

• Merge Selected Mesh Connections

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Go to Connections for Duplicate Pairs: Available if connection object shares the same geometries
with other connection objects.

• Create Named Selection

API Reference
See the Mesh Connection section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Mesh Connections

• Contact Matches

• Mesh Edit (p. 497)

• Mesh Connection Group (p. 483)

• Contact Match Group (p. 483)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
492 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Control Tools (Group)
Objects available for fine tuning the mesh.

Applies to the following objects: Method, Sizing, Contact Sizing, Refinement, Face Meshing, Match
Control, Pinch, Inflation, Sharp Angle, and Gasket (p. 255).

Object Properties (p. 493)

Tree Dependencies (p. 494)

Insertion Methods (p. 494)

Right-click Options (p. 494)

API Reference (p. 495)

Additional Related
Information (p. 495)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method - Specify either Geometry Selection or Named
Selection. Not applicable to Contact Sizing, Pinch, or Match
Control.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 493
Mesh Control Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry - Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry
Selection. In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry,
click in the Geometry field, then click Apply. Not applicable to
Contact Sizing, Pinch, or Match Control.
Named Selection - Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named
Selection. Not applicable to Contact Sizing, Pinch, or Match
Control.
Contact Region - Applicable only to Contact Sizing.
Definition Suppressed

Note:

Additional Definition settings may be available,

depending on the specific mesh control tool.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Mesh object.

• Choose Mesh Control > {Mesh control tool name} on the Mesh Context Tab.

• Right-click the Mesh object, any mesh control tool object, or in the Geometry window> Insert
> {Mesh control tool name}.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Inflate This Method - available only for Method control where Method is set to anything other
than Hex Dominant, MultiZone Quad/Tri, or Sweep (unless a source has been specified).

• Update

• Generate Mesh

• Preview >

– Surface Mesh

– Source and Target Mesh

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
494 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Inflation

– Weld Geometry

– Weld Mesh

• Show >

– Sweepable Bodies

– Mappable Faces

– Removable Loops

– Suppressible Features

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Start Recording

API Reference
See the Mesh Controls section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Meshing Capabilities in Workbench

• Mesh Context

• Convergence - applicable to Refinement

• Error (Structural) - applicable to Refinement

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 495
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
496 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Edit
Creates Mesh Connections and Contact Matches as well as merge and/or move individual nodes on the
mesh (once generated). Mesh Connections define conditions for joining meshes of topologically discon-
nected surface bodies. This object includes global settings in Details view that apply to all Mesh Con-
nection Group, Contact Match Group, Node Merge group, Mesh Connection, Contact Match, Node
Merge, and Node Move child objects.

Object Properties (p. 497)

Tree Dependencies (p. 498)

Insertion Methods (p. 498)

Right-click Options (p. 498)

API Reference (p. 498)

Additional Related
Information (p. 499)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Auto Detection Generate Automatic Mesh Connections On Refresh: Yes or No.
Transparency Enabled: Yes or No.
Definition Associate To Pull Geometry: Options for this property include Yes and
No (default). This property enables you to automatically apply your
extrusion or revolution, created with the Pull feature, to a Named
Selections scoped to the Pull body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 497
Mesh Edit

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Mesh Connection Group (p. 483), Contact Match Group (p. 483), Node
Merge Group (p. 547), Node Move (p. 555), Pull (p. 625), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Im-
age (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model object:

• Click the Mesh Edit option on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window; then select Insert > Mesh Edit.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Mesh Connection Group

– Manual Mesh Connection

– Contact Match Group

– Contact Match

– Node Merge Group

– Node Merge

– Node Move

– Pull

• Generate

• Clear Generated Data (This option is not available if the object has only Node Move objects as
children.)

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Create Named Selection for Shared Nodes

API Reference
See the Mesh Edit section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
498 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
• Mesh Editing

• Mesh Connections

• Mesh Connection Group (p. 483)

• Mesh Connection (p. 489)

• Contact Matches

• Contact Match Group (p. 483)

• Contact Match (p. 489)

• Node Move

• Node Merge Group

• Node Merge

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 499
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
500 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Numbering
Includes any number of Numbering Control (p. 557) objects, used for mesh numbering, which allows
you to renumber the node and element numbers of a generated meshed model consisting of flexible
parts.

Object Properties (p. 501)

Tree Dependencies (p. 501)

Insertion Methods (p. 502)

Right-click Options (p. 502)

API Reference (p. 502)

Additional Related
Information (p. 502)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Specifying Mesh Node Offset
Numbering
Element Offset
Compress Node Numbers

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 501
Mesh Numbering

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting Model object:

• Select the Mesh Numbering option on the Model Context tab.

• right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Mesh Numbering.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Numbering Control

• Renumber Mesh

API Reference
See the Mesh Numbering section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Numbering

• Model Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
502 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Mesh Workflows
Create a mesh workflow. A mesh workflow defines a meshing framework that makes advanced meshing
capabilities available. The supported workflows are ideal for complex CAD geometry and meshing pro-
cedures. A workflow defines a meshing procedure as a sequence of Steps that can be parameterized
and interconnected through the use of controls and Output. The application supports the following
predefined and customizable acoustic workflows:

• External FEM Acoustics (p. 505)

• Internal FEM Acoustics (p. 507)

• BEM Acoustics (p. 510)

The following associated objects are used with the feature:

• Input (p. 512)

• Labels (p. 514)

• Steps (p. 516)

• Output (p. 519)

Object Properties (p. 503)

Tree Dependencies (p. 504)

Insertion Methods (p. 504)

Right-click Options (p. 504)

API Reference (p. 504)

Additional Related
Information (p. 504)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 503
Mesh Workflows

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Active Workflow Group: Displays the active workflow type used for
generating mesh.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics, BEM Acoustics, Input,La-
bels, Steps, Output.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Mesh Workflows object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Insert: Allows you to insert the desired mesh workflow type.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to reset the generated data for the selected mesh workflow.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the mesh workflow. Clear
Output Data is available only after completing the mesh workflow.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the selected mesh workflow.

API Reference
See the Mesh Controls section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections in the Meshing User's Guide for additional information:

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
504 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 External FEM Acoustics

• Input

• Labels

• Steps

• Output

Also see the following additional object reference sections for this feature.
1. External FEM Acoustics
2. Internal FEM Acoustics
3. BEM Acoustics
4. Input
5. Labels
6. Steps
7. Output
8. Controls
9. Outcomes

1. External FEM Acoustics

Object available for creating External FEM Acoustic mesh workflows.

Applies to the following objects: Input, Labels, Steps, Output.

Object Properties (p. 506)

Tree Dependencies (p. 506)

Insertion Methods (p. 506)

Right-click Options (p. 506)

API Reference (p. 507)

Additional Related
Information (p. 507)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 505
Mesh Workflows

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Workflow Type: Displays the selected mesh workflow type.
Definition Length Unit: Provides the length unit of the input model. When
you use Initialize Workflow to transfer the input geometry,
mesh workflow derives the Length Unit from the transferred
input.

Steps File Location: Displays the file location from which you
load the steps using Import Workflow.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533), Mesh Workflows (p. 503).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Input, Labels, Output.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting External FEM Acoustics Mesh Workflow object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows > External FEM Acoustics.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows > External
FEM Acoustics.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows > External FEM Acoustics.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows
> External FEM Acoustics.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the specified mesh workflow object.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the mesh specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to clear generated data for the specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the specified mesh workflow
object.Clear Output Data is available only after completing the specified mesh workflow object.

• Execute Step: Initializes the workflow and execute the next step of the specified mesh workflow
object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
506 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Internal FEM Acoustics

• Execute All Steps: Initializes the workflow and execute all steps of the specified mesh workflow object.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the specified mesh workflow object.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Input

• Labels

• Steps

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap Parts

• Improve Wrap Mesh

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

2. Internal FEM Acoustics

Object available for creating Internal FEM Acoustics mesh workflows.

Applies to the following objects: Input, Labels, Steps, Output.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 507
Mesh Workflows

Object Properties (p. 508)

Tree Dependencies (p. 508)

Insertion Methods (p. 508)

Right-click Options (p. 509)

API Reference (p. 509)

Additional Related
Information (p. 509)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Workflow Type: Displays the selected mesh workflow type.
Definition Length Unit: Provides the length unit of the input model. When you
use Initialize Workflow to transfer the input geometry, mesh
workflow derives the Length Unit from the transferred input.

Steps File Location: Displays the file location from which you load
the steps using Import Workflow.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533), Mesh Workflows (p. 503).

• Valid Child Tree Objects:Input, Labels, Steps, Output.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Internal FEM Acoustics Mesh Workflow object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows > Internal FEM Acoustics.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
508 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Internal FEM Acoustics

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows > Internal
FEM Acoustics.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows > Internal FEM Acoustics.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows
> Internal FEM Acoustics.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the specified mesh workflow object.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the mesh specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to clear generated data for the specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the specified mesh workflow
object.Clear Output Data is available only after completing the specified mesh workflow object.

• Execute Step: Initializes the workflow and execute the next step of the specified mesh workflow
object.

• Execute All Steps: Initializes the workflow and execute all steps of the specified mesh workflow object.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the specified mesh workflow object.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Input

• Labels

• Steps

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap Parts

• Improve Wrap Mesh

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 509
Mesh Workflows

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

3. BEM Acoustics
Object available for creating BEM Acoustics mesh workflows.

Applies to the following objects: Input, Labels, Steps, Output.

Object Properties (p. 510)

Tree Dependencies (p. 511)

Insertion Methods (p. 511)

Right-click Options (p. 511)

API Reference (p. 511)

Additional Related
Information (p. 511)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Workflow Type: Displays the selected mesh workflow type.
Definition Length Unit: Provides the length unit of the input model. When you
use Initialize Workflow to transfer the input geometry, mesh
workflow derives the Length Unit from the transferred input.

Steps File Location: Displays the file location from which you load
the steps using Import Workflow.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
510 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 BEM Acoustics

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533), Mesh Workflows (p. 503).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Input, Labels, Steps, Output.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting BEM Acoustics Mesh Workflow object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows > BEM Acoustics.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows > BEM
Acoustics.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows > BEM Acoustics.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows
> BEM Acoustics.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the specified mesh workflow object.

• Delete: Allows you to delete the mesh specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Generated Data: Allows you to clear generated data for the specified mesh workflow object.

• Clear Output Data: Allows you to clear the output data after completing the specified mesh workflow
object.Clear Output Data is available only after completing the specified mesh workflow object.

• Execute Step: Initializes the workflow and execute the next step of the specified mesh workflow
object.

• Execute All Steps: Initializes the workflow and execute all steps of the specified mesh workflow object.

• Generate Mesh Workflows: Allows you to generate the specified mesh workflow object.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Input

• Labels

• Steps

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 511
Mesh Workflows

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap Parts

• Improve Wrap Mesh

• Create Quadratic Mesh

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

4. Input
Select the geometry parts used for initializing the mesh workflow, supports the transfer of geometry
from imported bodies.

Object Properties (p. 512)

Tree Dependencies (p. 513)

Insertion Methods (p. 513)

Right-click Options (p. 513)

API Reference (p. 513)

Additional Related
Information (p. 513)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Scopes the input geometry or named
selections.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
512 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Input

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry Selection: Scope the geometry bodies.
Named Selection: Scope the available name selections.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Input object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Complete Workflow: Completes the workflow by transferring generated data back to new mechan-
ical geometry parts along with the corresponding part meshes.

• Rename: Renames the output.

• Clear Output Data: Clear the output data in the workflow. Clear Output Data is available only if the
mesh workflow is completed.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Labels

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 513
Mesh Workflows

• Steps

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap

• Mesh Surface

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

5. Labels
Groups of entities that you use in various mesh workflow operations.

Object Properties (p. 515)

Tree Dependencies (p. 515)

Insertion Methods (p. 515)

API Reference (p. 515)

Additional Related
Information (p. 515)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
514 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Labels

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Label String: Name of the labels or named selections available in
the imported geometry.

Suppressed: Displays the suppressed state of the selected label. The

default value is No. Suppressed is read-only.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Steps object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Input

• Steps

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 515
Mesh Workflows

• Mesh Surface

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

6. Steps
Provides a set of sequential mesh workflow operation for the selected mesh workflow type using Controls
and Outcomes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
516 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steps

Object Properties (p. 517)

Tree Dependencies (p. 517)

Insertion Methods (p. 517)

Right-click Options (p. 518)

API Reference (p. 518)

Additional Related
Information (p. 518)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Number of Threads: Allows you to provide the maximum number of
threads required for the mesh workflow execution.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Steps object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 517
Mesh Workflows

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Allows you to rename the Steps.

• Insert: Allows you to insert mesh workflow steps. You can only Insert a mesh workflow step if the
mesh workflow is not completed.

• Execute Step: Initializes the workflow and execute the next step of the specified mesh workflow
type.

• Execute All Steps: Initializes the workflow and execute all steps of the specified mesh workflow type.

• Delete Steps and Clear Data: Allows you to delete all steps and clear data in the workflow. When
you delete steps and clear data for the mesh workflow object, you can select the mesh workflow
type for the Mesh Workflows.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Input

• Labels

• Output

• Fill Holes

• Wrap

• Mesh Surface

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
518 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Output

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

7. Output
Transfers data from generated Mesh Workflow data to Ansys Mechanical geometry parts along with
its associated mesh with type entities based on zones.

Object Properties (p. 519)

Tree Dependencies (p. 520)

Insertion Methods (p. 520)

Right-click Options (p. 520)

API Reference (p. 520)

Additional Related
Information (p. 521)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 519
Mesh Workflows

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Data Transfer Type: Create the new geometries based on the
data transfer type.
By Zones: Create geometrical entities and named selections
from zones.
Process Entities of Type: Set the type of entities dimension
based on zones
Volume Zones:Allows you to process the volume zones and
transfer it as solid bodies in Geometry.
Face Zones: Allows you to process the face zones and transfer
it as surface bodies in Geometry.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Output object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Initialize Workflow: Initializes the mesh workflow, transferring selected input geometry to the mesh
workflow operations. Named Selections scoped to the input geometry translate into corresponding
Labels after initializing the workflow.

• Rename: Rename the input.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
520 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Controls

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Input

• Labels

• Steps

• Fill Holes

• Wrap

• Mesh Surface

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

8. Controls
Determines the execution of Mesh Workflow Steps based on the set of defined controls.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 521
Mesh Workflows

Object
Properties (p. 522)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 523)

Insertion
Methods (p. 523)

Right-click
Options (p. 523)

API
Reference (p. 523)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 523)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Label String: Name of the labels or named selections available
in the imported geometry.
Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected label.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
522 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Controls

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Controls object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type. The
controls are added under each Step based on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.The controls are added under each Step based on the selected Mesh
Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and clickInsert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type. The
controls are added under each Step based on the selected Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.The controls are added under each Step based on the selected
Mesh Workflow Type.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Rename the control.

• Delete: Delete the control.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Input

• Steps

• Output

• Fill Holes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 523
Mesh Workflows

• Wrap

• Mesh Surface

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

• Hole Filling

• Constant Size Wrapper

• Custom Names Wrapper

• Material Point

• Constant Size Surface Mesher

• Wrapper Specific Surface Mesher

• External Part Enclosure

• Spherical Enclosure

• Convex Irregular Shape Enclosure

• Custom Names

• Constant Size Volume Mesher

• Volume Mesh Improvement

• Second Order Conversion

• Extrusion

• Topology Creation

• Volumes Merging

• Assign Zone Material

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
524 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Outcomes

9. Outcomes
Generated outputs from the operation based on the applied controls which you can use to monitor
the results of the operation or can be set as input to the consecutive operation.

Object
Properties (p. 525)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 526)

Insertion
Methods (p. 526)

Right-click
Options (p. 526)

API
Reference (p. 526)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 526)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 525
Mesh Workflows

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Label String: Name of the labels or named selections available
in the imported geometry.
Suppressed: Allows you to suppress the selected label.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Workflows (p. 503), External FEM Acoustics, Internal FEM Acoustics,
BEM Acoustics.

Insertion Options
Use any of the following methods for inserting Outcomes object.

• Right-click Model and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Model. In the Model Context tab, under the Mesh group, click Mesh Workflows. Select
the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Right-click Mesh and click Insert > Mesh Workflows. Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

• Click Mesh. In the Mesh Context tab, under the Mesh Workflow group, click Mesh Workflows.
Select the Mesh Workflow Type.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:
Availability is dependent on the selected object.

• Rename: Rename the control.

• Delete: Delete the control.

API Reference
See the Mesh Workflows section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• External FEM Acoustics

• Internal FEM Acoustics

• BEM Acoustics

• Input

• Steps

• Output

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
526 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Outcomes

• Fill Holes

• Wrap

• Mesh Surface

• Create Enclosure

• Mesh Volume

• Improve Volume Mesh

• Extrude Acoustic Region

• Extrude PML Region

• Create Acoustic Regions

• Merge Acoustic Regions

• Assign Material

• Scope

• Face Zone Scope

• Volume Zone Scope

• Internal Enclosure Scope

• External Enclosure Scope

• Extrusion Start Scope

• Extrusion End Scope

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 527
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
528 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Modal
Defines the modal analysis whose mode shapes are to be used in a random vibration, response spectrum,
or harmonic (MSUP) linked analysis (not shown below).

Modal Object for Random Vibration Object

Properties (p. 530)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 530)

Insertion
Methods (p. 530)

API
Reference (p. 531)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 531)

Modal Object for Response Spectrum

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 529
Modal

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Modal Environment: Specify the Modal analysis you wish to link to
current analysis. The application uses the mode shapes from the selected
Modal analysis in current analysis.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Random Vibration, Response Spectrum, or Harmonic Response (linked)
environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Appears by default for a random vibration analysis, response spectrum analysis, or harmonic (MSUP)
linked analysis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
530 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Random Vibration Analysis

• Response Spectrum Analysis

• Harmonic Response Analysis Using Linked Modal Analysis System

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 531
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
532 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Model
Defines the geometry for the particular branch of the tree. The sub-levels provide additional information
about the Model object, including loads, supports and results, but do not replace the geometry.
Graphic settings applied to the Model object apply to lower level objects in the tree. The Model object
groups geometry, material assignments, connections, and mesh settings. The Geometry (p. 265), Connec-
tions (p. 129), and Mesh (p. 475) objects are not created until geometry is successfully attached.

Object Properties (p. 533)

Tree Dependencies (p. 535)

Insertion Methods (p. 535)

Right-click Options (p. 535)

API Reference (p. 536)

Additional Related
Information (p. 536)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object include the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Model Assembly Alignment
Lighting Ambient: Represents a non-spatial, omni-directional, and fixed-intensity
lighting that affects all objects in the scene equally. This factor varies
between 0 and 1.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 533
Model

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Diffuse: Simulates the directional impact lighting has on the model.
The more a part of the model faces the light source, the brighter it
becomes. This factor varies between 0 and 1.

Specular: Dictates the bright spots of light that appear on shiny objects
when illuminated. This factor varies between 0 and 1.

Color: Specifies the color of the light projected onto the model. The
default lighting color is white.

Note:

If you change the setting of the Color property from

white, the display of load variation contours and result
contours will not correspond to the color contours of the
legend. You can make sure contours display properly,
when a color change is desired, using the Force White
Lighting for Results preference under the Graphics
category in the Options dialog.
The application saves Lighting property settings with
your analysis. Lighting changes propagate throughout
the features of the application and are used when you
export images.
You can change the default setting for all Lighting
properties under the Graphics preference of the Options
dialog.

Advanced Window Title: Entry field that enables you to manually change what is
displayed in the title bar of the application. By default, the title bar
shows the:

• Cell letter designation (A, B, etc.) of the analysis system contained

on the Project Schematic in Workbench. This can include
multiple linked analyses.

Single System:

Multiple Systems:

• Analysis type for single systems (Static Structural, etc.).

• Name of the application, "Mechanical."

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
534 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• License currently in use contained in brackets ([Ansys Mechanical
Enterprise])

Note:

You can turn off the display of the application name

and the license using the options of the Main Window
Title Theme preferences in the Options dialog under
UI Options.

Filter Control: Read-only property specified as Enabled.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Project (p. 621).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Chart (p. 87), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Geo-
metry (p. 265), Materials, Cross Sections (p. 175), Construction Geometry, Virtual Topology (p. 797),
Symmetry (p. 753), Remote Point, Connections (p. 129), Fracture, Substructure Analysis, Mesh Edit (p. 497),
Mesh Numbering (p. 501), Solution Combination (p. 709), Fatigue Combination (p. 227), Named Selec-
tion (p. 541), AM Process (p. 21), and Part Transform.

Insertion Methods
This object is automatically included in all analyses.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Named Selection (p. 541)

– Part Transform

– Construction Geometry > [Construction Geometry Type]

– Cross Sections (p. 175) > [Cross Section Types (p. 177)]

– Virtual Topology (p. 797)

– Symmetry (p. 753)

– Remote Point

– Fracture

– Mesh Edit (p. 497)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 535
Model

– Mesh Numbering (p. 501)

– AM Process (p. 21)

– Measures (p. 473)

– Boundary Conditions

– Solution Combination (p. 709)

– Fatigue Combination (p. 227)

• Solve

• Show All Bodies

• Invert Visibility

• Clear Generated Data

• Refresh Materials

• Update Geometry from Source

• Disable Filter/Auto Filter

API Reference
See the Model section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following section for more information:

• Model Context Tab

• Attaching Geometry

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
536 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Morphing Region
Specify a domain in which the mesh is adapted, or "morphed," based on node locations and coordinates,
during the solution process to adapt the mesh to the current frequency. The analysis supports only one
Morphing Region object. Once inserted, the option is no longer available on the ribbon/context menus.

Object
Properties (p. 538)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 539)

Insertion
Methods (p. 539)

Right-click (p. 539)

API
Reference (p. 539)

Additional
Information (p. 539)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 537
Morphing Region

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Morphing Scoping Method: Specify how you perform geometric entity selection. Options
Region include Geometry Selection (default) and Named Selection.

Geometry (Body selection only): Visible when you set the Scoping Method property
to Geometry Selection. Select a body or bodies to specify the domain for mesh
that will be adapted during the solution. Once you make selections, the property
displays the corresponding number of scoped geometric entities (1 Body, 2 Bodies).

Named Selection (Body selection only): Visible when the Scoping Method is set
to Named Selection. Provides a drop-down list of user-defined Named Selections
that meet the scoping requirements for the object.
Fixed Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.
Boundar-
ies Geometry (Face selection only): Select the face or faces corresponding to the
face/faces for which the mesh does not change during the solution process.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.
Provides a drop-down list of available user-defined face-based Named Selections.
Moving Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named Selection.
Boundar-
ies Geometry (Face selection only): Select the face or faces that define the boundary
of the of the mesh that is automatically adapted during the solution process. Mesh
adaptation is based on the values of the Base Frequency and Morphing Region
Thickness properties.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.
Provides a drop-down list of available user-defined face-based Named Selections.
Base Base Frequency: Specify the frequency of the base mesh (displayed mesh). The
Mesh solver uses the Mechanical Mesh at this frequency but modifies it using
Paramet- additional/other frequencies during the solution. This frequency is the frequency
ers used for the acoustics requirements. You can set this property as a parameter.

Morphing Region Thickness: Specify the average thickness of the bodies scoped
to the Morphing Region. You can set this property as a parameter.
Morphing Minimum Frequency: This value defaults to the setting of the Range Minimum
Paramet- property specified in the Options category of the Analysis Settings object. For
ers this default setting, the property displays the entry Minimum Frequency. You can
change this value and the solver will use the value to update the mesh when
solving at a lower frequency.

Maximum Frequency: This value defaults to the setting of the Range Maximum
property specified in the Options category of the Analysis Settings object. For
this default setting, the property displays the entry Maximum Frequency. You can
change this value and the solver will use the value to update the mesh when
solving at a higher frequency.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
538 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Morphing Intervals: The default setting of this property is Each Frequency. You
can enter a value for this property and the solver updates the mesh for every n
number of substeps.
Definition Suppressed: Include or exclude the object from the analysis. Options include No
(default) and Yes.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Object: This object does not support child objects.

Insertion Methods
Use one of the following methods after highlighting Environment object:

• Select the Morphing Region option from the Physics group of the Environment Context tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Morphing Region.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Morphing Region.

Right-click Options
In addition to the common right-click options (p. 2), the object includes the following right-click Insert
menu options:

• Acceleration

• Acoustics > [Supported Acoustics Boundary Conditions].

• Imported Load (p. 359) > External Data

• Commands (p. 91)

API Reference
See the Morphing Region section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the Harmonic Acoustics Analysis section for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 539
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
540 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Named Selections
Manages all imported and/or user-defined Named Selection objects. Both the Named Selections object
(parent object) and the Named Selection object (user-defined child objects) are described in this section.
When you create a Named Selection for your model or if you have imported one or more Named Se-
lection objects, the application automatically creates the parent object, Named Selections. See the
Object Properties for the Named Selection Child Objects (p. 542) topic for descriptions of the properties
of your defined Named Selection objects.

Object Properties for the Named Selections

Parent (p. 542)

Object Properties for the Named Selection Child

Objects (p. 542)

Tree Dependencies (p. 544)

Insertion Methods (p. 544)

Right-click Options - Parent Object (p. 545)

Right-click Options - Child Object (p. 545)

Right-click Options for Multiple Child Objects

Selected (p. 546)

Additional Related Information (p. 546)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 541
Named Selections

As illustrated above, the icon used for a Named Selection corresponds to the geometry or mesh type
(Face, Element, etc.).

Object Properties for the Named Selections Parent

The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

The following applies only to the Named Selections object folder:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Display Show Annotation
Worksheet Based Generate on Refresh: Updates Named Selection criteria automatically
Named Selections following a geometry update.

Generate on Remesh: Updates the Node ids and locations based

on the new mesh.
Statistics Named Selections: Lists the number of Named Selection objects
contained in the folder.

Object Properties for the Named Selection Child Objects

The following properties are available when you select a Named Selection child object:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include:

• Geometry Selection

• Worksheet

Definition Send to Solver: Controls whether the named selection is passed to

the solver. Also see Passing Named Selections to the Solver in the
Meshing User's Guide.

Note:

The solvers supported by Mechanical are the only

solvers that recognize node- and element-based
Named Selections. Therefore, the Send to Solver
feature supports Mechanical solvers only for node-
and element-based Named Selections.

Protected: If your Named Selection includes geometry-contact, this

property specifies if the corresponding contact entities (faces, edges,
or vertices) are protected while meshing. Options include Program
Controlled (default), Yes, and No. Select Program Controlled to
protect the scoped object(s) when the named selection is used for
boundary conditions, symmetry, other types of loads for the solver,
as well as match controls and hard sizing controls for meshing. The

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
542 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
objects will not receive any additional protection by the mesher if
the named selection is not used for one of these controls. Select Yes
to give higher priority to the geometry features the contact is scoped
to and ensure the boundaries are better captured in order to get a
better association between the geometry and mesh. Select No to
indicate that the topology does not need any additional protection.

Send As (Element Face-based Named Selections only): Options

include Nodes (default) and Mesh200. If your Named Selection is
scoped to element faces, the Mesh200 option converts the scoped
element faces to MESH200 elements and sends those elements as
components to the solver.

Visible: For a named selection that you have selected in the tree,
this property displays the geometry, elements, or nodes defining
the name selection in the Geometry window. The default setting is
Yes. Setting this property to No removes the associated geometry
from view in the Geometry window.

Program Controlled Inflation: The options are Include and Exclude

(default). This property enables you to specify the faces of your
Named Selection as inflation boundaries. This setting requires that
the Mesh object (p. 475) property, Use Automatic Inflation, is set
to Program Controlled. Also see the Program Controlled topic in
the Use Automatic Inflation section of the Meshing help.

Preserve During Solve: Displays only for Named Selections defined

using elements. Options include Yes and No (default). You use this
property in combination with the Nonlinear Adaptivity feature. The
Nonlinear Adaptive Region changes your mesh during the solution
to improve precision. Setting this property to Yes tells the application
to update the named selection region during remeshing so that you
can obtain certain results on it for the changed mesh.
Statistics Type: Read-only property whose options include Manual for Named
Selections created in the Mechanical or Imported for Named
Read-only status Selections imported from a CAD application.
indications
Total Selection

Surface Area: Available for Face-based Named Selection only and

displays the surface area of the specified face(s).

Length: Available for Edge-based Named Selection only and displays

the length of the specified edge(s).

Suppressed

Used by Mesh Worksheet: Yes if named selection is being used by

the Mesh worksheet. Also see the description of the Mesh worksheet
in the Meshing help.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 543
Named Selections

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Tolerance Tolerance Type:

(Worksheet-based • Program Controlled: Assigns application default values.

Named Selections
only) • Manual: Makes Zero Tolerance, Relative Tolerance, and
Angular Tolerance properties available for input. Otherwise,
these properties are read-only.

Zero Tolerance: The default value is 1.e-008.

Relative Tolerance: Specified the multiplying factor applied to the

values in the entire Worksheet. The default value is 1.e-003.

Angular Tolerance: Determines when two axes (vectors) are the

same. For example, the normal direction of an element face and the
direction of the selected coordinate systems axes are equal if they
fall within the angular tolerance. The default value is 1°.
Transfer Properties Source: Read-only property that displays the source system for the
imported Named Selection.
(Displays for Named
Selections imported
through the
External Model
Component only)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533) (for Named Selections).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Individual Named Selection objects Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and
Image (p. 283).

Note:

Comment, Figure, and Image are also child objects of individual Named Selection objects.

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods:

• Click Named Selection option from the Insert group in the Home tab.

• Select geometric entities for grouping in the Geometry window, or select Body objects in the
Outline, then select the Named Selection option from the Insert group in the Home tab.

• Select geometric entities in the Geometry window or select Body objects in the Outline and
then right-click and select Create Named Selection.

• Import named selections from a CAD system or from DesignModeler.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
544 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Automatically inserted in the event of a mesher failure so that problem surface bodies can be
identified.

Right-click Options - Parent Object

In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for the Named Selections
parent object include:

• Insert > Named Selection

• Repair Overlapping Named Selections: Corrects overlap conditions in order to property export
Named Selections.

• Generate Named Selections: Updates all named selection child objects that were specified using
the Worksheet. It is a substitute for the Worksheet Generate option to ensure that all worksheet-
based named selection updates are captured.

• Import Selections from CDB File: Available from the Named Selections folder as well as the
Geometry window when the folder is selected, enables you to import element- and node-based
named selections from a Mechanical APDL common database (.cdb) file.

Upon import, the application automatically removes any spaces or special characters from the
file name and replaces them with an underscore.

• Export Selections to CDB File: Available from the Named Selections folder as well as the Geo-
metry window when the folder is selected, enables you to export all of the Named Selections in
the folder in.cdb file format. Note that the application ignores geometry-based Named Selections.

Right-click Options - Child Object

In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for the specified Named
Selections child objects include:

• Insert > Named Selection

• Select Items in Group

• Add to Current Selection

• Remove from Current Selection

• Create Nodal Named Selection

• Merge Selected Named Selections: Available when you select more than one Named Selections
in the tree. It creates a new Worksheet-based Named Selection for the selected Named Selections
objects. The Worksheet displays automatically below the Geometry window when you use this
option (as well as when you select the merge-based Named Selection during subsequent opera-
tions).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545
Named Selections

Right-click Options for Multiple Child Objects Selected

Whenever you select multiple named selection child objects, the following additional context menu
options become available:

• Suppress Bodies in Group

• Hide Face(s)

• Hide Bodies in Group

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Specifying Named Selections

• Named Selection group

• Repairing Geometry in Overlapping Named Selections

• Geometry Preferences

• Named Selection (DesignModeler Help)

• Enclosure (DesignModeler Help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
546 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Node Merge Group
Defines nodes that have been merged on a generated mesh. Multiple Node Merge Group options can
be added as child objects to a Mesh Edit object. Requires mesh generation.

Object Properties (p. 547)

Tree Dependencies (p. 549)

Insertion Methods (p. 549)

Right-click Options (p. 549)

API Reference (p. 549)

Additional Related
Information (p. 549)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object include the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 547
Node Merge Group

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Method: Automatic Node Merge or Manual Node Merge
Scope Scoping Method

Geometry: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry
field, then click Apply.

Named Selection: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named Selec-

tion.

Source Assembly: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Source As-

sembly (Only applicable for Assembled External and Mechanical Models).
Auto Detection Tolerance Type

Tolerance Slider

Tolerance Value

Use Range

Min Distance Percentage

Min Distance Value

Face/Face

Face/Edge

Edge/Edge

Group By: None, Parts, Bodies, and Faces.

Search Across

Face Angle Tolerance: Available only when Face/Edge is set to Yes.

For faces that will be excluded from the proximity detection pair, this
property defines the minimum angle between the faces above which
the two face pairs will be ignored from proximity detection. The default
value is 70°.

Edge Overlap Tolerance: Available only when Face/Edge is set to Yes.

This tolerance value is the minimum percentage that an edge may
overlap the face and is included as a valid proximity detection pair. The
default value is 25%.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the selected group. The default is

No. If set to Yes, the group will be suppressed.
Statistics Connections: Displays the number of connections associated with this
parent object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
548 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Active Connections: Displays the number of connections that are
currently active for this parent object (that is, not Suppressed).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Mesh (p. 475) and Mesh Edit (p. 497).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Node Merge (p. 551), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Node Merge Group object.

• Click Node Merge Group or Node Merge on the Mesh EditContext tab.

• Right-click the Mesh Edit object and select Insert > Node Merge Group or Insert > Node
Merge.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Node Merge Group

– Node Merge

• Generate

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

• Delete Children

API Reference
See the Node Merge Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Editing

• Mesh Edit Context

• Node Merge

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 549
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
550 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Node Merge
Merges pairs of nodes on the mesh. You can choose to merge nodes automatically or manually. This
feature requires mesh generation.

Object Properties (p. 551)

Tree Dependencies (p. 552)

Insertion Methods (p. 552)

Right-click Options (p. 552)

API Reference (p. 553)

Additional Related
Information (p. 553)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method
Primary Geometry – Enabled if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Primary Geometry
field, then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 551
Node Merge

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Secondary Geometry – Enabled if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selec-
tion. In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Secondary
Geometry field, then click Apply.
Primary Bodies – Enabled if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
Secondary Bodies – Enabled if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
Definition Scope Mode: Read-only indication of Manual or Automatic.
Tolerance Type
Tolerance Slider: Appears if Tolerance Type = Tolerance Slider.
Tolerance Value: Appears if Tolerance Type = Tolerance Slider (read-only)
or Tolerance Value.
Thickness Scale Factor: Appears if Tolerance Type = Use Sheet Thickness.
Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Mesh (p. 475) and Mesh Edit (p. 497).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods:

• Click Node Merge on Mesh Edit Context tab.

• Right-click the Mesh Edit object and select Insert > Node Merge.

• Right-click the Node Merge object and select Insert > Node Merge.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Node Merge

• Generate

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Primary/Secondary

• Search Connections for Duplicate Pairs

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
552 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
API Reference
See the Node Merge section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Editing

• Node Merge

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 553
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
554 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Node Move
Selects and moves individual nodes on the mesh. Requires mesh generation.

Object Properties (p. 555)

Tree Dependencies (p. 555)

Insertion Methods (p. 555)

API Reference (p. 556)

Additional Related
Information (p. 556)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Number of Moves

Number of Nodes

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Mesh (p. 475) and Mesh Edit (p. 497).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Mesh Edit object:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 555
Node Move

• Click Node Move option on Mesh Edit Context Tab.

• Right-click the Mesh Edit object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Node Move.

API Reference
See the Node Move section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Editing

• Model Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
556 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Numbering Control
Represents a part, vertex, or Remote Point whose nodes/elements can be renumbered. Any number of
these objects can exist within a Mesh Numbering (p. 501) folder.

Object Properties (p. 557)

Tree Dependencies (p. 558)

Insertion Methods (p. 558)

Right-click Options (p. 558)

API Reference (p. 558)

Additional Related
Information (p. 558)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method - Specify either Geometry Selection or Remote
Point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 557
Numbering Control

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry - Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selec-
tion.
Remote Points - Appears if Scoping Method is set to Remote Point.
Definition Begin Node Number - Appears if Geometry is set to a part.
End Node Number - Appears if Geometry is set to a part.
Begin Element Number - Appears if Geometry is set to a part.
End Element Number - Appears if Geometry is set to a part.
Node Number - Appears if Geometry is set to a vertex or if Remote
Points is set to a specific Remote Point.
Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Mesh Numbering (p. 501).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting Mesh Numbering object:

• Click Numbering Control option on the Mesh Numbering Context tab.

• Right-click the Mesh Numbering object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Num-
bering Control.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Renumber Mesh

API Reference
See the Numbering Control section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Mesh Numbering

• Model Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
558 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Objective
Specifies the structural optimization goal. A Structural Optimization in Mechanical analysis can have
only one Objective object in the tree. The application inserts this object automatically when you create
a Structural Optimization analysis.

Object Properties (p. 559)

Tree Dependencies (p. 559)

Insertion Methods (p. 560)

Right-click Options (p. 560)

API Reference (p. 560)

Additional Related
Information (p. 560)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Objective section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Structural Optimization Environment (p. 211).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 559
Objective

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
The application automatically inserts this object. To add additional Objective objects, highlight the
Structural Optimization environment and:

• Select Objective from the Environment Context.

• Right-click and select Insert > Objective.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [Various Structural Optimization options]

• Commands Objects

API Reference
See the Objective section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

Objective

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
560 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Optimization Region
Specifies the geometric entity on a model that will be optimized using a Structural Optimization analysis.
The application inserts this object automatically when you create a Structural Optimization analysis.

Exclusion Region

The Exclusion Region object is an insertable child object of the Optimization Region object. The Ex-
clusion Region object enables you to specify additional geometric entities (body, face, edge, and ele-
ments) and/or geometry- or element-based Named Selections to the scoping of the Exclusion Region
of the Optimization Region object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 561
Optimization Region

Object
Properties (p. 562)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 562)

Insertion
Methods (p. 563)

Right-click
Options (p. 563)

API
Reference (p. 564)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 564)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Optimization Region section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Structural Optimization Environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Exclusion Region.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
562 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
• Select the Optimization Region option from the Optimization group on the Environment Context
tab.

• Right-click the Structural Optimization object and select Insert > Optimization Region.

• Select either the Environment or the Optimization Region object, right-click in the Geometry window,
and select Insert > Optimization Region.

• Right-click an existing Optimization Region object and select Insert > Optimization Region.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Optimization Region

– Exclusion Region

– Objective (p. 559)

– Mass Constraint (p. 645)

– Volume Constraint (p. 645)

– Criterion Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Global von-Mises Stress Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Local von-Mises Stress Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Displacement Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Reaction Force Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Compliance Constraint (p. 645) (Static Structural Analysis)

– Moment of Inertia Constraint (p. 645)

– Center of Gravity Constraint (p. 645)

– Temperature Constraint (p. 645) (Steady-State Thermal Analysis)

– Natural Frequency Constraint (p. 645) (Modal Analysis)

– Member Size (p. 449)

– Pull out Direction (p. 449)

– Extrusion (p. 449)

– Cyclic (p. 449)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 563
Optimization Region

– Symmetry (p. 449)

– AM Overhang Constraint (p. 449)

– Commands Objects

• Group Similar Objects

API Reference
See theOptimization Region section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Optimization Region

• Structural Optimization

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
564 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Part
Defines a component of the attached geometry included under a Geometry (p. 265) object. The Part
object is assumed to be a multibody part with Body objects beneath it as depicted in the figure below.
The Part object label in your Project tree inherits the name from the CAD application you use to create
the part and may differ based on the CAD application. Refer to the Body (p. 55) objects reference page
if the Geometry object does not include a multibody part, but instead only includes individual bodies.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 565
Part

Object
Properties (p. 566)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 568)

Insertion
Methods (p. 568)

Right-click
Options (p. 568)

API
Reference (p. 569)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 569)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Graphics Properties The following properties enable you to change the graphical
display of a part.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
566 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Visible: Toggles the display of the part On or Off in the
Geometry window.
Transparency
Color
Definition Suppressed
Assignment: Specify a desired material for the part. This
property can be designated as a parameter.
Brick Integration Scheme: Appears only if Element Control
is set to Manual in the Details view of the Geometry (p. 265)
object.
Coordinate System (p. 161): Assign a local coordinate system
to specify the alignment of the elements of the part if
previously defined using one or more Coordinate
System (p. 161) objects; not available if Stiffness Behavior
is set to Rigid.
Bounding Box Length X
Length Y
Length Z
Properties - Read-only Volume
indication of the
properties originally Mass: Appears only in the Mechanical application.
assigned to the part.
Note:

• If the material density is temperature dependent,

the Mass is computed at the body temperature, or
at 22° C (default temperature for an environment).

Centroid X
Centroid Y
Centroid Z
Moment of Inertia Ip1
Moment of Inertia Ip2
Moment of Inertia Ip3
Surface Area (approx.): Appears only for a surface body.
Statistics - Read-only Nodes
indication of the entities
that comprise the part. Elements
Mesh Metric

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 567
Part

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Body (p. 55), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Appears by default when geometry is attached that includes a multibody part.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Element Orientation

• Update

• Generate Mesh

• Preview >

– Surface Mesh

– Inflation

• Freeze Mesh

• Show/Hide Body

• Show/Hide All Other Bodies

• Hide or Show > Solid Bodies/Surface Bodies/Line Bodies (option availability based on body
type)

• Suppress Body/Unsuppress Body

• Suppress All Other Bodies/Unsuppress All Bodies

• Invert Suppressed Body Set

• Create Named Selection

• Create Material Assignment

• Create Material Plot (p. 465)

• Transform Part

• Delete Part(s)

• Export > Geometry

• Update Selected Parts > Update: Use Geometry Parameter Values

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
568 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Part section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

Attach Geometry/Mesh.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 569
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
570 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Part Transform
Changes the position and/or orientation of parts on your model.

Object
Properties (p. 571)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 572)

Insertion
Methods (p. 572)

Right-click
Options (p. 573)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 573)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Parts: Select the entry field of this property, select the desired part or
parts child objects from the Geometry object in the Outline, and then

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 571
Part Transform

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
select the Apply button that displays automatically. Once specified, this
field displays the number of part objects you have selected (for example,
1 Part, 2 Parts, etc.).
Definition Suppress: Include or exclude the selected geometry from the
transformation.

Important:

The application automatically transforms all parts

whether suppressed or unsuppressed. This makes sure
that all transformations are available in case you
unsuppress the part at a later time.

Define By: Options include Rotation and Translation (default) and

Coordinate System.

Rotation and Translation

For the Rotation and Translation setting, the following properties

are available:

• Coordinate System

• Translate X/Translate Y/Translate Z

• Rotate X/Rotate Y/Rotate Z

Coordinate System

For the Coordinate System setting, the following properties are

available:

• Coordinate System

• Target Coordinate System

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Transforms (p. 779).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Comment (p. 97).

Insertion Methods
• With either the Transforms or an existing Part Transform object selected, select Part Transform
option on Transforms Context.

• Right-click theTransforms object, on an existing Part Transform object, or in the Geometry window
and select Insert > Part Transform.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
572 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Select the parts/bodies you wish to transform from the Geometry object or on your model in the
Geometry window, right-click, and then select Transform Part.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Part Transform

• Show All Bodies

• Invert Visibility

• Transform

• Suppress/Unsuppress

Additional Related Information

Specifying Part Transformations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 573
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
574 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Path
Represents a spatial curve to which you can scope results. The results are evaluated at discrete points
along this curve.

Object
Properties (p. 575)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 576)

Insertion
Methods (p. 577)

Right-click
Options (p. 577)

API
Reference (p. 577)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 577)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 575
Path

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Path Type: The display of the various other Details view properties
change based on the selection for this property. The options include:
Two Points (default), Edge, and X Axis Intersection.

Path Coordinate System

Number of Sampling Points

Suppressed
Start Coordinate System

Start X Coordinate

Start Y Coordinate

Start Z Coordinate

Location
End Coordinate System

End X Coordinate

End Y Coordinate

End Z Coordinate

Location
Scope (Path Type = Scoping Method. The options for this property include:
Edge Only)
• Geometry Selection (default): Indicates that design region is
applied to a geometry or geometries, which are chosen using a
graphical selection tools.

When you specify Geometry Selection for the Scoping Method,

the Geometry property also displays.

• Named Selection: Indicates that the geometry selection is

defined by a Named Selection.

When you specify Named Selection for the Scoping Method,

the Named Selection property also displays. This property
provides a drop-down list of available user-defined Named
Selections.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Construction Geometry (p. 139).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
576 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
• Select the Path option from the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context
Tab.

• Select the Path option from the Create group on the Construction Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click the Construction Geometry object and select Insert > Path.

• Select the Construction Geometry object, right-click in the Geometry window, and select Insert >
Path.

• Right-click an existing Path object and select Insert > Path.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Snap to Mesh Nodes

• Flip Path Orientation

• Export

API Reference
See the Path section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Specifying a Path

• Specifying Construction Geometry

• Construction Geometry Object Reference (p. 139)

• Surface Object Reference (p. 747)

• Solid Object Reference (p. 699)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 577
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
578 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Periodic/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region
Define individual planes for periodic conditions, anti-periodic conditions, cyclic conditions, or pre-meshed
cyclic conditions. The Periodic Region/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region objects are child
objects of the Symmetry (p. 753) object.

Period Region Object Object

Properties (p. 581)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 582)

Insertion
Methods (p. 582)

Right-click
Options (p. 582)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 583)

Cyclic Region Object

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 579
Periodic/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region

Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region Object

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
580 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Low Boundary: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection.

High Boundary: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection.

Low Selection: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 581
Periodic/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
High Selection: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named
Selection.
Definition Scope Mode

Type: Not supported for Cyclic Region.

Number of Sectors (Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region only): The entry

range is any real number greater than 2.

Coordinate System

Suppressed

Boundary DOF Orientation (Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region only):

Options include Chosen by Solver (default) and Manual. The
Chosen by Solver option instructs the solver to automatically
assign nodal DOFs at the sector boundary and the Manual option
requires you to specify the orientations using Nodal Orientation.
See the direct FE example in the Pre-Meshed Cyclic Symmetry
section for a discussion on the solver's DOF requirements and
how to apply them in Mechanical APDL Solver with Nodal
Orientation objects.
Tolerance - Pre- Relative Distance Tolerance: The default setting is Program
Meshed Cyclic Region Controlled and this setting uses a value of -0.0001.
Only.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Symmetry (p. 753).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Symmetry (p. 753) object:

• Select Periodic Region/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region on Symmetry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Symmetry (p. 753) object or on an existing Periodic Region/Cyclic Region or
Symmetry Region object or in the Geometry window and then select Insert > Periodic Re-
gion/Cyclic Region/Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Symmetry Region

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
582 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Linear Periodic

– Cyclic Region

• Flip High/Low

Additional Related Information

• Symmetry

• Symmetry Workflow in Mechanical

• Symmetry Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 583
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
584 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Physics Region
Defines a distinct location in your simulation domain for which you define the type of physics that will
be solved.

Acoustic Analyses
During an acoustic analysis, an Acoustics Region and/or a Structural Region object are automatically
included in the Outline. Both of these objects are Physics Region objects. You use them to specify the
geometry bodies that belong to the Structural or Acoustics physics type. All of the bodies must have
a physics type associated via Physics Region objects.

Coupled Field Analyses

During a Coupled Field analysis, a Physics Region object is automatically included in the Outline. You
use this object to specify the geometry bodies that belong to the Structural, Acoustics, Electric, Thermal
or some supported combination of these types. All of the bodies must have a physics type specified
by a Physics Region object.

Note:

The Show Coupled Physics Analysis setting, available in the Graphics category of the
preferences dialog, enables you to display the bodies and/or parts associated with each
properly defined Physics Region as a different color when the Environment (p. 211) object
is selected.

Acoustics and Structural Region objects for a Static Acoustics Object

analysis: Properties (p. 586)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 585
Physics Region

Tree
Dependencies (p. 590)

Insertion
Methods (p. 590)

Right-click
Options (p. 590)

API
Reference (p. 591)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 591)

Physics Region object for a Coupled Field Static analysis:

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named
Selection.

Geometry (Body selection only): Visible when the Scoping Method

property is set to Geometry Selection. You use this property to
specify the body or bodies belonging to structural or acoustic physics
(using the properties below). Use the Body selection filter to pick

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
586 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
your geometry, click in the Geometry field, and then click the Apply
button that displays. After you select the geometry, this property
displays the geometric entities (1 Body, 3 Bodies, etc.).
Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method property is
set to Named Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of
available user–defined (and body-based) Named Selections.
Definition Structural: Specify the selected geometry or geometries as Structural.
The default setting depends upon the analysis type.

Acoustics: Specify the selected geometry or geometries (solid bodies

only) as Acoustic. The default setting depends upon the analysis type.

Thermal: Specify the selected geometry or geometries (solid bodies

only) as Thermal for a coupled field analysis. The default setting is Yes.

Electric: Options include No, Charge, and Conduction. Specify the

selected geometry or geometries as Electric. This property also specifies
the formulation type, whether it is a charge-based formulation or
current-based formulation. The default setting depends upon the analysis
type.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the object. The default setting is

No.
Coupling Options Thermal Strain: This property is visible when the Thermal and Struc-
(Coupled Field tural properties above are set to Yes. You use this property to specify
Analyses Only) the coupling method for a structural-thermal physics problem. Options
include Program Controlled (default), Strong, and Weak. The setting
of the Program Controlled option varies based on the selected physics
as well as the selected solver.

• During a Structural Thermal Electric Conduction analysis, the

Program Controlled option uses the Strong setting. However,
if you select the Iterative solver, the application uses the Weak
setting.

• During a Structural Thermal analysis, the Program Controlled

option always uses the Strong setting.

Thermoelastic Damping: This property is visible for a Coupled Field

Transient analysis when the Thermal and Structural properties above
are set to Yes. Options include On and Off (default).

Piezoelectric: When the Structural property is set to Yes and the

Electric property is set to Charge, this read-only property indicates that
the selected region is a piezoelectric region. If the material assignment
of any body scoped to the Physics Region includes a piezoelectric
matrix, defined in the Engineering Data workspace, this property is
activated and automatically set to On. Otherwise, it is set to Off.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 587
Physics Region

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Electrostatic Force: For a Coupled Field Static and Coupled Field
Transient analyses when the Structural property is set to Yes and the
Electric property is set to Charge, this property indicates that the
selected region includes electrostatic structural coupling defined. It
applies an electrostatic force to the scoped bodies based on the
following options:

• No (default): No electrostatic force is applied.

• Applied To All Nodes: Electrostatic Force is applied to each

element node.

• Applied To Air Structure Interface (Symmetric): Electrostatic

force is applied to the air-structure interface or to element nodes
that have constrained structural degrees of freedom. This option
produces a symmetric force coupling matrix by ignoring some
of the terms associated with the nodes of the interior air domain.
For this setting, Ansys recommends that you use a single layer
low-order (no mid-side nodes) mesh of elastic air elements.

• Applied To Air Structure Interface (Unsymmetric): Electrostatic

force is applied to the air-structure interface or to element nodes
that have constrained structural degrees of freedom. All terms
of the force coupling matrix are retained, which produces an
unsymmetric matrix. For this setting, Ansys recommends models
that include multiple layers of elastic air elements.

Note:

These options are also available for static coupling when

applied as an upstream system for a prestressed
Coupled Field Harmonic analysis.

Acoustic Domain Artificially Matched Layers: Options include Off (default), PML, and
Definition (Visible for Irregular PML. When you select PML or Irregular PML, a new PML
Acoustic Definition Options category displays in the details view that enable you to define
Only) the PML options, as described below.

Important:

For a Static Acoustics analysis, if you activate this

property, downstream Modal systems become invalid.

For additional information, see the Artificially Matched Layers section

in the Mechanical APDL Acoustic Analysis Guide.

Element Morphing: Enables you to specify that the mesh for the bodies
selected by the Acoustics Region can be updated, that is, morphed,
due to any deflection of the Structural Region. Options include

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
588 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Program Controlled (default), Off, and On. The Yes setting specifies
the mesh of the selected bodies is morphed and when Program
Controlled, the setting considers the following:

• If the Large Deflection property is set to Off, the KEYOPT for the
MORPH command is deactivated.

• If the Large Deflection property is set to On, the KEYOPT for the
MORPH command is activated for acoustic bodies connected to
structural bodies. This also requires that (1) the Artificially
Matched Layers property is not active, (2) the body is not
connected to absorbing elements or contact conditions.

Note:

Acoustic elements do not affect a Static Acoustics

analysis other than for a morphed mesh.

Piezoelectric Do- Perfectly Matched Layers: Options include Off (default) and PML. When
main Definition you select PML, and Options category displays in the Details that
(Visible for enables you to define the PML Options properties, as described below.
Piezoelectric
Coupling in Coupled
Field Harmonic
analyses)
Structural Domain Perfectly Matched Layers: Options include Off (default) and PML. When
Definition (Visible you select PML, and Options category displays in the Details that
only when the enables you to define the PML Options properties, as described below.
Structural physics
property set to Yes in
Coupled Field
Harmonic analysis)
PML Options (Visible PML Element Coordinate System: The Global Coordinate System is
when Artificially the default setting.
Matched Layers or
Perfectly Matched PML Options: Options include 3D PML (default) and 1D PML.
Layers property is set
to PML) Reflection Coefficients: Options include Program Controlled (default)
and Manual. When this property is set to Manual, the following
additional properties display based upon the setting of the PML Options
property, either:

3D PML Setting 1D PML

Setting
--Value in -X -- Value
Direction
--Value in +X
Direction

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 589
Physics Region

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
-- Value in -Y
Direction
-- Value in +Y
Direction
-- Value in -Z
Direction
-- Value in +Z
Direction

Evanescent Wave Attenuation: Options include No (default) and Yes.

For additional information, see the Perfectly Matched Layers (PML)

section in the Mechanical APDL Acoustic Analysis Guide.
Irregular PML Reflection Coefficients
(Visible for Acoustic
analyses when Artifi- Evanescent Wave Attenuation: Options include No (default) and Yes.
cially Matched Lay-
ers property set to For additional information, see the Irregular Perfectly Matched Layers
Irregular PML) (IPML) section in the Mechanical APDL Acoustic Analysis Guide.
Advanced (Visible for Reference Pressure: Enter a Reference Pressure value. The default value
Acoustic Definition is 2e-5 Pa.
Only)
Reference Static Pressure: Enter a Reference Static Pressure value. The
default value is 101325 Pa.

Fluid Behavior: Specify the compressibility of the fluid. Available options

are Compressible (default) or Incompressible.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The Environment (p. 211) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No current child objects are supported for this object.

Insertion Methods
This object is automatically inserted into the Outline when you open the analysis type in Mechanical.
Additional objects can be inserted. Select the analysis's environment object, and:

• Right-mouse click and select Insert > Physics Region.

Or...

• Select the Physics Region option on the Evironment Context tab.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
590 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Insert >

– Physics Region

– [Various loads and supports. See Load Type Boundary Conditions]

– Commands (p. 91)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

Note:

See the associated analysis type section for the supported loads for each analysis type.

Note:

For more detailed information about setting the Acoustic Domain Definition and Acoustic
FSI Definition, see the Elements for Acoustic Analysis section of the Mechanical APDL Element
Reference.

API Reference
See the Physics Region section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

For more information on acoustic domain definition and FSI definition properties, refer to Elements for
Acoustic Analysis section in the Mechanical APDL Element Reference

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 591
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
592 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Point Mass
Represents the inertial effects from a body.

Object
Properties (p. 594)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 595)

Insertion
Methods (p. 595)

Right-click
Options (p. 595)

API
Reference (p. 596)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 596)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 593
Point Mass

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping method: Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named
Selection or Remote Point (only available when a user-defined
Remote Point exists in the tree).

Geometry: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection. Displays the type of geometry (Body, Face, etc.) and the
number of geometric entities (for example: 1 Body, 2 Edges) to which
the boundary has been applied using the selection tools. Use
selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field, then
click Apply. The Remote Attachment option is the required Applied
By property (see below) setting if the geometry scoping is to a single
face or multiple faces, a single edge or multiple edges, or multiple
vertices.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of available
user–defined Named Selections.

Remote Points: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Remote

Point. This field provides a drop-down list of available user–defined
Remote Point.

Applied By: Specify as Remote Attachment (default) or Direct At-

tachment.

Coordinate System: Aligns the inertial axes of the Point Mass with
a local coordinate system. The local system must have been previously
defined by one or more Coordinate System objects. For the Rigid
Dynamics and Explicit Dynamics solvers, the Mass Moment of Inertia
axes also align to this coordinate system. For the Mechanical APDL
Solver, by default, the Mass Moment of Inertia axes align to the Global
Coordinate System.

X Coordinate: Define X coordinate location. You can set this property

as a parameter.

Y Coordinate: Define Y coordinate location. You can set this property

as a parameter.

Z Coordinate: Define Z coordinate location. You can set this property

as a parameter.

Location: Change location of the load. Pick new location, click in the
Location field, then click Apply.
Definition Mass: Define mass; can be designated as a parameter.

Mass Moment of Inertia X: Available for 3D models only.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
594 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mass Moment of Inertia Y: Available for 3D models only.

Mass Moment of Inertia Z: Available for 3D models only.

Suppressed

Behavior

Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.

Select a material to define material properties for the beams used
in the connection. Density is excluded from the material definition.

Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam. Specify

a radius to define the cross section dimension of the circular beam
used for the connection.

Pinball Region

Element APDL Name: This property enables you to assign an APDL

parameter name to the mass element type. Using this name, you
can programmatically identify the mass element type and real
constant set that you can reference and use in a Commands
(APDL) (p. 91) object.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Geometry (p. 265) object or a Body object:

• Select the Point option from the Mass group on the Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Point Mass.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Point Mass

– Distributed Mass

– Surface Coating

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 595
Point Mass

– Commands (APDL)

• Suppress

• Promote Remote Point (Remote Attachment Only)

API Reference
See the Point Mass section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Point Mass application

• Coordinate Systems

• Geometry Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
596 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Predefined Support
Identifies a support structure that was imported with your part geometry for Additive Manufacturing
simulations. Supports are modelled as elements between the Build Geometry and the Base Plate
Geometry.

Object Properties (p. 597)

Tree Dependencies (p. 599)

Insertion Methods (p. 599)

Right-click Options (p. 599)

API Reference (p. 599)

Additional Related
Information (p. 599)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 597
Predefined Support

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default)
and Named Selections.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry

Selection.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to

Named Selection. Select a desired Named Selection from the
drop-down menu.
Support Material Support Type: Options include User Defined (default) and Block.
Settings When you select the Block option, the following properties become
the only visible properties.

• Wall Thickness: Enter a thickness value (illustrated by T length

below).

• Wall Spacing: Enter a spacing value (illustrated by L length

below).

Multiplier Entry: Options include All (default) and Manual.

Material Multiplier

All Setting

When the Multiplier Entry property is set to All, the Mater-

ial Multiplier property displays. The Material Multiplier
property applies the same value to all of the material
multipliers listed below. The multiplication factors are
homogenization factors and, in each direction, reflect the
ratio of the support area projected onto the area of a fully
solid support.

Manual Setting

When the Multiplier Entry property is set to Manual, the

following multiplier properties display:

• Elastic Modulus Multiple in X/Y/Z

• Shear Modulus Multiple in XY/YZ/XZ

• Density Multiple

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
598 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Thermal Conductivity Multiple in X/Y/Z

Statistics Volume: Read-only property that displays the volume of the added
finite element body.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Support Group (p. 743), which is under AM Process (p. 21) object.

• Valid Child Tree Object: This object does not support any child objects.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Support Group object and then select the Predefined option from the Supports group
of the AM Process Context Tab.

• Right-click the Support Group object and then select the Insert > Predefined Support.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert

– Predefined Support (p. 597)

– Generated Support (p. 261)

– STL Support (p. 727)

– Commands (p. 91)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Predefined AM Support section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• LPBF Simulation Guide

• Identify and/or Generate Supports

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 599
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
600 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Primary Criterion
Specify scalar-based results on the mesh using the Measures (p. 473) object, or on the solution, of an
upstream Static Structural or Modal system. It then ables you to quantify the performance of your current
design or the performance of a downstream Structural Optimization design.

Object Properties for the Measures

Object (p. 602)

Object Properties for Static Structural

Analysis (p. 603)

Object Properties for Modal

Analysis (p. 603)

Tree Dependencies (p. 604)

Insertion Methods (p. 604)

Right-click Options (p. 605)

Additional Related Information (p. 605)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 601
Primary Criterion

Object Properties
As shown below, the properties available for this object depend upon whether you are inserting the
object under a Measures object (for use on the mesh) or whether you are using it under the Solution
folder of a Static Structural or Modal analysis.

Measures Object

For the Measures (p. 473) object, the Details properties for Composite Criteria object include the
following.

Category Property/Description
Scoping Scoping Method: options for this property include:

• Geometry (default): Displays an associated Geometry selection property

you use to select a geometric entity using the Vertex, Edge, Face, or
Body selection options.

• Named Selection: Displays an associated Named Selection property you

use to select an available user–defined Named Selection.
Defini- Base Result: This property specifies the type of nodal vector field from which
tion the extraction occurs. Base Result property options for this analysis type include
Mass, Volume, Center of Gravity, and Moment of Inertia.

Suppressed/Unsuppressed: Options include Yes and No (default).

Compon- Coordinate System: This property provides a drop-down list of available
ent Re- coordinate systems. The selected coordinate system must be Cartesian. The
duction default setting is Global Coordinate System.

Note:

When the Base Result property is set to Moment of Inertia,

this property also includes and is automatically set to the option
Coordinate System At Center Of Gravity. This option to always
compute at the center of gravity of the scoped geometry.

Reduction: You use this property to specify the component of interest.

• When the Base Result property is set to Center of Gravity, options

include: X, Y or Z.

• When the Base Result property is set to Moment of Inertia, options

include the six tensor components, Ixx, Iyy, Izz, Ixy, Ixz, Iyz.

Component Reduction: You use this property to specify the axial component
from which to extract node values.
Results Value: This read-only property displays the calculated mass, volume, center of
gravity, or moment of inertia. You can parameterize this value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
602 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Static Structural Analysis

For a Static Structural analysis, the Details properties for Primary Criterion object include the fol-
lowing.

Category Property/Description
Scoping Scoping Method: options for this property include:

• Geometry (default): Displays an associated Geometry selection property

you use to select a geometric entity using the Vertex, Edge, Face, or
Body selection options.

• Named Selection: Displays an associated Named Selection property you

use to select an available user–defined Named Selection.

• Remote Point: Displays an associated Remote Point property you use

to select an available user–defined Remote Point.

• Boundary Condition: Displays an associated Boundary Condition

property you use to select either a Remote Force, Moment, or a Remote
Displacement (the three supported boundary conditions).
Defini- Base Result: This property specifies the type of nodal vector field from which
tion the extraction occurs. Base Result property options for this analysis type include
Displacement, Rotation, Reaction Force, and Reaction Moment.

Suppressed/Unsuppressed: Options include Yes and No (default).

Load Step: Specify the desired Load Step for which to compute the criterion.
Step Se-
lection
Compon- Coordinate System: This is a read-only property set to Global Coordinate
ent Re- System.
duction
Component Reduction: You use this property to specify the axial component
from which to extract node values.
Spatial Spatial Reduction: This property enables you to specify the computation
Reduc- method to produce a scalar value from the vector field on multiple nodes.
tion Options include Average (default) and Absolute Maximum for
Displacement-based results, and Sum for Reaction Force-based results.

Method: Currently this property supports only one option: Discrete.

Results Value: This read-only property displays the calculated displacement, rotation,
force, or torque. You can parameterize this value.

Modal Analysis

For a Modal analysis, the Details properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 603
Primary Criterion

Category Property/Description
Defini- Base Result. The options for this property include:
tion
• Single Frequency (default): Using this option, the application controls
the i-th eigenfrequency that you have selected in the mode number.
During the optimization the mode order may change, but the optimizer
only focuses on the selected i-th eigenfrequency.

• Robust Frequencies: Using this option, the application controls the i-th
eigenfrequency that you have selected in the mode number, but also
takes into account the presence of the other eigenfrequencies per a
weighted sum. The purpose of this option is to better manage the
mode-crossing effect, that is, modes order can change drastically during
the solution and as a result, cause the solver to prematurely converge
and produce an undesirable design.

Frequency Reduction: This property displays when you set the Base Result
property to Robust Frequencies. Options for this property include Average
and Smooth Minimum.

Mode Number: Specify a Mode Number corresponding to the eigenfrequency

you wish to observe. The default setting is 1. The entry range depends on the
number of modes that you have requested in the upstream modal analysis
(default setting of 6).
Results Value: This read-only property displays the calculated frequency or frequencies.
You can parameterize this value.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Model (p. 533) for Measures object and the Solution (p. 703) folder for
Static Structural or Modal analyses.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: This object does not support child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add this object to the Outline from the:

Measures Object

Select the Model object and then select Measures from the Define group on the Model Context
tab. Once the Measures object is inserted, the Primary Criterion option is available from the
Measures Context tab, or by right-clicking the Measures object and selecting Insert > Primary
Criterion.

Static Structural or Modal Analyses

Select the Solution object and then select the Primary Criterion option from the Solution Context
tab, or right-click the Solution object and select Insert > User Defined Criteria > Primary Criterion.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
604 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert: Options include Primary Criterion and Composite Criteria. When the object is inserted
under the Solution (p. 703) folder, additional options are available.

• Evaluate All Measures (Measures object only): This option calculates a Result property value
for all defined criteria objects. Available for the Measures object as well as all child objects.

• Evaluate All Results (Solution object).

• Rename Based on Definition: The application automatically renames the criterion objects based
on Base Result type. For example, when the Base Result property for a Primary Criterion object
is set to Mass, the object would be automatically renamed Mass Criteria.

• Clear Generated Data: Clears all object data.

Additional Related Information

See the User Defined Criteria section of the Mechanical User's Guide for the steps to use this object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 605
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
606 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Pre-Meshed Crack
Defines a crack that is based on a previously generated mesh and used to analyze crack fronts based
on a Named Selection.

Object Properties (p. 607)

Tree Dependencies (p. 609)

Insertion Methods (p. 609)

Right-click Options (p. 609)

API Reference (p. 609)

Additional Related
Information (p. 609)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 607
Pre-Meshed Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only field indicating the type of crack definition.

Scoping Method: Read-only and always set to Named Selection

when defining pre-meshed cracks.

Crack Tip (Named Selection): Assign the scoping of the Pre-Meshed

Crack to a valid Named Selection. Click in the Named Selection field
and select a node-based named selection. This option is only
applicable to 2D analysis.

Crack Front (Named Selection): Assign the scoping of the Pre-Meshed

Crack to a valid Named Selection. Click in the Named Selection field
and select a named selection consisting of nodes. This option is only
applicable to 3D analysis.

Crack Faces Nodes: Turn this property On to specify the crack top
face and bottom face node-based Named Selections. The default
setting is Off. This option is only applicable to 3D analysis. When
set to On, the following additional properties display:

• Top Face Nodes: Specify the top face (nodes) of the crack
by selecting a valid node-based named selection from the
drop-down list.

• Bottom Face Nodes: Specify the bottom face (nodes) of the

crack by selecting a valid node-based named selection from
the drop-down list.

Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system

generated identification number ID for the crack object. The
application uses this identifier when creating solution identifiers for
fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the coordinate system that defines

the position and orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified
coordinate system defines the crack surface normal. The origin of
the coordinate system represents the open side of the crack. You
can select the default coordinate system or a local coordinate system
that you have defined. The default is the Global Coordinate System.
The valid coordinate system must be of type Cartesian.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of contours for which you

want to compute the fracture result parameters.

Symmetry: Specifies the crack symmetry about a line (in 2D analysis)

or about a plane (in 3D analysis). The default is No.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Pre-Meshed Crack object

on and off. The default is No. The Pre-Meshed Crack object is
suppressed automatically if the scoped named selection is
suppressed.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
608 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Pre-Meshed Crack option from the Crack group on
the Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the
menu. Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Pre-Meshed Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Pre-Meshed Crack

• Performing a Fracture Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 609
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
610 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Pre-Stress
Defines an upstream structural analysis whose stress results are to be used in a Prestressed Coupled
Field Harmonic Analysis, Prestressed Coupled Field Modal Analysis, Harmonic Acoustics Analysis, Har-
monic Response Analysis, Modal Analysis, or Modal Acoustics Analysis, whose stress-stiffening effects
are to be used in a Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis, or whose stresses, strains, and/or displacements, or
velocities are to be used in an Explicit Dynamics Analysis.

Pre-Stress Object for Harmonic Response Object

Properties (p. 614)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 616)

Insertion
Methods (p. 616)

API
Reference (p. 616)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 616)

Pre-Stress Object for Modal

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 611
Pre-Stress

Pre-Stress Object for Eigenvalue Buckling

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
612 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Pre-Stress Object for Explicit Dynamics

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 613
Pre-Stress

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Pre-Stress Environment: Using this property, you specify the upstream structural
analysis you wish to link to the current analysis. The application uses the stress
results from the specified structural analysis in the current analysis.

Eigenvalue Buckling, Harmonic Response, Modal, or Substructure Generation

Environments Only:

Pre-Stress Define By: Specify this property as Program Controlled (default),

Load Step, or Time.
Pre-Stress Loadstep: Displays when Pre-Stress Define By is specified as
Load Step. Enter the load step of Static Structural analysis that you’ll use
as the starting point to begin your Harmonic Response, Modal, or
Eigenvalue Buckling analysis. The default value is Last.
Pre-Stress Time: Displays when Pre-Stress Define By is specified as Time.
Enter the time from the Static Structural analysis that you want to use as

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
614 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
the starting point to begin your Harmonic Response, Modal, or Eigenvalue
Buckling analysis. The default value is End Time.
Reported Loadstep: Read-only field.
Reported Substep: Read-only field.
Reported Time: Read-only field.
Contact Status: Options include Use True Status, Force Sticking, Force
Bonded.
Newton-Raphson Option: Read-only field for Pre-Stressed Modal Analyses.
Indicates whether the property was selected in the prestressed
environment. Options include Program Controlled, Full, Modified, and
Unsymmetric.

Coupled Field Modal, Coupled Field Harmonic, and Substructure Generation

Analyses Only

For the above analysis types, the application displays the Load Control
property. You use this property to define load generation for prestressed
analyses. Property options include:

• Keep All: Keep all the boundary conditions (loads and constraints)
from the end of the load step of the current restart point.

• Keep Inertia and Displacement Constraints (default for Substructure

Generation): Keeps Inertial loads and Displacement constraints All
other loads and constraints are deleted.

• Keep Displacement Constraints: All displacement constraints are

kept, which includes zero and non-zero displacements.

• Keep All Displacements as Zero (default for Coupled Field analyses):

All displacement constraints are kept and all non-zero constrains are
set to zero.

• Delete All: Deletes all loads and constraints.

Note:

This property controls the LoadControl field of the Mechanical APDL

PERTURB command.

Explicit Dynamics Environment Only:

Mode: Specify this property as Displacement or Material State.

Time Step Factor: Displays when Mode is specified as Displacement.
Pressure Initialization: Displays when Mode is specified as Material State.
Specify this property as From Deformed State (default) or From Stress
Trace.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 615
Pre-Stress

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Time: The time at which results are extracted from the implicit analysis.

Tree Dependencies
The Pre-Stress object has the following Outline structure.

• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Coupled Field Harmonic, Coupled Field Modal, Harmonic
Acoustics, Harmonic Response, Modal, Modal Acoustics, Eigenvalue Buckling, Explicit Dy-
namics, or Substructure Generation environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
The object appears automatically for Coupled Field Harmonic, Coupled Field Modal, Harmonic Acoustics,
Modal Acoustics, Harmonic Response, Modal, Eigenvalue Buckling, Explicit Dynamics, and Substructure
Generation analyses.

API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Prestressed Coupled Field Harmonic • Eigenvalue Buckling Analysis

Analysis
• Explicit Dynamics Analysis Guide
• Prestressed Coupled Field Modal Analysis
• Substructure Generation Analysis
• Harmonic Response (Full) Analysis Using
Pre-Stressed Structural System • Define Initial Conditions

• Modal Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
616 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Probe
Determines results at a point on a model or finds minimum or maximum results on a body, face, vertex,
or edge.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 617
Probe

Object
Properties (p. 618)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 619)

Insertion
Methods (p. 619)

Right-click
Options (p. 619)

API
Reference (p. 619)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 619)

Object Properties
See the Probe Details View section.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
618 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Use any of the following methods after highlighting Solution (p. 703) object or an existing Probe
object:

– Choose Probe > {specific probe} on the Solution Context Tab.

– Right-click the Solution (p. 703) object or in the Geometry window Insert > Probe > {specific
probe}.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Evaluate All Results

API Reference
See the Probe section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Probes

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 619
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
620 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Project
Includes all objects in the Mechanical application and represents the highest level in the object tree.
Only one Project can exist per Mechanical session.

Note:

In the Outline, this object displays with an asterisk (*) until you save the database/project.

Object
Properties (p. 622)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 622)

Insertion
Methods (p. 622)

Right-click
Options (p. 623)

API
Reference (p. 623)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 621
Project

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Title Page: You can Author
enter the following
information that will Subject
appear on the title
page of the report. Prepared for
Information: The First Saved
Mechanical
application provides Last Saved
the following
information that will Product Version
appear on the title
page of the report.
Project data Man- Save Project Before Solution: Saves the entire project immediately
agement before solving (after any required meshing). If the project had never
been previously saved, you can now select a location to save a new
file.

Save Project After Solution: Saves the project immediately after

solving but before postprocessing. If the project had never been
previously saved, nothing will be saved.

Note:

• The default values can be specified in Tools > Options

under the Miscellaneous section.

• The Save Options defaults are applicable only to new

projects. These settings will not be changed for existing
projects.

• These properties are not supported if you are using the

Workbench System Coupling component system in
combination with your Mechanical analysis.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: None. This object is the highest level in the tree.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Model (p. 533).

Insertion Methods
Automatically included in all Mechanical systems.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
622 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Solve

• Clear Generated Data

• Open Project Files Directory: Open the file manager and display the project directory.

API Reference
See the Project section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 623
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
624 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Pull
Extrudes and revolves element faces, geometric faces or scoped bodies (only shell body) from a surface
or solid mesh. Pull also enables you to create a surface coating on solid bodies, faces of 3D bodies,
element faces (requires mesh), and the edges of 2D axisymmetric surface bodies.

Note:

For the Extrude and Revolve options, you can automatically apply your extrusion or revolution
to Named Selections scoped to the Pull body using the Associate To Pull Geometry property
of the Mesh Edit object. See the Associating Named Selections To Pull Geometries section
for the steps to use this feature.

Object Properties (p. 625)

Tree Dependencies (p. 626)

Insertion Methods (p. 626)

Right-click Options (p. 626)

API Reference (p. 626)

Additional Related
Information (p. 626)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Pull section of the Meshing User's Guide.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 625
Pull

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Mesh (p. 475) and Mesh Edit (p. 497).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after selecting the Mesh or Mesh Edit object:

• Click Pull option on Mesh Edit Context Tab.

• Right-click the Mesh or Mesh Edit object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Pull.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Generate

• Clear Generated Data

• Suppressed

• Disable Transparency

• Show All Bodies

• Invert Visibility

API Reference
See the Mesh Extrude section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Mesh Editing

• Model Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
626 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Python Code
Executes Python code in response to events occurring in Mechanical for a given workflow. When inserted,
an editor pane displays automatically and includes features such as auto-completion and syntax high-
lighting. The events related to Python code execution can be split into two main categories:

• During the solution process when the input file is created. Python Code objects can query in-
formation about the Mechanical data model (objects) and inject Mechanical APDL commands
into specific locations of the input file.

• Following certain processing events that take place before the solution process, such as mesh
generation, geometry changes/updates, etc.

Object Properties (p. 627)

Tree Dependencies (p. 628)

Insertion Methods (p. 628)

Right-click Options (p. 628)

API Reference (p. 628)

Additional Related
Information (p. 628)

Object Properties
The Details pane includes the following properties for this object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 627
Python Code

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Target Callback: Provides the following options.

• Get Post Commands

• After Solve

• After Post

• After Object Changed

• Initialize

Suppressed: Options include Yes and No (default). Suppressing an

object removes it from the analysis but maintains scoping and property
definitions.

Connected: Read-only property. Values include True and False.

Advanced Script Execution Scope

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Objects: Model, Body, Contact Region, Environment, and Solution.

• Valid Child Objects: This feature does not support child objects.

Insertion Methods
Right-click the supported parent object and select Insert > Python Code.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Connect

• Reload Properties

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Python Code section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information: Using Python Code.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
628 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Python Result
Evaluates output quantities by executing an Iron-python script based on the DPF (Data Processing
Framework) post-processing toolbox.

Object Properties (p. 629)

Tree Dependencies (p. 629)

Insertion Methods (p. 629)

Right-click Options (p. 630)

API Reference (p. 630)

Additional Related
Information (p. 630)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties:

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
To add a Python Result object, highlight the Solution object and either:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 629
Python Result

• Select the Python Result option from the Solution Context Tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Python Result.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– [various result options]

– Command

• Connect

• Reload Properties

• Solve

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Python Result section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following Python Result sections for more information about how to use this feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
630 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Ring Crack
Inserts embedded void cracks of a hallow disc shape into a solid body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 631
Ring Crack

Object Properties (p. 633)

Tree Dependencies (p. 636)

Insertion Methods (p. 636)

Right-click Options (p. 636)

API Reference (p. 637)

Additional Related Information (p. 637)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
632 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification value. The application uses this identifier
when creating solution identifiers for fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specify the coordinate system that defines the

orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified coordinate system
must be directed towards the normal of the crack plane and the
crack plane always lies in the X-Z plane of the specified coordinate
system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Ring.

Outer Major Radius: Specifies the outer major radius, which defines
the size of the crack shape along the Z axis (that is, the width of the
crack). Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Outer Minor Radius: Specifies the outer minor radius, which defines
the size of the crack shape along the X axis (that is, the depth of the
crack). Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Inner Major Radius: Specifies the inner major radius, which defines
the size of the inner crack shape along the Z axis (that is, the width
of the crack). Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Inner Minor Radius: Specifies the inner minor radius, which defines
the size of the inner crack shape along the X axis (that is, the depth
of the crack). Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 633
Ring Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mesh Method: This property enables you to select the mesh method
to be used to mesh the crack. Options include Hex Dominant
(default) and Tetrahedrons.

Note:

When this crack intersects with the free surfaces of

a solid body, the Hex Dominant setting is not
supported.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Growth Rate: This property is only visible when the Mesh Method
property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the factor with which
the mesh layers will grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a
value greater than 1. The default value is 1.2. The recommended
value is equal to or greater than 1.1.

Outer Crack Front Divisions: This property is only visible when the
Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. It specifies the
number of divisions for the outer crack front. Your entry must be
equal to or greater than 3. The default is 30. You can parameterize
this property.

Inner Crack Front Divisions: This property is only visible when the
Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. It specifies the
number of divisions for the inner crack front. Your entry must be
equal to or greater than 3. The default is 30.. You can parameterize
this property.

Outer Front Element Size: This property is only visible when the
Mesh Method property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the
element size for the outer crack front. The default value is computed
using crack length. Specify a value greater than 0.

Inner Front Element Size: This property is only visible when the
Mesh Method property is set to Tetrahedrons. It specifies the
element size for the inner crack front. The default value is computed
using crack length. Specify a value greater than 0.

Fracture Affected Zone: This property is only visible when the Mesh
Method property is set to Hex Dominant. This is the region that
contains a crack. This property defines the height of the fracture
affected zone. Property options include:

• Program Controlled (default): The application calculates the

height. When selected, the Fracture Affected Zone Height
property is read-only.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
634 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Manual: You manually specify the height in the Fracture Affected
Zone Height property when using this option.

Fracture Affected Zone Height: This property is only visible when

the Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. This value
specifies two things: 1) the height of the Fracture Affected Zone,
which is in the Y direction of the crack coordinate system; and 2)
the distance in totality by which the Fracture Affected Zone is
extended in the positive and negative Z direction of the crack
coordinate system from the crack front extremities.

The shape of a Fracture Affected Zone is rectangular, regardless

of the shape of the crack. Although buffer zones may overlap,
you should use care when defining multiple cracks so that the
zones do not overlap.

Important:

The crack generation process will fail if buffer zones

overlap.

Circumferential Divisions: This property is only visible when the

Mesh Method property is set to Hex Dominant. It specifies the
number of circumferential divisions for the crack shape. The value
you enter must be a multiple of 8, and must be equal to or greater
than 8. The default is 8.

Note:

The maximum number of circumferential divisions

the Geometry window can display is 360. However,
you can specify a higher value and the application
will process it accordingly.

Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the

crack shape. The value must be equal to or greater than 1. The
default value is 6. The Geometry window can display only a
maximum of 100 mesh contours, but you can specify a higher value
and fracture meshing will respect it.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value must
be less than or equal to the value of the Mesh Contours property
and cannot exceed 99. By default, the value equals the Match Mesh
Contours property. This indicates the number of Solution Contours
is equal to the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the
value to equal the Match Mesh Contours value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 635
Ring Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Ring Crack object. The
default is No. The application automatically suppresses the crack
object if the scoped body becomes suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale This category includes the following properties:
Factors
• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and
Z directions, relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling
parameter, use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is
2. The maximum dimension among the three directions of the crack
is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer
zone. When the Mesh Method property is set to Hex-Dominant,
the crack dimensions also include fracture-affected zones.
Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For more information about this category and its
properties, see the Defining a Ring Crack section as well as the
Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For
information about Named Selections in general, refer to Named
Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Ring Crack option from the Crack group on the Fracture
Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu. Any cur-
rently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
636 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Ring Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Ring Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Ring Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 637
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
638 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Remote Point
Acts as a Scoping Method for Remote Boundary Conditions.

Object
Properties (p. 639)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 642)

Insertion
Methods (p. 642)

Right-click
Options (p. 642)

API
Reference (p. 642)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 642)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 639
Remote Point

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default), Named Selection, Re-
mote Point, Remote Points and Nodes, or Free Standing. Free Standing Remote Points
can be used to model structures such as Tuned Mass Dampers by directly connecting
pieces of your model together.

Note:

When you specify Free Standing, the Geometry, Pinball Region, Behavior,
and DOF Selection properties do not appear in the Details view.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Geometry Selection.
Select your geometric entity or mesh entity and then click the Apply button. This option
supports face, edge, vertex, node, or element face selection.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Named Selection.
Choose a Named Selection from the drop-down menu. Named selections can be geometry-,
element face-, or node-based.

Outline Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Remote Point
or Remote Point and Nodes. This property is scoped to an existing Remote Point. Select
the entry field of this property, select the desired Remote Point objects from the Outline,
and then select the Apply button that displays automatically. Once specified, this field
displays the number of Remote Point objects you have selected (for example, 1 Object,
2 Objects, etc.).

Nodes: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to Remote Point and Nodes.
This option enables you to perform direct node scoping for the Remote Point in addition
to the scoping of one or more Remote Point objects. This property behaves similar to the
Geometry scoping method, enabling you to perform direct node-based scoping.

Coordinate System: The Coordinate System based on the original location of the remote
point. This property does not change if you modify the remote point’s position with the
Location property.

Note:

When you scope a Remote Point to a load or a result (Scoping Method

property is set to Remote Point), the direction used to calculate the load
or to evaluate the result is based on the Coordinate System property of
the Remote Point object. This also applies to when Remote Points like
this are used with a Commands (APDL) (p. 91) object.

X Coordinate: The distance from the coordinate system origin on the x axis.

Y Coordinate: The distance from the coordinate system origin on the y axis.

Z Coordinate: The distance from the coordinate system origin on the z axis.

Location: When selected, this property displays the remote point's location. The property
allows you to manually modify the remote point's original position. Changing the Location

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
640 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
does not establish a new coordinate system (reflected by the above Coordinate System
property) and re-plots the x, y, and z coordinate locations.

For a Free Standing remote point, use this property to define the remote point's
position in space.

Important:

When you first scope a Remote Point and you do not also define the
Location property, the application sets the position of the remote point
to the centroid of the scoped geometry selection(s) or if scoped to multiple
Remote Points, the centroid of those Remote Points. Any subsequent
scoping changes will not change this position. You must update the
Remote Point's location as needed.

Defin- Suppressed
i-
tion Behavior

Formulation

Relaxation Method

Pinball Region

DOF Selection: Specify as Program Controlled (default) or Manual. Provides control of

which DOF's will activate for corresponding constraint equations. If the Manual setting is
selected, the following additional properties display.

• X Component

• Y Component

• Z Component

• Rotation X

• Rotation Y

• Rotation Z

Pilot Node APDL Name: Optional property that enables you to create a Mechanical APDL
parameter (in the input file) and assign its value to the pilot node number of the Remote
Point. This facilitates easy programmatic identification of the Remote Point’s pilot node
for later use/reference in a Command object.
Ad- Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam. Select a material to define
vanced material properties for the beams used in the connection. Density is excluded from the
material definition.
Visible
for

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 641
Remote Point

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Be- Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam. Specify a radius to define
ha- the cross section dimension of the circular beam used for the connection.
vi-
or
set
to
Beam
only.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Remote Points (p. 643).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), and Figure (p. 241).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model or Remote Points object:

• Choose the Remote Point option on the Model or Remote Points Context tabs.

• Right-click the Model object or the Remote Points object or in the Geometry window and select
Insert > Remote Point.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Promote to Named Selection

API Reference
See the Remote Point section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Remote Point

• Remote Boundary Conditions

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
642 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Remote Points
Contains all user-defined Remote Point (p. 639) objects.

Object Properties (p. 643)

Tree Dependencies (p. 643)

Insertion Methods (p. 643)

API Reference (p. 644)

Additional Related
Information (p. 644)

Object Property
This object has no associated properties.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Remote Point (p. 639).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model object:

• Select Remote Point on the Model Context tab.

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Remote Point.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 643
Remote Points

API Reference
See the Remote Points section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Remote Point Overview

• Remote Boundary Conditions

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
644 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Response Constraint
A Response Constraint is defined as one of the following and availability may depend upon the upstream
analysis type:

• Mass Constraint (default)

• Volume Constraint

• Global Stress Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

• Natural Frequency Constraint (Modal Analysis)

• Local von-Mises Stress Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

• Displacement Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

• Reaction Force Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

• Compliance Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

• Center of Gravity Constraint

• Moment of Inertia Constraint

• Temperature Constraint (Steady-State Thermal Analysis)

• Criterion Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

This constraint is required for a Structural Optimization analysis. The application inserts this object
automatically when you create a Structural Optimization analysis. The default response constraint is
a Mass Constraint object.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 645
Response Constraint

Object Properties (p. 646)

Tree Dependencies (p. 646)

Insertion Methods (p. 647)

Right-click Options (p. 647)

API Reference (p. 648)

Additional Related
Information (p. 648)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object are examined in the Response Constraint section.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Structural Optimization Environment (p. 211).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
646 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
The application automatically inserts this object as a Mass Constraint. To add additional constraint
objects, highlight the Structural Optimization environment and either:

• Select the desired constraint from the Response Constraint drop-down menu on the Environment
Context.

• Right-click the Environment object or within the Geometry window and select Insert > [desired
constraint].

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Optimization Region

– Objective

– Mass Constraint

– Volume Constraint

– Natural Frequency Constraint (Modal Analysis)

– Global Stress Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

– Local von-Mises Stress Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

– Displacement Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

– Reaction Force Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

– Compliance Constraint (Static Structural Analysis)

– Center of Gravity Constraint

– Moment of Inertia Constraint

– Temperature Constraint (Steady-State Thermal Analysis)

– Criterion Constraint (Static Structural and Modal Analysis)

– Member Size (p. 449)

– Pull out Direction (p. 449)

– Extrusion (p. 449)

– Cyclic (p. 187)

– Symmetry (p. 187)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 647
Response Constraint

– Uniform (p. 187)

– Pattern Repetition (p. 187)

– AM Overhang Constraint (p. 449)

– Commands

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Response Contraint section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Response Constraint

• Structural Optimization

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
648 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Response PSD Tool (Group)
Controls the sampling points of Response PSD probes for Random Vibration analyses.

Object Properties (p. 649)

Tree Dependencies (p. 650)

Insertion Methods (p. 650)

Right-click Options (p. 650)

API Reference (p. 650)

Additional Related
Information (p. 650)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Options Include All Excitation Frequencies: Options include Yes (default) and No. Selecting
Yes includes all excitation frequencies in the sampling. The No option includes
minimum and maximum excitation frequencies in addition to the frequency
samplings for natural frequencies.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 649
Response PSD Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Include User Defined Frequencies: Options include Yes and No (default). Selecting
Yes enables you to manually enter frequencies in the Tabular Data table (User
Defined Frequency Steps).

Clustering Frequency Points: The default value is 20. This property defines the
number of frequencies generated for both sides of the natural frequencies for
response PSD result evaluations. If your response PSD curve contains a number of
spikes, you can add more frequency points to obtain a more accurate RMS result,
however; this increases evaluation time.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: The Solution (p. 703) object is the only valid parent object.

• Valid Child Tree Object: The Response PSD Probe is the only valid child object.

Insertion Methods
• Use any of the following methods after selecting the Solution (p. 703) object:

– Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select Response PSD Tool.

– Right-click the Solution (p. 703) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Response
PSD Tool > Response PSD Tool.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Response PSD

– User Defined Result

– Commands

• Evaluate All Results: Available for Response PSD Tool and all child objects when the Response
PSD Tool is inserted under a Solution (p. 703) object.

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Response PSD Tool section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
650 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Response PSD Tool

• Response PSD Probe

• Random Vibration Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 651
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
652 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Result Tracker
Provides results graphs of various quantities (for example, deformation, contact, temperature, kinetic
energy, stiffness energy) vs. time.

Object Properties (p. 653)

Tree Dependencies (p. 654)

Insertion Methods (p. 654)

Right-click Options (p. 655)

Additional Related
Information (p. 655)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Note:

Properties may differ for Result Trackers in Explicit Dynamics systems. See Result Trackers
for more information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 653
Result Tracker

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Displays for a Temperature result tracker object.

Geometry: Displays for a Deformation result tracker object, or for a

Temperature object if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.
Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry field, then
click Apply.

Contact Region: Displays for a Contact result tracker object.

Enhanced Tracking: Displays for a Contact result tracker object.

Definition Type: Read-only indication of result tracker type for Deformation and
Temperature objects. For Contact object, specify contact output.

Orientation: Displays for a Deformation result tracker object.

Suppression: Prior to solving, you can include or exclude the result

from the analysis. The default is value is No.
Results Minimum: Read-only indication of the minimum value of the result
tracker type.

Maximum: Read-only indication of the maximum value of the result

tracker type.
Filter (Explicit Type
Dynamics only)
Cut Frequency: Displays if Type = Butterworth.

Minimum filtered value: Displays if Type = Butterworth.

Maximum filtered value: Displays if Type = Butterworth.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution Information (p. 711).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Solution Information object:

• Open the Results Trackers drop-down menu on the Solution Information Context tab and
select the desired tracker.

Note:

For a solution in a solved state, the application allows you to add and evaluate Contact
Results Trackers. For all other Result Tracker types, you must first clear the solution.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
654 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Right-click the Solution Information object or in the Geometry window and select Insert >
[Desired Result Tracker].

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [Available Result Trackers]

• Evaluate All Contact Trackers[a]: Evaluates all contact trackers (Only visible for Contact result
trackers with the Enhanced Tracking property set to Yes.)

• Evaluate Trackers[a]: Evaluates all trackers.

• Evaluate Contact Tracker[a]: Evaluates selected contact tracker (Only visible for Contact result
trackers with the Enhanced Tracking property set to Yes.)

• Evaluate Tracker[a]: Evaluates selected tracker.

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Export: Available after the solution is obtained. This option enables you to save a text file of
the result data. And, based on the setting of the Automatically Open Excel preference in
the Export category of the Options dialog, this option will also open an excel spreadsheet
that includes the result data.

[a] Requires you to Retrieve result data.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Result Tracker Types

• Solution Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 655
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
656 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Result Plot Trackers
Shows the progression of specific results during the solution process. Available from the Solution In-
formation object.

As listed in the following table, this feature supports specific result types for Static Structural, Transient
Structural, Explicit Dynamics, LS-DYNA, Steady-State Thermal, and Transient Thermal, as well as Struc-
tural Optimization analyses.

Static Structural, Transient Steady-State/Transient Structural

Structural, Explicit Dynamics, and Thermal Optimization
LS-DYNA
Deformation Temperature Topology Density

Stress Topology Elemental

Density
Strain (not supported for LS-DYNA)

Structural and Explicit Dynamics Analyses Object Structural, Explicit Dynamics Analysis,
Examples and LS-DYNA Object Properties (p. 659)

Structural Optimization Object

Properties (p. 660)

Tree Dependencies (p. 662)

Insertion Methods (p. 662)

Manual and Automatic Mode

(Structural, Explicit Dynamics, LS-DYNA,
and Thermal Only) (p. 662)

Add Result Plot Trackers During

Solution (p. 663)

Right-click Options (p. 664)

API Reference (p. 664)

Additional Related Information (p. 664)

Thermal Analyses Object Example

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 657
Result Plot Trackers

Structural Optimization Analyses Object Examples

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
658 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Structural, Explicit Dynamics Analysis, and LS-DYNA Object Properties
The Details Pane includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Property options include Geometry Selection,
Named Selection, Path, and Surface.

The application displays one of the following associated properties

based on your Scoping Method selection:

Geometry

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Geo-

metry. Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the
Geometry field, then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 659
Result Plot Trackers

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selection

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Named

Selection. Specify named selection.

Path

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Path.

Select a defined path from the drop-down list.

Surface

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Sur-

face. Select a defined surface from the drop-down list.

Definition Type: Read-only indication of result plot tracker result type you have
selected (Equivalent (von-Mises) Stress, Equivalent Plastic Strain
(not available for LS-DYNA), Total Deformation, or Temperature).

Suppressed: Include (Yes) or exclude the (default, No) the result.

Results Minimum: Read-only indication of the minimum value for the plot
tracker.

Maximum: Read-only indication of the maximum value for the plot

tracker.

Average: Displays the arithmetic mean of the result plot value.

Minimum Occurs On: Displays the part name of the model on which
the minimum result plot occurs.

Maximum Occurs On: Displays the part name of the model on which
the maximum result plot occurs.
Information Time: Displays the time at which the result plot tracker obtained
data.

Load Step: Displays the Load Step that the result plot tracker
obtained data.

Substep: Displays the Substep that the result plot tracker obtained
data.

Iteration Number: Read-only field that displays the converged

iteration step number.

Structural Optimization Object Properties

The Details Pane includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
660 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method. The options for this property include:

• Optimization Region (default): Iindicates that the design

region is applied to the select Optimization Region. When
you specify Optimization Region for the Scoping Method,
the Optimization Region property displays and is
automatically populated.

• Geometry Selection: Indicates that the design region is

applied to a geometry or geometries, which are chosen using
the graphical selection tools. When you specify Geometry
Selection for the Scoping Method, the Geometry property
displays.

In this case, use selection filters on the Graphics Toolbar to

pick your geometric entities (body and element selection
only), and then click Apply. Once complete, the property
displays the type of geometry (Body, etc.) and the number
of selected geometric entities (for example: 1 Body).

• Named Selection: Indicates that the design region is applied

to a Named Selection. When you specify Named Selection
for the Scoping Method, the Named Selection property
displays. This property provides a drop-down list of available
user-defined Named Selections (only body-based and
element-based Named Selections are supported).

Definition Type: Read-only indication of result plot tracker result type.

Iteration: Indicates iteration number for the selected result.

Retained Threshold: Controlled by a slider option that represents

the range from minimum to maximum for the result. The default
value is 0.5. The supported range is 0.01 to 0.99 (greater than zero
and less than 1).

Once you evaluate results, you can use the slider to view the
optimized topology in the graphics view. When you release the
slider, press the Enter key to apply the entry. The application
computes and displays the values for the Original Volume, Final
Volume, Percent Volume of Original, Original Mass, Final Mass, and
Percent Mass of Original.

Suppressed: Include (Yes) or exclude the (default, No) the result.

Results Minimum: Read-only indication of the minimum value for the tracker.

Maximum: Read-only indication of the maximum value for the

tracker.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 661
Result Plot Trackers

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Visibility Show Optimized Region. Used for graphical view changes only.
The options for this property include:

• All Regions: Displays all of the regions selected by the

Scoping Method. Three color bands are shown: Remove (Red),
Marginal (Yellow), and Keep (Gray). Remove indicates a
Retained Threshold value of 0 to 0.4, Marginal indicates a
value of 0.4 to 0.6, and Keep indicates a value greater than
0.6.

• Retained Region (default): When Retained Region is selected,

then the Retained Threshold value is used from the details
view to show the region which needs to be kept.

• Removed Region: Displays what will be removed.

Information Iteration Number: Read-only field that displays the converged

iteration step number.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Solution Information (p. 711).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: This object currently does not support any child objects.

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Solution Information object:

• Open the Result Plot Tracker drop-down menu on the Solution Information Tab and select a
desired plot tracker.

• Right-click the Solution Information object or within the Geometry window, select Insert option
and then select a desired plot tracker.

Manual and Automatic Mode (Structural, Explicit Dynamics, LS-DYNA, and

Thermal Only)
When you insert a Result Plot Tracker, the right-click context menu options enable you to either (1)
acquire result data (Update Result) for the current time point or (2) set the tracker to update automat-
ically (Switch to Automatic Mode). These options are illustrated below. By default, when you insert a
tracker, the associated icon includes a pause button icon. When this icon is displayed, right-click the
object and select Update Result to retrieve current result data. Otherwise, select Switch to Automatic
Mode, in which case, the pause icon is replaced with a play icon and the tracker updates automatically.
Automatic updates display the current result based on the latest time available. You can see the time
the result data is captured in the legend of the result. This time corresponds to the solver when the
result data is captured.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
662 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
To obtain result data for a specific time point, enter a specific time in the Display Time property of the
Details pane and select Update Result.

The Geometry window displays the result contour updates, as well as deformations when applicable,
on your model as the solution progress. When using Automatic Mode, the display of results is refreshed
automatically based on the value specified in the Update Interval property of the Solution Information
object. The default setting for this property is 2.5 s.

For Structural Optimization analyses, the tracking is iteration-based during the solution process. By default,
the Topology Density Tracker object is inserted as a child object of the Solution Information object.
It displays node-based result data. In addition, you can choose to insert the Topology Elemental
Density Tracker object in order to display element-based result data.

Note:

• You cannot add a plot tracker to an analysis in the solved state. You must first clear the
solution to make the addition.

• Result Plot Trackers do not support the use of the Convergence (p. 159) feature.

Add Result Plot Trackers During Solution

At any point during the solution, you can use the Insert option of the right-click menu, from the
Solution Information object or an existing tracker object, to add additional result plot trackers.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 663
Result Plot Trackers

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [options include Result Trackers and Result Plot Trackers]

• Get Results (available once solution is complete)

• Switch to Automatic Mode

• Update Result (requires you to Retrieve result data)

• Suppressed/Unsuppressed

• Interrupt Solution

• Stop Solution

API Reference
See the Result Trackers section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Performing Solution and Review Results (see Result Display Feature)

• Structural Optimization in Mechanical

• Topology Density

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
664 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Results and Result Tools (Group)
Defines the engineering output for displaying and analyzing the results from a solution.

Applies to the following objects:

Category Object
Structural Bending Stress, Bolt Tool, Campbell Diagram, Directional Acceleration,
Damage Results, Directional Deformation, Directional Velocity, Elastic
Strain Intensity, Energy Dissipated Per Unit Volume, Equivalent Creep
Strain, Equivalent Plastic Strain, Equivalent Stress, Equivalent Total
Strain, Fiber Compressive Damage Variable, Fiber Compressive Failure
Criterion, Fiber Tensile Damage Variable, Fiber Tensile Failure Criterion,
Frequency Response, Linearized Stresses, Max Failure Criteria, Matrix
Compressive Damage Variable, Matrix Compressive Failure Criterion,
Matrix Tensile Damage Variable, Matrix Tensile Failure Criterion,
Maximum Principal Elastic Strain, Maximum Principal Stress, Maximum
Shear Elastic Strain, Maximum Shear Stress, Membrane Stress, Middle
Principal Elastic Strain, Middle Principal Stress, Minimum Principal Elastic
Strain, Minimum Principal Stress, Mullins Damage Variable, Mullins Max
Previous Strain Energy, Normal Elastic Strain, Normal Gasket Pressure,
Normal Gasket Total Closure, Normal Stress, Phase Response, Shear
Damage Variable, Shear Elastic Strain, Shear Gasket Pressure, Shear
Gasket Total Closure, Shear Stress, Strain Energy, Stress Intensity,
Structural Error, Thermal Strain, Total Acceleration, Total Deformation,
Total Velocity, Vector Principal Elastic Strain, Vector Principal Stress, and
Waterfall Diagrams.
Structural Beams Axial Force, Beam Tool, Bending Moment, Direct Stress, Maximum
Bending Stress, Maximum Combined Stress, Minimum Bending Stress,
Minimum Combined Stress, Shear Force, Shear-Moment Diagram, and
Torsional Moment.
Thermal Directional Heat Flux, Temperature, Thermal Error, Total Heat Flux, Fluid
Flow Rate, and Fluid Heat Conduction Rate.
Magnetostatic Current Density, Directional Field Intensity, Directional Flux Density,
Directional Force, Electric Potential, Flux Linkage, Inductance, Magnetic
Error, Total Field Intensity, Total Flux Density, and Total Force.
Electric Directional Current Density, Directional Electric Field Intensity, Electric
Voltage, Joule Heat, Total Current Density, and Total Electric Field
Intensity.
General Coordinate Systems Results (group), User Defined Result, User Defined
Criteria, and Volume.
Structural Topology Density and Topology Elemental Density.
Optimization

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 665
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Object
Acoustics Acoustics Contour Results

Pressure, Total Velocity, Directional Velocity, Kinetic Energy,

Potential Energy, Sound Pressure, A-Weighted Sound Pressure
Level, Frequency Band SPL, and A-Weighted Frequency Band
SPL.

Acoustics Far-field

Far-field SPL, Far-field A-Weighted SPL, Far-field Maximum

Pressure, Far-field Phase, Far-field Directivity, Far-field Maximum
Scattered Pressure, Far-field Target Strength, and Far-field Sound
Power Level.

Acoustic Frequency Response

Pressure, Total Velocity, Directional Velocity, Kinetic Energy,

Potential Energy, Sound Pressure Level, and A-Weighted Sound
Pressure Level.

Acoustic Power Loss Results

Transmission Loss, Return Loss, and Absorption Coefficient.

Acoustic Diffuse Sound Transmission Loss

Diffuse Sounds Transmission Loss

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
666 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Object
Properties (p. 667)

Acoustics
Result
Categories (p. 678)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 679)

Insertion
Methods (p. 680)

Right-click
Options (p. 680)

API
Reference (p. 681)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 681)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object may include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 667
Results and Result Tools (Group)

The following applies to many result objects whose direct parent object is Solution (p. 703). Many exceptions
are noted. For more complete information check individual descriptions for all results and result tools.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Panel Contribution Panel Contribution: For Harmonic Response and Harmonic Acoustic
analyses, this option, and its associated properties, enable you to visually
compare results for different geometry scopings via mosaic and line
chart display tools. This feature supports face scoping for a single RPM
value. Supported waterfall diagram results include Velocity, Acceleration,
ERP, and/or ERP Level Waterfall Diagram. Options include No (default)
and Yes.
Scope Scoping Method: Property options include Geometry Selection, Named
Selection, Path, Surface, Result File Item, or Surface Coating.

The application displays one of the following associated properties

based on your Scoping Method selection:

Geometry

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Geometry.

Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geometry
field, then click Apply.

Named Selection

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Named Se-

lection. Specify named selection.

Path

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Path. Select

a defined path from the drop-down list.

Surface

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Surface.

Select a defined surface from the drop-down list.

Item Type

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Result File

Item. The options include:

• Material IDs

• Element Name IDs

• Element Type IDs

• Component Name

• Element IDs

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
668 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Node IDs
The values associated with the above options are generated
and displayed in the Worksheet. Refer to the Result File Item
section for additional information.

Solver Component IDs

Displays if the Item Type property is set to Materials

IDs, Element Name IDs, Element Type IDs, Element
IDs, or Node IDs.

The default value is All for the Materials IDs, Element

Name IDs, and Element Type IDs options.

For the Materials IDs and Element Type IDs options,

you can also enter a number or a number range (that
is, 1, 2, 3, or 2-5).

For Element Name IDs, you can also enter an element

name, such as BEAM188, or, you can enter a group
label, such as "Beam", to include all beam element
types.

For the Element IDs and Node IDs options, you make
comma separated entries of individual elements or
nodes, or range entries by using a dash, and/or a
combination of the two.

See the Result File Item section of the Help for

additional information.

Global IDs

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Result File

Item. This property is used to scope results to bodies that have
the Model Type property set to Reinforcement. This property
is not applicable to bodies with any other Model Type setting.
The application assigns a global ID to each body contained
under the Geometry object, in the order that they are listed.
That is, the first body in the tree has a global ID of 1 and so on
in descending order for each object. As a result, you must
determine the global ID of your reinforcement bodies based
on their position in the tree. The default setting for the Global
IDs property is All. You can enter an individual ID, or a range
of IDs based on the number of reinforcement bodies. The
default setting for this property is All.

Component Name

Displays if the Item Type property is set to Component Name.

Specify a Component Name as listed in the Solver Component

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 669
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Names table of the Worksheet. See the Result File Item section
of the Help.

Note:

This is the only available option for an analysis

that includes a Condensed Part (p. 121).

Surface Coating

Displays if the Scoping Method property is set to Surface

Coating. This property provides a drop-down menu of available
surface coatings. The default setting for this property is All.

Sub Scope By: Options include:

• Layer: Specifies the layer to calculate Shell result values. If

selected, a Layer property also displays that requires you to
specify a Layer number.

• Ply: If selected, a Ply property also displays that requires you to

select a target ply from the Modeling Ply object in the tree. The
result calculation uses the intersection of the specified Ply and
the Geometry property scoping.

Position: Displays only for stress and strain results scoped to surface
bodies, to a layer (which may include a layer or ply of a solid body), or
a Line Coating created by the Pull (p. 625) feature. Options include:
Top/Bottom, Top, Middle, and Bottom.

Note:

Because Line Coatings use a shell element that display

as lines, the Top/Bottom option only displays Bottom
option results. The application generates a message
when this occurs.

Definition Type: Displays the type of result you have inserted into the tree, for
example, Total Deformation. This property often provides a drop-down
menu that enables you to change your selection within the same result
category. That is, you can change between any of the supported results
of the Stress result category. For some result types, this property is a
read-only indication of the given result.

Subtype: Only displays for the Fracture Results SIFS, VCCT, and Mater-
ial Force.

Response Type: Appears for Random Vibration and Response Spectrum

analyses only and is only available for User Defined results. Options

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
670 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
include Displacement (default), Velocity, Acceleration, and Other
Result.

Input Port: Provides a drop-down menu of available ports.

Output Port: Only available for the Transmission Loss result. Select
the desired port from the drop-down menu of available ports.

Location Method: The Location Method property is available for the

Force Reaction option (which is the same as the Force Reaction probe)
of Frequency Response results. This property is used to specify the
chosen extracted use method to frequency response results. Options
include Boundary Condition (default), Contact Region, Remote Points,
Spring, and Beam. Based upon your selection, one of the following
corresponding properties display:

Boundary Condition: Provides a drop-down list of available

boundary conditions to scope the result.
Contact Region: Provides a drop-down list of available contact
regions.
Remote Points: Provides a drop-down list of available remote
points.
Spring: Provides a drop-down list of available body-ground
springs.
Beam: Provides a drop-down list of available body-ground
beams.

Extraction: Only displayed for a Frequency Response (Force Reaction)

result when the Location Method is set to Contact Region. Options
include: Contact (Underlying Element) and Target (Underlying
Element).

Orientation: Appears only for: Axial Force, Directional Deformation,

Directional Field Intensity, Direction Flux Density, Directional Force,
Directional Heat Flux, Normal Elastic Strain, Normal Stress, Shear Elastic
Strain, Shear Stress, Torsional Moment, Shell Membrane Stress, and Shell
Bending Stress.

For Frequency Response results, this property is used to specify

the Orientation in which results are to be extracted. Options
include X Axis (default), Y Axis, and Z Axis.

Expression: Displays for User Defined Result only.

Input Unit System: Displays for User Defined Result only.

Output Unit: Displays for User Defined Result only.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 671
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Coordinate System: Displays for results that change with respect to a
coordinate system, such as Normal Stress. For these result types, you
accept the default setting, Global Coordinate System, or you can select
a local coordinate system that you have defined, or select Solution
Coordinate System. When the Sub Scope By property is set to Ply, this
property defaults to the Fiber Coordinate System option.

Note:

• The Fiber Coordinate System setting, when a result

is scoped to a ply, supports the Mechanical APDL
Solver only. In addition, this setting executes the same
coordinate system commands as the Solution
Coordinate System setting.

• If a result changes with respect to coordinate systems,

then Mechanical rotates this result in an identical
fashion to Mechanical APDL. For an explanation of
rotating results to a different coordinate system, see
the Additional POST1 Postprocessing section in the
Mechanical APDL Basic Analysis Guide.

Sector Number: Available for an analysis that includes Non-Cyclic

Loading.

By: Enables you to specify a value (time, frequency, maximum value)

for an independent variable for which you would like a contour result.
The options vary based on the type of analysis. See the Multiple Result
Sets section for more information.

Note:

This property is not available for the Far-field Sound

Power Level, Frequency Band SPL, and A-Weighted
Frequency Band SPL results.

Display Time: Appears if By is set to Time. (See Note below.)

Frequency: Appears if By is set to Frequency. (See Note below.)

Set Number: Appears if By is set to Result Set.

Separate Data by Entity: This property enables you to display individual

Minimum and Maximum values for each entity scoped to a result, such
as 2 bodies, 3 Faces, 5 elements, etc. The application then displays these
individual result values (only, no global values display) in the Tabular
Data window.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
672 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Zero Through-Thickness Bending Stress: Available for Linearized Stress
results for 3D analyses only. The options for this property include No
(default) and Yes. If you selecting the Yes for this property, the
application sets the following bending stress components to zero: SX,
SXY, SXZ.

Mode: Appears for Modal analyses.

Calculate Time History: Appears if By is set to Time or Result Set.

Identifier: Available for all result types. It enables you to specify a unique
name/symbol/character that you can then use in the Expression property
of a User Defined Result.

Sphere Radius: Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic Acoustic

analyses, except for the Far-Field Sound Power Level result.

Reference RMS Sound Pressure: Appears for all Far-field Results in

Harmonic Acoustic analyses, except for the Far-Field Sound Power
Level result. The default value is 2e-5 Pa.

Reference Sound Power Level: Appears for Far-field Sound Power Level
result. Defaults to 1e-12 W.

Amplitude: Appears for contour results in a Harmonic Response Analysis

only. Options include Yes or No (default). When the Amplitude property
is set to Yes, the amplitude contour result is displayed with respect to
the Solution Coordinate System. This property is not supported for
Vector principal stress and strain results.

Sweeping Phase:

• For a Harmonic Response Analysis, this property appears only

for contour results when the Amplitude property is set to No
and the By property is set to Frequency, Set, Maximum Over
Frequency, or Frequency of Maximum.

• For Damped Modal analysis, this property always appears for

contour results and for probe results when the By property is
set to Mode, Maximum Over Modes, or Mode of Maximum.

Phase Increment: Appears if the By property is set to Maximum Over

Phase or Phase of Maximum. The entry can be between 1° and 10°.
The default value is 10°.

Scale Factor: Appears only for Random Vibration Analysis. Options

include 1 Sigma (default), 2 Sigma, 3 Sigma, and User Input.

Scale Factor Value: Appears when you set the Scale Factor property
to User Input. The default value is 1.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 673
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Probability: Read-only property that appears only for Random Vibration
Analysis. Presents a probability value corresponding to each sigma value.

Contour Start: Displays for Fracture Results only.

Contour End: Displays for Fracture Results only.

Active Contour: Displays for Fracture Results only.

Suppressed: Suppresses the object if set to Yes.

Note:

If you specify a Display Time or Frequency value that

exceeds the final time or frequency in the result file, then
Mechanical will not allow the result to be evaluated.
If you specify a Display Time or Frequency value for
which no results are available, then Mechanical performs
a linear interpolation to calculate the results at that
specified time. The two times or frequencies in the result
file that are the closest to the specified time/frequency
are used in the interpolation. Note that the application
does not perform the interpolation for a display time
before the first result set.
No interpolation is performed for the Define a Fracture
Tool results. That is, for Fracture Results with a Display
Time between the two solution time points, only the
data set associated with the lower of the solution time
points is used.

Chart and Tabular Use the properties of the Chart and Tabular Data category to filter
Data (Waterfall data (RPM/Order) as well as to plot the data displayed in the Worksheet
Diagrams only) and the Graph and Tabular Data windows.

Display Panel: Display a mosaic of result values when the Panel

Contribution property is set to Yes. Options include Yes and No (default).

Selection Mode: Options include RPM and Order. For each option, an
additional entry property of the same name (RPM or Order) is also
displayed. The default values for these properties is All. You can enter
a singular value or you can enter multiple values, separated by a comma
(12, 16, 24) as well as range values separated by a hyphen (28-40), or a
combination of the entries, such as 12, 16, 24, 28-40.

Show Zoom Pan Control: Display/hide the zoom feature in the

worksheet. Options include Yes (default) and No.

Interpolate Data: Display actual values only (no interpolated values)

on the diagram. Options include No (default) and Yes.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
674 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope to Order Lines: Display the values included in the order lines
only. Options include No (default) and Yes.

Lower Band and Upper Band: The values displayed in these properties
are calculated during the solution. Once available, you can manually
specify a value for the lower or upper contour band to redistribute (in
equal increments) the display. This can be beneficial when you have
groupings of result data points at one end of the color assignment.

Minimum/Maximum X Axis: The application calculates these values

during the solution and automatically plots the minimum and maximum
values for the X Axis on the diagram’s graph and only displays values
within this range. You can modify this range by manually entering
frequency values presented on the diagram or in the associated result
column of the Tabular Data window.

Minimum/Maximum Y Axis: The application calculates these values

during the solution and automatically plots the minimum and maximum
values for the Y Axis on the diagram’s graph and only displays values
within this range. You can modify this range by manually entering RPM
values presented on the diagram or in the associated result column of
the Tabular Data window.
Options The Options category is only present for the Acoustic Power Loss and
Frequency Response and Phase Response result types.

Frequency Response

For the Frequency Response result type the properties include the
following:

• Frequency Range: Options include Use Parent (default) or

Specified. The Use Parent setting automatically sets the values
of the Minimum Frequency and the Maximum Frequency
properties equal to the Range Minimum and Range Maximum
properties in the Options category of the Analysis Settings. The
Specified setting enables you to manually specify the Minimum
Frequency and the Maximum Frequency property values.

• Minimum Frequency: You can enter a value for this property

when the Frequency Range property is set to Specified,
otherwise, it is read-only.

• Maximum Frequency: You can enter a value for this property

when the Frequency Range property is set to Specified,
otherwise, it is read-only.

• Display: Options include.

– Real

– Imaginary

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 675
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
– Real and Imaginary

– Amplitude

– Phase Angle

– Bode (default setting - plots both Amplitude and Phase

Angle)

• Chart Viewing Style: Select from the following options to select

a scale to plot results.

– Linear: Plots the result values linearly.

– Log X: Plots the X-Axis logarithmically. If negative axis

values or a zero value exists, this option is not supported
and the graph plots linearly.

– Log Y (default when graph has Amplitude): Plots the Y-Axis

is plotted logarithmically. If negative axis values or a zero
value exists, this option is not supported and the graph
plots linearly.

– Log-Log: Plots the X-Axis and Y-Axis logarithmically. If

negative axis values or a zero value exists, this option is
not supported and the graph plots linearly.

Phase Response

For the Phase Response result type, the properties include the
following:

• Frequency: Input frequency at which Phase Response is

requested.

• Duration: Phase period over which response is requested. The

default setting is 720°.

Acoustic Power Loss Results

For the Power Loss result types, the properties include the following:

• Frequency Range: Options include Use Parent (default) or

Specified. The Use Parent setting automatically sets the
values of the Minimum Frequency and the Maximum Fre-
quency properties equal to the Range Minimum and Range
Maximum properties in the Options category of the Analysis
Settings. The Specified setting enables you to manually
specify the Minimum Frequency and the Maximum Fre-
quency property values.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
676 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
• Minimum Frequency: You can enter a value for this property
when the Frequency Range property is set to Specified,
otherwise, it is read-only.

• Maximum Frequency: You can enter a value for this property

when the Frequency Range property is set to Specified,
otherwise, it is read-only.

Integration Point Display Option: Appears only for result items that can display
Results unaveraged contour results.

Average Across Bodies: When you select Averaged as the Display

Option, this property displays. Setting this property to Yes (the default
value is No) averages results across separate bodies.
Results: Read-only Minimum: Not available for Vector Principal Stress.
status indication of
result object. Maximum: Not available for Vector Principal Stress.

Average: Not available for Vector Principal Stress. This value is displayed
for all results when the Minimum and Maximum values are available,
otherwise, the Total result value is provided. This value is an arithmetic
mean.

Total: Displays the sum of the result. This result is only available for
results that have the unit type: Length, Area, Volume, Mass, Force,
Moment, Energy or Heat Rate This value is not available if the Average
(above) is reported. This Total value is an arithmetic sum.

Minimum Occurs On: Not available for Current Density, Electric Potential,
Strain Energy, and Vector Principal Stress.

Maximum Occurs On: Not available for Current Density, Electric

Potential, Strain Energy, and Vector Principal Stress.

The following read-only properties display for Frequency Response

results:

• Maximum Amplitude: Reports maximum amplitude from all the

result sets.

• Frequency: Reports frequency at which maximum amplitude

occurs.

• Phase Angle: Reports phase angle at which maximum amplitude

occurs.

• Real: Reports real value at which maximum amplitude occurs.

• Imaginary: Reports imaginary value at which maximum

amplitude occurs.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 677
Results and Result Tools (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Maximum Value Provides read-only properties that display maximum values of the results
Over Time you select over time. These properties are only applicable for static,
transient, and explicit analyses.
Minimum Value Provides read-only properties that display minimum values of the results
Over Time you select over time. These properties are only applicable for static,
transient, and explicit analyses.
Tabular and Graph Crack Selection (Fracture Results Only): This property only displays
Display when the Crack Selection Mode property of the Fracture Tool object
is set to All Cracks.

Crack Front Number (Fracture Results Only): This property only displays
when the Crack Selection Mode property of the Fracture Tool is set to
All Cracks. It enables you to plot graph and tabular data for all crack
fronts or for a single specified crack front for the crack selected in the
above Crack Selection property. Options include All Crack Fronts
(default), which is equal to setting the property to zero (0) or you can
enter a specific Crack Front Number (contained in the Details of the
crack front named selection object) to evaluate results for that crack
front only.
Information: Time
Read-only status
indication of time Load Step
stepping.
Substep

Iteration Number

Reported Frequency (Harmonic Response analysis only)

Acoustics Result Categories

The following Details view categories and properties apply to acoustics results only.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Phi Angle (from X- Start: Starting Angle Phi. Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic
Axis to Y-Axis) Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound Power Level. Defaults to 0.0°.

End: Ending Angle Phi. Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic
Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound Power Level. Defaults to
0.0°.

No. of Divisions: Number of Divisions in Phi direction. Appears for all

Far-field Results in Harmonic Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound
Power Level. Defaults to 1.
Theta Angle (from Start: Starting Angle Theta. Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic
Z-Axis to X-Axis) Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound Power Level. Defaults to 0.0°.

End: Ending Angle Theta. Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic
Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound Power Level. Defaults to 0.0°.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
678 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
No. of Divisions: Number of Divisions in Theta direction. Appears for
all Far-field Results in Harmonic Acoustic analyses except Far-Field Sound
Power Level. Defaults to 1.
Advanced Model Type: Appears for all Far-field Results in Harmonic Acoustic
analyses. Options include 3D (default), 2.5D Z-Direction Extrusion, and
2.5D Y-Axis Rotation Extrusion.

Model Thickness in Z-Direction: Appears when Model Type is set to

2.5D Z-Direction Extrusion for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0.

Y Axis Extrusion Angle: Appears when Model Type is set to 2.5D

Y-Axis Rotation Extrusion for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0 degrees.

Spatial Radiation Angle: Appears for Far-field Directivity and Far-field

Sound Power results in Harmonic Acoustic analyses. Options include
Full (default) and Partial.

Starting Radiation Angle Phi: Appears when Spatial Radiation Angle

is set to Partial for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0 degrees.

Ending Radiation Angle Phi: Appears when Spatial Radiation Angle

is set to Partial for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0 degrees.

Starting Radiation Angle Theta: Appears when Spatial Radiation

Angle is set to Partial for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0 degrees.

Ending Radiation Angle Theta: Appears when Spatial Radiation Angle

is set to Partial for a Far-field Result. Defaults to 0.0 degrees.
Visibility Controls Radial Axis Bounds: Appears for all Far-Field Results in Harmonic
Acoustic analyses except for the Far-Field Sound Power Level result.
Options include Program Controlled (default) and Manual. Using the
Manual option, you can set the radial bounds in the far-field chart to
desired minimum and maximum values using the properties listed below.

Minimum Value: Define minimum value for Radial Axis Bounds

property. The default value is 0.0.
Maximum Value: Define maximum value for Radial Axis Bounds
property. The default value is 0.0.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects:

– For Direct Stress, Maximum Bending Stress, Maximum Combined Stress, Minimum Bending Stress,
and Minimum Combined Stress: Beam Tool.

– For Directional Deformation and Total Deformation: Beam Tool and Solution (p. 703).

– For all other result objects: Solution (p. 703).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 679
Results and Result Tools (Group)

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– For Beam Tool: Comment (p. 97), Direct Stress, Directional Deformation, Figure (p. 241), Im-
age (p. 283), Maximum Bending Stress , Maximum Combined Stress, Minimum Bending Stress,
Minimum Combined Stress, and Total Deformation.

– For all other objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Note:

Alert (p. 15) and Convergence (p. 159) may also apply.

Insertion Methods
• For results and result tools that are direct child objects of a Solution (p. 703) object, use any of the
following methods after highlighting the Solution object:

– Open one of the tab drop-down menus or result category on the Solution Context Tab.

– Right-click the Solution (p. 703) object or in the Geometry window, select Insert, and then select
desired result or result category.

• For results that are direct child objects of a specific result tool, use any of the following methods
after highlighting the specific result tool object:

– Choose result on the Context tab related to the result tool.

– Right-click a specific result tool object, select Insert, and then select the desired result or result
category from the menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Export >

– Export Text File: Export result data as a text file.

– STL File: Export result data in Standard Tessellation Language (STL) file format (Binary is
the default format setting).

– Ansys Viewer File (AVZ): Export result data as a Ansys Viewer File (.avz)

• Create Results At All Sets

• Evaluate All Results

• Convert To Path Result (for Results scoped to Edges Only)

• Promote to Named Selection

• Clear Result Data

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
680 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Group Similar Objects

API Reference
See the Results section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Using Results

• Solution Context Tab

• Surface Body Results

• Automatic Result Creation for All Results Sets

• Tabular Data: You can use the Tabular Data window to make display changes to your results
as well as to create new results.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 681
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
682 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Semi-Elliptical Crack
Defines a semi-elliptical crack based on an internally generated mesh to analyze crack fronts by use of
geometric parameters.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 683
Semi-Elliptical Crack

Object
Properties (p. 685)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 687)

Insertion
Methods (p. 687)

Right-click
Options (p. 687)

API
Reference (p. 688)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 688)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
684 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only and always set to Analytical Crack for
Semi-Elliptical Cracks.

Scoping Method: Read-only and always set to Geometry Selection

when defining cracks.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification number ID for the crack object. The
application uses this identifier when creating solution identifiers for
fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system

that defines the position and orientation of the crack.

Align with Face Normal: Defines the Crack Coordinate System

orientation. Options include Yes (default) and No.

Project to Nearest Surface: Defines the Crack Coordinate System

origin. Options include Yes (default) and No.

Crack Shape: Read-only and always set to Semi-Elliptical.

Major Radius: Specifies the major radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the Z axis (that is, the width of the crack). The
specified value must be greater than 0.

Minor Radius: Specifies the minor radius, which defines the size of
the crack shape along the X axis (that is, the depth of the crack).
The specified value must be greater than 0.

Mesh Method: Selects the mesh method to be used to mesh the

semi-elliptical crack. Options include Hex Dominant (default) and
Tetrahedrons.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0.

Growth Rate (Mesh Method set to Tetrahedrons only): Specifies

the factor with which the mesh layers will grow along the radius of
the crack. Specify a value greater than 1. The default value is 1.2.
The recommended value is equal to or greater than 1.1.

Crack Front Divisions (Mesh Method set to Hex Dominant only):

Specifies the number of divisions for the crack front. The value must
be equal to or greater than 3. The default is 15. The Geometry

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 685
Semi-Elliptical Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
window can display only a maximum of 999 crack front divisions,
but you can specify a higher value and fracture meshing will respect
it.

Front Element Size (Mesh Method set to Tetrahedrons only):

Specifies the element size for the crack front. Default value is
computed from crack's ellipse perimeter, which is crack ellipse
perimeter/100. Specify a value greater than 0.

Fracture Affected Zone(Mesh Method set to Hex Dominant only):

The fracture affected zone is the region that contains a crack. The
Fracture Affected Zone control determines how the fracture affected
zone height is defined. When set to Program Controlled, the
software calculates the height, and Fracture Affected Zone Height
is read-only. This is the default. When set to Manual, you enter the
height in the Fracture Affected Zone Height field.

Fracture Affected Zone Height(Mesh Method set to Hex Dominant

only): This value specifies two things: 1) the height of the Fracture
Affected Zone, which is in the Y direction of the crack coordinate
system; and 2) the distance in totality by which the Fracture Af-
fected Zone is extended in the positive and negative Z direction of
the crack coordinate system from the crack front extremities.

Circumferential Divisions (Mesh Method set to Hex Dominant

only): Specifies the number of circumferential divisions for the crack
shape. The default is 8. Your entry must be a multiple of 8 and it
must be equal to or greater than 8. The Geometry window can
display only a maximum of 360 circumferential divisions, but you
can specify a higher value and fracture meshing will respect it.

Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the

crack shape. Your entry must be equal to or greater than 1. The
default is 6. The Geometry window can display only a maximum of
100 mesh contours, but you can specify a higher value and fracture
meshing will respect it.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value must
be less than or equal to the value of Mesh Contours, and cannot
be greater than 99. By default, the value is Match Mesh Contours,
indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal to the number
of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match Mesh
Contours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Crack object. The default

is No. The Crack object is suppressed automatically if the scoped
body is suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale Buffer Zone Scale Factors
Factors

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
686 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
It controls the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and Z directions,
relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling parameter,
use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is 2. The
maximum dimension among the three directions of the crack is
multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer zone.
When the mesh method is Hex-Dominant, the crack dimensions
also includes fracture affected zone.

• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For details, refer to the Performing a Fracture Analysis and
the Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects sections
for more information.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Semi-Elliptical Crack option from the Crack group on
the Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the
menu. Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 687
Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Semi-Elliptical Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Semi-Elliptical Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
688 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
SMART Crack Growth
Simulates fatigue and static crack propagation in a structure.

Object
Properties (p. 690)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 692)

Insertion
Methods (p. 692)

Right-click
Options (p. 692)

API
Reference (p. 692)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 692)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 689
SMART Crack Growth

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Defin- Analysis: Read-only field that describes the object – Crack Growth.
i-
tion Method: Read-only field that specifies the crack growth method – SMART.

Suppressed: Include or exclude the object.

Op- Initial Crack: Provides a drop-down list. Select the desired crack you have created to
tions simulate crack growth propagation.
for
Crack Crack Growth Option: Allows you to specify the crack growth option. Options include
Growth Fatigue (default) and Static.

Crack Growth Option = Fatigue

When the Crack Growth Option property is set to Fatigue, the read-only
option Material Data Table populates the Failure Criteria Option property.

In addition, the application displays the following associated properties:

• Material: The application automatically selects the default material

of scoped Crack body. You can change the material using the
property's fly-out menu. Any material that you select must include
the material property Paris’ Law.

• Crack Growth Law: Read-only property that displays the given Crack
Growth Law: Paris' Law.

• Crack Growth Methodology: Select your crack growth methodology

for crack growth propagation. The options include: Life Cycle
Prediction (default) and Cycle By Cycle.

If you specify Cycle By Cycle, the property Incremental Number of

Cycles displays. It enables you to specify the incremental number of
cycles during a substep. The default setting is 10.

• Min Increment of Crack Extension: Specifies the minimum crack

extension increment value. The options include:

– Program Controlled: The application uses the default minimum

increment value.

– Manual: You specify the value. The default value is 0.

• Max Increment of Crack Extension: Specifies the maximum crack

extension increment value. The options include:

– Program Controlled: The application uses the default

maximum increment value.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
690 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
– Manual: You specify the value. The default value is 0.

• Stress Ratio: Specifies the stress ratio. The default value is 0. The entry
range is less than 1.

Crack Growth Option = Static

When the Crack Growth Option property is set to Static, the following
drop-down menu options are available. Each option requires you to specify
a value in the dependent property Critical Rate. The unit system of the
Critical Rate property varies based on your selection. The property can be
parameterized.

• Stress Intensity Factor: The Critical Rate default value is 0.

• J-Integral: The Critical Rate default value is 0.

Failure Criteria Option: The options of this property are dependent upon the selection
made for the Crack Growth Option.

Stop Criterion: Options include None (default), Max Crack Extension, Free Boundary,
Max Stress Intensity Factor, and Max Total Number of Cycles (displayed when the
Crack Growth Option property is set to Fatigue). When you select the Max Crack
Extension, Max Stress Intensity Factor, or the Max Total Number of Cycles, the
--Stop Value property displays. This property requires you to enter a value for the
selected Stop Criterion option. Once the maximum stop criterion limit is reached,
the application stops the solution process. In this instance, the solution is incomplete
and the Solution folder will not be in solved state because the solution is not complete
for all time points. If the maximum stop criterion limit is not reached during solution,
then the solution process completes normally.
Remesh- Mesh Coarsening: You use this property to define a desired level of coarsening of
ing the excessively fine mesh surrounding the crack front during the SMART crack growth
Con- remeshing processing. Options include:
trols
• Conservative (default): This option performs the least amount of mesh
coarsening and creates a larger number of nodes and elements after a
substantial amount of crack-growth. This options offers the greatest remeshing
success rate.

• Moderate: This option modestly reduces the number of nodes and elements
and offers a satisfactory remeshing success rate.

• Aggressive: This option quickly coarsens the mesh in the region behind crack
front and offers the largest reduction in the number of nodes and elements
following a substantial amount of crack-growth.

Step Auto Time Stepping: Property options include Program Controlled (default) or
Con- Manual. Setting the property to Manual enables you to modify the following time
trols step properties, otherwise they are read-only.
for
Crack Initial Time Step: Defines the initial time step to initiate crack growth.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 691
SMART Crack Growth

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Growth Minimum Time Step: Minimum time step for subsequent crack growth.
(Only
available Maximum Time Step: Maximum time step for subsequent crack growth.
when
the
Crack
Growth
property
is
set
to
Static.)

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Commands (p. 91).

Insertion Methods
• Select the Fracture object and select the SMART Crack Growth option on the Fracture Context Tab.

• Right-click the Fracture object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > SMART Crack Growth.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Interface Delamination

– Contact Debonding

– SMART Crack Growth

• Suppress

API Reference
See the SMART Crack Growth section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining SMART Crack Growth

• SMART Crack Growth Application

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
692 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Results (Fracture Tool)

• Fracture Probes (Fracture Tool)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 693
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
694 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Smoothing
Creates a Stereolithography (STL), Part Manager Database (.pmdb), or Mechanical APDL common database
(.cdb) file from the parent Topology Density result. Available via the Topology Density result object.Once
inserted, you can create the Smoothed STL file of the optimized topology that is extracted from the
optimization run. This object includes a Move Limit property that you can use to achieve your desired
smoothing. No smoothing is performed if the Move Limit property is set to zero (0).

The Smoothing feature uses an algorithm that is different than the one used by the parent Topology
Density result object to extract isosurfaces. Therefore, the results presented by the Smoothing object
may be slightly different than those of the parent result. This is especially noticeable for Retained
Threshold values (that approach 0 or 1) as well as thin Member Size values.

Multiple Smoothing objects can be added for each Topology Density result. In addition, you can use
the STL geometry file or the Part Manager Database (.pmdb) file for downstream validation systems.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 695
Smoothing

Object
Properties (p. 696)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 697)

Insertion
Methods (p. 697)

Right-click
Options (p. 697)

API
Reference (p. 697)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 697)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Move Limit: You use this property to specify how much each node is
allowed to move (in length units). The default value is 0. You can specify
any value greater than 0. As the value increases, the application further
smooths the design, but at the same time, it increases the difference

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
696 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
between the optimal design. Therefore, you need to find a reasonable
compromise between smoothing and maintaining your optimal design.

Note:

To make sure that results remain realistic, this entry

cannot be greater than the size of an element (Element
Size property of the Mesh (p. 475) object). The smoothing
process stops as soon as one node meets the limit.

File Name: Displays the temporary folder location the application uses
to save the STL geometry file.
Display Color: Select a graphics display color.

Statistics (Triangles): Read-only property that displays the number of

triangles included in your STL geometry.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Topology Density object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No supported child objects.

Insertion Methods
With a Topology Density result object selected:

• Select the Smoothing option from the Results group of the Solution Context Tab.

• Right-click, and select Insert > Smoothing.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Smoothing

• Duplicate Without Results

• Evaluate

API Reference
See the Smoothing section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 697
Smoothing

• Topology Density

• Structural Optimization in Mechanical

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
698 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solid
Creates and adds a solid part to the model you have imported into Mechanical.

Object Properties (p. 699)

Tree Dependencies (p. 700)

Insertion Methods (p. 700)

Right-click Options (p. 700)

API Reference (p. 700)

Additional Related
Information (p. 701)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Type: Read-only field that describes the object - Box.

Coordinate System: You use this property to change the coordinate system. The
default is Global Coordinate System.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 699
Solid

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
The following properties define the Solid object's dimensions. These properties
define a start and end point for each dimension of your three-dimensional solid
part.

X1/X2
Y1/Y2
Z1/Z2

Part Name: Read-only field that displays the application assigned name. You can
change the Part Name property by changing the name of your Solid object and
updating the geometry. Changing the name in this way will also update the name
of the Solid object under the Geometry folder.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Construction Geometry (p. 139).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: No child objects are currently supported.

Insertion Methods
• Select the Solid option from the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context
Tab.

• Right-click the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object and select Insert > Solid.

• Select the Solid option from the Create group on the Construction Geometry Context tab.

• Select the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object, right-click in the Geometry window, and select Insert
> Solid.

• Right-click an existing Solid object and select Insert > Solid.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Solid

• Add to Geometry: This options generates your new solid part.

• Update Geometry: You use this option to apply any changes that you have made to the solid
part.

• Remove Geometry: This option removes the solid part from the Geometry folder.

API Reference
See the Solid section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
700 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
• Specifying a Solid

• Specifying Construction Geometry

• Path Object Reference (p. 575)

• Surface Object Reference (p. 747)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 701
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
702 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solution
Manages all specified results, result tools, solution information, probes, etc.

Object Properties (p. 703)

Tree Dependencies (p. 707)

Insertion Methods (p. 707)

Right-click Options (p. 707)

API Reference (p. 708)

Additional Related
Information (p. 708)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Result File: This property is only visible when you select the By
Reference option of the Read Result Files feature.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 703
Solution

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Adaptive Mesh Max Refinement Loops
Refinement
Refinement Depth
Refinement Con- Element Selection
trols - appears only
for magnetostatic Energy Based: Displays if Element Selection is set to Manual.
analyses if a Conver-
gence object is Error Based: Displays if Element Selection is set to Manual.
inserted under a
result.
Information Status

If your analysis system is using the Mechanical APDL Solver, the

following additional properties display:

MAPDL Elapsed Time: You can parameterize this property.

MAPDL Memory Used
MAPDL Result File Size
Cyclic Solution Dis- Number of Sectors: For an analysis that includes a Cyclic Region,
play this value indicates how many sectors should be processed, displayed
and animated. Results generate more quickly and consume less
memory and file storage when fewer sectors are requested. The
default setting is Program Controlled (0).

Starting at Section: For an analysis that includes a Cyclic Region,

selects the specific sectors to include within the expansion. For
example, if Number of Sectors property is set to 1, sectors 1 through
N are revealed one at a time. The default setting is Program
Controlled (0).
Post Processing Beam Section Results (Line Bodies Only): Options include Yes and
No (default). This property enables you to choose whether to display
beam results using expanded data when you specify your line body
model as a beam/pipe that includes cross sections (SECDATA). This
means that the application displays beam results with realistic
contours that can vary along all coordinates and display stress and
strain results as well as deformations, such as torsional rotation.
Displaying unexpanded results reduces the amount of storage
required for the result, however, the application displays the beam
contour results using constant radial values. As a result, the setting
of the property directly affects the results values displayed on your
model.

Note:

• The application always uses expanded results when

displaying animations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
704 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions

• Probe annotation labels always display expanded

results.

Frequency Display (Modal Analyses Only): Displays when the Solver

Type property (Analysis Settings) is set to Full Damped. Options for
this property include Program Controlled (default) and All. Setting
the property to All enables the results evaluation to be carried out
on all the frequencies extracted from the modal solution (that may
or may not be conjugate pair). This process increases the number
of results sets and listings of the frequencies in the Tabular Data
window even if you request a lower number of modes. When set to
Program Controlled, the results evaluation treats complex
frequencies as complex conjugate pairs.

Note:

The Tabular Data window can display negative

frequencies when the solver reports nonconjugate
pairs of complex frequencies. Setting the Frequency
Display property to All displays all complex
frequencies. This enables you to specify results at
desired frequencies.

On Demand Stress/Strain: Supported for Static Structural analyses

only. The options include Yes and No (default). This property
generates element nodal stress, elastic strain, and thermal strain
results without writing the associated data to the result (.rst) file.
When you request results to be evaluated with this option, the
application calculates these result quantities using the displacements
available in the result file. This feature enables you to minimize the
size of the result file while also reviewing results. However, the
processing requirements are slowed.

Recommendations

Review the following recommendations for the use of the

On Demand Stress/Strain property:

• Set the Stress and Strain properties of the Output

Controls of the Analysis Settings object to No.

• If you apply Thermal Conditions in order to calculate

Thermal Strains, you should set the Nodal Forces
property (Output Controls > Analysis Settings)
property to Yes.

• If you have performed a solution with this property

set to No, you should clear any generated data prior

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 705
Solution

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
to changing the property to Yes in order to establish
clean data.

• To display Structural Error results, set the General

Miscellaneous property (Analysis Settings > Output
Controls) to Yes.

Limitations

Review the following limitations for the use of this feature:

• It cannot display Elemental Euler Angle results.

• Result evaluation slows considerably when you set

the Calculate Time History property to Yes for a
result in a multistep analysis.

• The application does not support Stress, Elastic

Strain, and Thermal Strain for tapered shell models.

• Stress and Strain results are not supported for line

bodies defined with pipe elements.

During a Structural Optimization in Mechanical, the application

displays the following additional properties in the Post Processing
category:

Export Optimal Shape

You can further analyze your optimized model, through

continued simulation or by performing a design validation
by exporting your results and making them available to a
new downstream system.

The Export Optimal Shape property enables you to

automatically export your results in Standard Tessellation
Language (STL) and in Part Manager Database (PMDB) file
format, archive the files in zip file format, and then place
the zipped file in the Solver Files Directory. This option is
set to Only Geometry by default.

In order to make the optimized results available to a

downstream system, you need to create the new system on
the Workbench Project Schematic and link the Results cell
of your Structural Optimization analysis to the Geometry
cell of a new downstream system, either a Geometry
component system or the Geometry cell of another analysis
system. Refer to the Design Validation section for additional
details about this process.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
706 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Topology Result

When the Export Optimal Shape property is set to Only

Geometry, the Topology Result property also displays. The
No setting removes this property form the Details view. The
Topology Result property provides a drop-down of available
Topology Density results. For the Structural Optimization
Environment, the Topology Result property includes a
default selection.

Definition Environment Selection List: Read-only property that points to the

(Structural upstream analysis system (system cell ID) being used for the solution
Optimization only) in your Structural Optimization analysis. You may use the options
available in the property to select a different upstream system.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Any Environment (p. 211) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: All general Results and Result Tools (p. 665), Commands (p. 91), Com-
ment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), and Solution Information (p. 711).

Insertion Methods
This object displays by default for any analysis.

Note:

A Solution object cannot be deleted from the tree.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– [supported result types (p. 665)]

– Commands

– Python Code

• Solve

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 707
Solution

• Get Results: Available only for a completed solution on a remote machine.

Note:

For a solution completed using the Ansys Remote Solve Manager (RSM), ff you
have the RSM Output Files Download preference set to Show, the RSM File
Manager dialog displays, and enables you to select or clear the input/output
files you wish to download. See the Results category of the Options dialog to
change this preference. The default setting is to hide this dialog. The dialog dis-
plays with certain files selected by default. See the Understanding Solving section
for more information.

• Evaluate All Results

• Stop Solution: Available only for remote solutions.

• Interrupt Solution: Available only for remote solutions.

• Export Nastran File

• Clear Generated Data

• Group All Similar Children

• Open Solver Files Directory

• Reload Result File: This option is visible when you are using the By Reference option of the
Read Result Files feature. It enables you to re-read the selected result files and reevaluate the
solution.

• Worksheet: Result Summary: Available following the completion of the solution process. This
option displays the results content in a tabular format.

API Reference
See the Solution section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Understanding Solving

• Solution Context Tab

• Adaptive Convergence

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
708 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solution Combination
Manages solutions that are derived from the results of one or more environments. See the Solution
Combination section for additional information about the use of this feature.

Object
Properties (p. 709)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 710)

Insertion
Methods (p. 710)

Right-click
Options (p. 710)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 710)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Worksheet Type: This property specifies how you want to combine base cases for
a specified result. Options include Multiple (default) and Envelope.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 709
Solution Combination

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
When you select the Envelope option, the Envelope Type property displays.
You use this property to define whether you want the application to display
Maximum (default) or Minimum result values.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: all stress and strain result objects, Directional Deformation, Total Deform-
ation, Beam (Static and Transient Structural only), Contact Tool (only for Frictional Stress, Penetration,
Pressure, and Sliding Distance), Fatigue Tool, Stress Tool (Static and Transient Structural only), Beam
Tool, Comment (p. 97), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533) object:

• Select the Solution Combination option on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click the Model (p. 533) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Solution
Combination.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > [supported result options]

• Solve

• Clear Generated Data

Additional Related Information

• Solution Combination

• Underdefined Solution Combinations (Troubleshooting)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
710 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Solution Information
Tracks and monitors your nonlinear solution as well as potentially diagnose problems that may arise.
It also enables you to view certain finite element graphical aspects of the model, such as finite element
connections.

Object Properties (p. 711)

Tree Dependencies (p. 712)

Insertion Methods (p. 712)

Right-click Options (p. 712)

API Reference (p. 713)

Additional Related
Information (p. 713)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 711
Solution Information

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Solution Solution Output: Not available when you insert a Solution Information object
Information under the Connections object. See the Specifying Solution Information section for
a description of all of the available options for this property.

Newton-Raphson Residuals: Applicable only to structural environments.

Identify Element Violations: Applicable only to nonlinear structural environments.

Update Interval: Appears for synchronous solutions only.

Display Points: Not applicable to Connections object.

Display Filter During Solve: Appears for Explicit Dynamics systems only.
FE Activate Visibility
Connection
Visibility Display

Draw Connections Attached To

Line Color

Color: Displays if the Line Color property is set to Manual.

Visible on Results

Line Thickness

Display Type

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Connections (p. 129) and Solution (p. 703).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), Result Trackers (p. 653) (available only
when Solution (p. 703) is the parent), and Result Plot Trackers (p. 657).

Insertion Methods
• Automatically inserted under a Solution (p. 703) object of a new environment or of an environment
included in a database from a previous release.

• Right-click Connections (p. 129) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Solution In-
formation.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Evaluate All Contact Trackers

• Interrupt Solution

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
712 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Stop Solution

• Retrieve

• Get Results

Some options may only be available when you are performing a solution on a remote machine.

API Reference
See the Solution Information section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the Specifying Solution Information section.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 713
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
714 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Spot Weld
Defines conditions for individual contact and target pairs for a spot weld, which is used to connect in-
dividual surface body parts to form a surface body model assembly, just as a Contact Region (p. 147)
object is used to form a solid model assembly. Several Spot Weld objects can appear as child objects
under a Connection Group (p. 133) object. The Connection Group object name automatically changes
to Contacts.

Object
Properties (p. 715)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 716)

Insertion
Methods (p. 716)

Right-click
Options (p. 716)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 716)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 715
Spot Weld

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method
Contact
Target
Contact Bodies
Target Bodies
Definition Scope Mode
Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Inserted automatically if spot welds are defined in the CAD model and you choose Create
Automatic Connections by right-clicking the Connections (or Contacts) object.

• Click Spot Weld option on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) (or Connection Group) object or in the Geometry window
> Insert > Spot Weld.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Enable/Disable Transparency

• Hide All Other Bodies

• Flip Contact/Target

• Merge Selected Contact Regions - appears if contact regions share the same geometry type.

• Save Contact Region Settings

• Load Contact Region Settings

• Reset to Default

Additional Related Information

• Spot Welds

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
716 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Connections Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 717
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
718 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Spring
Regains its undeformed shape after a compression or extension load is removed.

Object
Properties (p. 720)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 723)

Insertion
Methods (p. 723)

Right-click
Options (p. 723)

API
Reference (p. 724)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 724)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 719
Spring

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Graphics Properties Visible
Definition Material: Selects a material to define a material-dependent damping
ratio. The material-dependent damping ratio is to be included in modal
damping calculations for use in MSUP analyses.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
720 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Type: Read-only field that describes the spring - Longitudinal

Spring Behavior: For Rigid Dynamics and Explicit Dynamics analyses,

the options include Both (default), Compression Only, and Tension
Only. For all other analysis types, Both is the only option and the field
is read-only.

Longitudinal Stiffness: Entry field.

Longitudinal Damping: Entry field.

Preload: Options include None (default), Load, and Free Length.

Suppressed

Spring Length: Read-only indication.

Element APDL Name: Optional property that enables you to manually

define an APDL parameter (in the input file) and assign its value to the
element of the Spring. This facilitates easy programmatic identification
of the Spring's element for later use/reference in a Commands object.
Scope Scope: Options include Body-Body or Body-Ground.
Reference Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection, Named Selection,
or Remote Point.

Applied By: Displays for Body-Body scoping. Specify as Remote Attach-

ment or Direct Attachment. The default for this property can differ if
you first select geometry or a mesh node.

Based on the selection made for the Scoping Method property of this
category, the next property is:

• Scope: Appears if Scope (under Scope group) is set to Body-

Body and Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection. Choose
geometry entity then click Apply.

• Reference Component: Appears if Scope (under Scope group)

is set to Body-Body and Scoping Method is set to Named Se-
lection.

• Remote Points: Appears if Scope (under Scope group) is set to

Body-Body and Scoping Method is set to Remote Point. This
property provides a drop-down list of available user-defined
Remote Points. This property is not available when the Applied
By property is specified as Direct Attachment.

Body: Appears if the Scope property (under Scope category) is set to

Body-Body. This property is a read-only indication of scoped geometry.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 721
Spring

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
The following options appear if Scope (under Scope group) is set to
Body-Ground or if Scope is set to Body-Body and Applied By is
specified as Remote Attachment.

• Coordinate System

• Reference X Coordinate

• Reference Y Coordinate

• Reference Z Coordinate

• Reference Location

• Behavior

• Material:Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.

Select a material to define material properties for the beams
used in the connection. Density is excluded from the material
definition.

• Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.

Specify a radius to define the cross section dimension of the
circular beam used for the connection.

• Pinball Region

Mobile Scoping Method: Specify as Geometry Selection, Named Selection,

or Remote Point.

Applied By: Specify as Remote Attachment or Direct Attachment.

The default for this property can differ if you first select geometry or a
mesh node.

Based on the selection made for the Scoping Method property of this
category, the next property is:

• Scope: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

Choose geometry entity then click Apply.

• Mobile Component: Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named

Selection.

• Remote Points: Appears if the Scoping Method is set to Remote

Point. This property provides a drop-down list of available
user-defined Remote Points. This property is not available when the
Applied By property is specified as Direct Attachment.

Body: Read-only indication of scoped geometry.

The following options appear if Scope (under Scope group) is set to

Body-Ground and Applied By is specified as Remote Attachment or

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
722 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
if Scope is set to Body-Body and Applied By is specified as Remote
Attachment.

• Coordinate System

• Mobile X Coordinate

• Mobile Y Coordinate

• Mobile Z Coordinate

• Mobile Location

• Behavior

• Material: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.

Select a material to define material properties for the beams
used in the connection. Density is excluded from the material
definition.

• Radius: Available when the Behavior property is set to Beam.

Specify a radius to define the cross section dimension of the
circular beam used for the connection.

• Pinball Region

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Connections (p. 129).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Connections (p. 129) object:

• Select Spring > Body-Ground or Body-Body, as applicable on the Connections Context Tab.

• Right-click the Connections (p. 129) object or in the Geometry window Insert > Spring.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Enable/Disable Transparency - similar behavior to feature in Contact Region.

• Promote to Remote Point (Remote Attachment Only)

• Promote to Named Selection

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 723
Spring

API Reference
See the Spring section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Connections Context

• Springs

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
724 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
STL
Imports and shows an STL (Stereolithography) file. Inserted using the Construction Geometry feature.

Object Properties (p. 725)

Tree Dependencies (p. 726)

Insertion Methods (p. 726)

Right-click Options (p. 726)

API Reference (p. 726)

Additional Related
Information (p. 726)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition File Name: Use this property to navigate to the appropriate folder and select your
STL geometry.

Length Units: Meters is the default setting. This property does not simply change
the unit, it rescales the STL geometry according to the new unit. Changing from
Meters to Centimeters resizes the model accordingly.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 725
STL

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Suppressed: Suppress/Unsuppress the object.
Display Show Always: Options include No (default) and Yes. If you set this property to
Yes, the application displays the STL geometry in the Geometry window regardless
of what object is selected in the tree.

Color: Change/specify a color for your STL geometry.

Statistics (Triangles): Read-only property that displays the number of triangles

included in your STL geometry.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Construction Geometry (p. 139).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• Select the STL option from the Import group on the Construction Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object and select Insert > STL.

• Select the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object, right-click in the Geometry window, and select Insert
> STL.

• Select the STL option from the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context
Tab.

• Right-click an existing STL object and select Insert > STL.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > STL

• Import STL File

• Suppress

API Reference
See the SLT section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Importing an STL File

• Construction Geometry Object Reference (p. 139)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
726 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
STL Support
Imports and meshes a support structure that is an STL (Stereolithography) file, of either volumeless or
solid type. This feature is designed primarily for inserting volumeless (that is, not watertight) supports,
such as those created by Additive Prep, into an additive manufacturing model for simulation.

After inserting this object, right-click and select Generate Mesh to mesh the support. The mesh is created
using elements that are internally divided into subdivisions to sample the presence of material and
calculate the overall density of each element. Each element's density is used, in turn, as a material
property knockdown factor.

Object Properties (p. 728)

Tree Dependencies (p. 729)

Insertion Methods (p. 729)

Right-click Options (p. 729)

API Reference (p. 730)

Additional Related
Information (p. 730)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 727
STL Support

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: File or STL. If you choose File, enter the File Name in the
File Name property. If you choose STL, an STL dropdown menu
appears where you select from previously imported Construction
Geometry STLs.

File Name: Navigate to the appropriate folder and select your STL
support file.

Length Units: A drop-down menu with units. Choose the units used
in the support file. Millimeters is the default setting.

If there are multiple bodies in the model, use the next two fields to
designate which body is associated with the STL support.

Scoping Method: Either Geometry Selection or Named Selection.

Geometry/Named Selection: Select the body (or Named Selection)

that is associated with the STL support.
Definition Nonlinear Effects: Yes (default) or No. This property applies nonlinear
effects to the finite element body.

STL Support Type: The type of support in the STL file. Options
include:

Volumeless: These are usually thin, single-bead width support walls

that are not watertight, such as lattice or tree-type supports, or
Block/Heartcell/Rod/Line supports from Additive Prep. Other names
in the industry for this type include thin wall, vector, and facet.

Solid: These supports are standard, watertight geometry bodies.

Custom supports from Additive Prep are in this category. Other
names in the industry for this type include thick wall, bulk, and
volume.

Wall Thickness: Wall Thickness value is the thickness of a single-bead

width laser scan set by your machine. Available only if STL Support
Type = Volumeless.

Subsample Rate: Subsample Rate value. Each element is divided

into sampling regions to determine an overall element density used
as a material knockdown factor within that element. A Subsample
Rate of 5 (default) = 5 x 5 x 5 = 125 subdivisions. Subsample Rate
affects the accuracy of element density.

Element Size: Read-only indication of the element size, which is

taken from the part's mesh size criteria. Visible only after mesh
generation.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
728 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Display Support View: A drop-down menu with the following options:

STL View: Displays the STL support.

Mesh View: Displays the elements associated with the STL support.
Visible only after mesh generation.

Knockdown Factors: Displays the element densities associated with

the STL support. Visible only after mesh generation.
Statistics Read-only indications only visible once you have generated the mesh
for the support.

Nodes: The number of nodes generated for the support.

Elements: The number of elements generated for the support.

Volume: The volume of all the elements generated for the support.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Support Group (p. 743), which is under AM Process (p. 21) object.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: None.

Insertion Methods
• Select the AM Process object and then select the STL Support option from the AM Process Context
Tab.

• Right-click the AM Process object and then select the Insert > STL Support.

• Select the Support Group object and then select the STL Support option from the AM Process
Context Tab.

• Right-click the Support Group object and then select the Insert > STL Support.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert

– Predefined Support (p. 597)

– Generated Support (p. 261)

– STL Support (p. 727)

– Commands (p. 91)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 729
STL Support

• Generate Mesh: Generates a mesh of elements for the support using Subsample Rate to determine
knockdown factors.

• Create Named Selection of Generated Elements: Creates a Named Selection consisting of the
generated elements for the support.

• Create Named Selection of External Element Faces: Creates a Named Selection consisting of
the faces of the generated elements for the support.

• Suppress: Suppresses the STL support from the simulation.

• Clear Generated Data: Clears any generated elements on the supports.

API Reference
See the SLT AM Support section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

LPBF Simulation Guide

Identify and/or Generate Supports

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
730 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Stage
During a Multistage Cyclic Symmetry simulation, you need to specify one or more Stage objects in
combination with Cyclic Regions or Pre-Meshed Cyclic Regions and Interstage (p. 419) objects. Once
properly defined, this combination of features enables the accurate and efficient simulation of rotationally
periodic structures, from gears to turbomachinery assemblies. For a detailed discussion and underlying
theory, see Multistage Cyclic Symmetry Analysis Guide.

This object is scoped to body selections (only). These bodies also define the bodies of a Sector for an
associated Cyclic Region or a Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region.

Object Properties (p. 732)

Tree Dependencies (p. 732)

Insertion Methods (p. 732)

Worksheet (p. 732)

Right-click Options (p. 733)

API Reference (p. 733)

Additional Related
Information (p. 733)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 731
Stage

Object Properties
The Details pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Select how you want to scope the object, using either
a Geometry Selection (default) or a Named Selection.
Definition Suppressed: Options include Yes or No (default). Removes (and
re-includes) the object from analysis processes.

Behavior: Read-only property that displays the symmetry type. Currently,

only Cyclic is supported.

Cyclic Region: Use this property to specify the desired Cyclic Region
or Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region object to be used to define the stage.
Advanced Stage Name: Read-only property that displays the application generated
name for the object that is included in the input file.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Object: Symmetry (p. 753).

• Valid Child Objects: Figure (p. 241) and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Select the Symmetry folder and:

• Select the Stage option from the Symmetry Context tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Stage.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Stage.

Worksheet
The stage worksheet (see below) displays automatically when a Stage object is selected. Use the
worksheet to specify Harmonic Index values for standalone Static Structural analyses, Modal analyses,
or Steady-State Thermal analyses during your multistage analysis.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
732 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Stage

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Stage section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Information
Multistage Cyclic Symmetry Analysis
Interstage (p. 419)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 733
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
734 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Stress Tool (Group)
Provides stress safety tools for analyzing simulation results.

Applies to the following objects: Safety Factor, Safety Margin, Stress Ratio, and Stress Tool

Object Properties (p. 735)

Tree Dependencies (p. 736)

Insertion Methods (p. 737)

Right-click Options (p. 737)

API Reference (p. 737)

Additional Related
Information (p. 737)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

For Stress Tool:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Theory
Factor - Appears only if Theory is set to Max Shear Stress.
Stress Limit - Appears only if Stress Limit Type is set to Custom
Value.
Stress Limit Type - Appears if Theory is set to any stress tool except
Mohr-Coulomb Stress.
Tensile Limit - Appears only if Theory is set to Mohr-Coulomb
Stress and Tensile Limit Type is set to Custom Value.
Compressive Limit - Appears only if Theory is set to Mohr-Coulomb
Stress and Compressive Limit Type is set to Custom Value.
Tensile Limit Type - Appears only if Theory is set to Mohr-Coulomb
Stress.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 735
Stress Tool (Group)

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Compressive Limit Type - Appears only if Theory is set to Mohr-
Coulomb Stress.

For Safety Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method
Geometry - Use selection filters to pick geometry, click in the Geo-
metry field, then click Apply.
Definition Type – Read-only display of specific stress tool object name.
By
Display Time
Calculate Time History
Use Average
Identifier
Results - Read-only Minimum
display of the following
values: Maximum: Displays only for Stress Ratio.
Minimum Occurs On
Maximum Occurs On: Displays only for Stress Ratio.
Information - Read-only Time
display of the following
values: Load Step
Substep
Iteration Number

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object:

– For Stress Tool: Solution (p. 703) in a static structural or transient structural analysis.

– For Safety Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio: Stress Tool.

• Valid Child Tree Objects:

– For Stress Tool: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Safety Factor, Safety Margin,
and Stress Ratio.

– For Safety Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio: Alert (p. 15), Comment (p. 97), Conver-
gence (p. 159), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
736 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
• For Stress Tool, use any of the following methods after highlighting Solution (p. 703) object in a
static structural or transient structural analysis:

– Open the Toolbox drop-down menu on the Solution Context Tab and select the Stress Tool.

– Right-click the Solution (p. 703) object or in the Geometry window Insert > Stress Tool > Max
Equivalent Stress or Max Shear Stress or Mohr-Coulomb Stress or Max Tensile Stress.

• For Safety Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio, use any of the following methods after highlighting
Stress Tool object:

– Choose Safety Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio on Stress Tool Context tab.

– Right-click the Stress Tool object or in the Geometry window > Insert > Stress Tool > Safety
Factor, Safety Margin, or Stress Ratio.

Right-click Options
The right-click context menu option Evaluate All Results - is available for Safety Factor, Safety Margin,
Stress Ratio, and Stress Tool.

API Reference
See the Stress Tool Result section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Stress Tools

• Maximum Equivalent Stress Safety Tool

• Maximum Shear Stress Safety Tool

• Mohr-Coulomb Stress Safety Tool

• Maximum Tensile Stress Safety Tool

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 737
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
738 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Substructure Definition
Defines the characteristics (stiffness, mass, damping) of the matrices generated during the process of
creating the superelement during a Substructure Generation analysis. By default, all bodies of your
model are scoped to this object.

Note:

Only Named Selections and Remote Point objects can be selected as interfaces.

Note:

The application treats added masses (from Point Masses and Distributed Masses) as internal
to the superelement.

Tip:

You can drag-and-drop any Named Selection or Remote Point onto this object for automatic
scoping.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 739
Substructure Definition

Object
Properties (p. 740)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 741)

Insertion
Methods (p. 741)

Right-click
Options (p. 741)

API
Reference (p. 741)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 741)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry Geometry: Read-only property that displays the number of bodies of the model.
Definition Physics Type: Read-only property indicating the physics type (Structural).

Matrix Reduction Method: Read-only property indicating the Component Mode

Synthesis (CMS) method - the only available method.

Interface Method: Options include Fixed (default) or Free.

Lumped Mass Formulation: Specify the desired lumped mass matrix formulation.
Options include Program Controlled (default), Off, and On. The Off setting uses

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
740 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
the element-dependent default mass matrix formulation and the On setting uses
a lumped mass approximation.

Generate Damping Matrix: Specify whether to generate a damping matrix. Options

include Program Controlled (default), Yes, and No.
Interfaces Number of Interfaces: Read-only display of the number of interface entries detected
by the application.

Number of Master Nodes: Read-only display of the number of superelement

master nodes resulting from interfaces.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Substructure Definition.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
This object is automatically included in the analysis system.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Commands

API Reference
See the Substructure Generation Condensed Part section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific
scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Substructure Generation Analysis

• Substructure Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 741
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
742 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Support Group
Groups Predefined Support and/or Generated Support objects in an AM process simulation. Also use
this object to detect element faces for a Generated Support.

Object
Properties (p. 743)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 744)

Insertion
Methods (p. 744)

Right-click
Options (p. 744)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 745)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 743
Support Group

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection (default) and Named
Selections.

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

Named Selection: Displays when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selec-
tion. Select a desired Named Selection from the drop-down menu.
Detect The Detect Group category includes the properties listed below. You use these
Group properties to automatically detect element faces to be applied to Generated
Supports. See Identify and/or Generate Supports for more information.

Generate On Remesh
Overhang Angle
Detect Above Z Location
Output Type
Group By

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: AM Process (p. 21).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Predefined Support (p. 597), Generated Support (p. 261), and STL Sup-
port (p. 727).

Insertion Methods
• Select the AM Process object and then select the Support Group option from the Supports group
on the AM Process Context tab.

• Right-click the AM Process object and then select the Insert > Support Group.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert

– Predefined Support (p. 597)

– Generated Support (p. 261)

– STL Support (p. 727)

– Commands (p. 91)

• Detect Supports: Detect element faces to be applied to Generated Supports.

• Detect and Generate Supports: Detect element faces and generate supports for the build
bodies.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
744 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Additional Related Information
LPBF Simulation Guide

Identify and/or Generate Supports

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 745
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
746 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Surface
Represents a section plane to which you can scope results.

Object Properties (p. 747)

Tree Dependencies (p. 747)

Insertion Methods (p. 748)

API Reference (p. 748)

Additional Related
Information (p. 748)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Coordinate System

Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Construction Geometry (p. 139).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 747
Surface

Insertion Methods
• Select the Surface option from the Construction Geometry drop-down menu on the Model Context
Tab.

• Select the Surface option from the Create group on the Construction Geometry Context tab.

• Right-click the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object and select Insert > Surface.

• Select the Construction Geometry (p. 129) object, right-click in the Geometry window, and select Insert
> Surface.

• Right-click an existing Surface object and select Insert > Surface.

API Reference
See the Surface section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Specifying a Surface

• Specifying Construction Geometry

• Construction Geometry Object Reference (p. 139)

• Path Object Reference (p. 575)

• Solid Object Reference (p. 699)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
748 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Surface Coating
Applies a surface coating (shell layer) of a specified material and thickness over one or more faces of
your model. This feature is beneficial when you want to include the ability to accurately evaluate surface
stresses or to overlay your structure with thin parts, such as modeling Thermal Barrier Coatings or sheet
metal over support structures. To accurately model this type of application, Mechanical enables you to
specify the thickness, stiffness behavior, coordinate system, and material.

Important:

During a Cyclic Symmetry analysis, the application does not expand Surface Coating results.

Object Properties (p. 750)

Tree Dependencies (p. 750)

Insertion Methods (p. 751)

Right-click Options (p. 751)

API Reference (p. 751)

Additional Related
Information (p. 751)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 749
Surface Coating

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Specify this property as either Geometry Selection or Named
Selection.

Geometry: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection. Use
the Face selection filters to pick your geometry, click in the Geometry field, then
click Apply.

Named Selection: Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named Selection.
This field provides a drop-down list of available face-based (only) user–defined
Named Selections.
Definition Stiffness Behavior: Options include the following.

• Stress Evaluation Only (default): Use this option to evaluate stresses and
strains on the exterior surface(s). Elements do not provide any stiffness
contribution to the model. This option does not require a Thickness entry.

• Membrane Only: Elements have membrane stiffness only.

• Membrane and Bending: Elements have membrane and bending stiffness.

Note:

By default, Mechanical automatically sets the Shell Offset to Bottom

for all Stiffness Behavior settings.

Thickness: Define the thickness of the Surface Coating. This property can be
designated as a parameter.

Material: Using the fly-out menu of this property you can select an existing material,
create a new material definition, or import a new material. Creating and/or
importing materials automatically open the Engineering Data Workspace, enabling
you to make your material selections/specifications. Once you have completed
either of these operations, you must refresh the Model cell in the Project
Schematic to bring new data into the Mechanical application.

Coordinate System

Suppressed

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
750 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Geometry (p. 265) object or the Body (p. 55)
object:

• Click Surface Coating option on the Geometry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Geometry (p. 265) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Surface
Coating.

• Select the desired face geometry from the parts available beneath the geometry object, right-
click, and select Insert > Surface Coating. This option automatically specifies the geometry.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation (p. 203)

– Point Mass

– Distributed Mass (p. 189)

– Surface Coating

– Thickness (p. 769) (available based on analysis specifications)

– Layered Section (p. 437) (available based on analysis specifications)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Surface Coating section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Applying a Surface Coating

• Scoping Results to Surface Coating

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 751
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
752 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Symmetry
Represents all definitions of symmetry or periodic/cyclic planes within a model. Each symmetry definition
is represented in a Symmetry Region (p. 755) object, each periodic definition is represented in a Periodic
Region (p. 579) object, and each cyclic definition is represented in a Cyclic Region (p. 579) object.

Object Properties (p. 753)

Tree Dependencies (p. 753)

Insertion Methods (p. 754)

Right-click Options (p. 754)

API Reference (p. 754)

Additional Related
Information (p. 754)

Object Properties
The Symmetry object does not include any Details pane properties. However, if you have Beta Options
active, the Details pane includes Graphical Expansion properties. Note that these Graphical Expansion
properties are not supported when a Cyclic Region is specified.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), Image (p. 283), Periodic/Cyclic Re-
gion (p. 579), Symmetry Region (p. 755), and General Axisymmetric (p. 257).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 753
Symmetry

Insertion Methods
• Automatically inserted in the tree if model includes symmetry planes defined in DesignModeler (using
the Symmetry or Enclosure feature).

• For manual insertion, use any of the following methods after highlighting Model object:

– Choose Symmetry on the Model Context Tab.

– Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window > Insert > Symmetry.

Note:

Only one Symmetry object is valid per Model.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Symmetry Region

– Linear Periodic

– Cyclic Region

– Pre-Meshed Cyclic Region

– General Axisymmetric

API Reference
See the Symmetry section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Symmetry Application

• Symmetry Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
754 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Symmetry Region
Defines an individual plane for symmetry or anti-symmetry conditions (including linear periodic sym-
metry). The Symmetry (p. 753) folder house all Symmetry Region objects.

Object Properties (p. 755)

Tree Dependencies (p. 756)

Insertion Methods (p. 756)

Right-click Options (p. 756)

API Reference (p. 757)

Additional Related
Information (p. 757)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following properties. See the Specify Symmetry in the
Mechanical Application section for more information about these properties, their options, and how
they are applied.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method: Options include Geometry Selection and Named Selection.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 755
Symmetry Region

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Geometry: Specify the geometry using geometry selections.

Named Selection: Specify the desired Named Selection.

Definition Scope Mode

Type

Behavior

Apply To

Coordinate System

Symmetry Normal

Periodic Direction

Linear Shift

Suppress

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Symmetry (p. 753).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
• This object is automatically inserted if the model includes symmetry planes defined in DesignModeler
(using the Symmetry or Enclosure feature).

• Manually insert the object using any of the following methods after you highlight the Symmetry
object:

– Select Symmetry Region (or Linear Periodic) on the Symmetry Context Tab.

– Right-click the Symmetry object, on an existing Symmetry Region, Periodic Region, or Cyclic
Region object, or in the Geometry window Insert > Symmetry Region (or Linear Periodic).

• Linear Periodic: The Symmetry Context Tab (as well as the context menus) contains a Linear Periodic
option. When selected, a Symmetry Region object is placed in the Outline with the Type property
automatically set to Linear Periodic.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Symmetry Region

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
756 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 – Linear Periodic

– Cyclic Region

API Reference
See the Symmetry Region section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Symmetry Application

• Symmetry Region

• Symmetry in the Mechanical Application

• Symmetry Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 757
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
758 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Table
A multi-variable table of numeric data can be used to specify a Pressure, Temperature, or Thermal
Condition load for the Mechanical APDL solver. Tables can be imported from a delimited text file or
entered manually.

• A table must include at least one independent or primary variable. These variables represent measurable
quantities such as coordinates, time, and temperature.

• A table must include at least one dependent variable. These variables represent real physical quantities
(such as pressure or temperature) whose values depend on those of the independent variables in
the table.

Note:

Temperature can be either an independent or dependent variable, depending on the type

of analysis and whether its value is tied to that of another variable (such as coordinates
or time).

These variables are represented by columns of numeric data in a table. Their values are entered in the
rows of the table.

Note:

• Tables are only supported for the Mechanical APDL solver.

• The rows and columns of data in a table can be in any order. Table data is sent to the
solver with the required sorting.

• Tables can include either cartesian coordinates (X, Y, Z) or cylindrical coordinates (X, Theta,
Z), but not both.

• Mechanical automatically converts table values into the unit system that is selected for
the model.

• The length of a table is limited only by your computing resources. However, the table
chart display will be slow for large data sets.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 759
Table

Object
Properties (p. 760)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 761)

Insertion
Methods (p. 761)

Right-click
Options (p. 762)

Additional
Information (p. 762)

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object includes the following categories and properties.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Table Information Columns: Read-only property displaying the total number of columns
contained in the table.

Rows: Read-only property displaying the total number of rows

contained in the table.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
760 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Imported Variables: This property is visible when you import a table
from a file. It is a read-only property that displays the total number
of imported variables (that is, columns in the source data file).

Manually-entered Variables: This property is visible when you

manually create a table, add variables to an imported table, or create
a table using an API. It is a read-only property that displays the total
number of variables (columns) that you manually added to the table.
MAPDL Solver In- Send To Solver: Specifies whether the table is defined as an APDL
put scripting variable in the Mechanical APDL solver input file.

Spatial Coordinate System: Defines the type and location of the

coordinate system that is used by the table.

APDL Name: Specifies the name of the table when it is defined as

an APDL variable in the solver input file.
Import Source: Read-only property displaying the path name of the source
file for an imported table.

Refresh Import On: Specifies whether an imported table is reloaded

from the source file before a solution. Select None or Before Solve.
The original import settings for the table are used during a refresh
and data is read in column order.

Imported On: Read-only property displaying the date and time when
the data was imported.

Start Row: Read-only property displaying the line in the source file
where the imported table data begins.

End Row: Read-only property displaying the line in the source file
where the imported table data ends.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Tables (p. 763).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), Figure (p. 241).

Insertion Methods
To create a Table object, you need to either import a source file of data or manually create table data.
Therefore:

• Import table data using the Import from File option. This option is available on the Tables
Context menu or you can right-click the Tables object and select Table > Import from File. An
Open dialog displays for you to select a file.

• Manually specify table data using the Create Table option. This option is available on the Tables
Context menu or you can right-click the Tables object and select Table > Create Table. A Create

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 761
Table

Table dialog then displays for you to select variables, specify units, and enter data into the new
table.

Right-click Options
Table objects have the following right-click options:

• Reimport Table Data. Reimports numeric values from an imported data file.

• Rename. Changes the name of the selected table.

• Delete. Deletes the selected table.

Additional Information
See the following sections for additional information:

• Specifying Tables

• Tables (Group) Object Reference (p. 763)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
762 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Tables (Group)
Contains all table objects. From this group, you can insert Table (p. 759) to specify Pressure, Temperature,
or Thermal Condition loads in table form as dependent variables of temperature, time and/or one or
more spatial coordinates (X, Y, Z, Theta). Table is only supported for the Mechanical APDL solver.

Object
Properties (p. 763)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 763)

Insertion
Methods (p. 763)

Right-click
Options (p. 764)

Additional
Information (p. 764)

Object Properties
This object has no associated properties.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Table (p. 759), Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), Figure (p. 241).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Model (p. 533) object:

• Click the Tables option on the Model Context tab.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 763
Tables (Group)

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window Insert >Tables..

Note:

Only one Tables object can be specified in an analysis.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include
Table > Import from File or Create Table. Delete is available if no child Table objects are present.

Additional Information
See the Specifying Tables section for the steps to create tables, edit table data, display tables, plot de-
pendent and independent variables, and perform other table operations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
764 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Thermal Point Mass
Represents the heat from surrounding objects.

Object
Properties (p. 765)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 766)

Insertion
Methods (p. 767)

Right-click
Options (p. 767)

API
Reference (p. 767)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 767)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 765
Thermal Point Mass

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method - Specify as Geometry Selection (default) or Named
Selection or Remote Point (only available when a user-defined Remote
Point exists in the tree).
Geometry - Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selec-
tion. Displays the type of geometry (face, edge, vertex) and the number
of geometric entities (for example: 1 Face, 2 Edges) to which the boundary
has been applied using the selection tools. Use selection filters to pick
geometry, click in the Geometry field, then click Apply. The Remote At-
tachment option is the required Applied By property (see below) setting
if the geometry scoping is to a single face or multiple faces, a single edge
or multiple edges, or multiple vertices.
Named Selection - Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Named
Selection. This field provides a drop-down list of available user–defined
Named Selections.
Remote Points - Visible when the Scoping Method is set to Remote Point.
This field provides a drop-down list of available user–defined Remote Point.
Applied By - Specify as Remote Attachment (default) or Direct Attach-
ment.
Coordinate System - Available when the Applied By property is set to
Remote Attachment. Allows you to assign the Thermal Point Mass to a
local coordinate system if previously defined using one or more Coordinate
System objects. The Thermal Point Mass is automatically rotated into the
selected coordinate system if that coordinate system differs from the global
coordinate system.

The individual coordinate properties, X/Y/Z, are available when the Applied
By property is set to Remote Attachment. Define coordinate origins directly.
These properties can be designated as a parameter.

• X Coordinate

• Y Coordinate

• Z Coordinate

Location - Available when the Applied By property is set to Remote At-

tachment. Allows you to change the location of the load. Once relocated,
click in the Location field and then click Apply.
Definition Thermal Capacitance - Can be designated as a parameter.
Suppressed
Behavior
Pinball Region

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
766 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Geometry (p. 265) object or Body (p. 55) object:

• Select the Thermal Point Mass option on the Geometry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Geometry (p. 265) object, Body object, or in the Geometry window and select
Insert > Thermal Point Mass.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Thermal Point Mass

– Commands (APDL)

• Promote Remote Point (Remote Attachment only)

API Reference
See the Thermal Point Mass section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Thermal Point Mass

• Coordinate Systems

• Geometry Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 767
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
768 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Thickness
Defines variable Thickness properties on selected faces or surface bodies that are scoped to it. When
you scope a Thickness object to one or more surface bodies, either by Geometry Selection or using
a Named Selection, the application automatically updates the Thickness property of the corresponding
surface bodies.

Important:

This object overwrites the Thickness property value of the Surface Body (p. 55) object.

Object Properties (p. 769)

Tree Dependencies (p. 770)

Insertion Methods (p. 770)

Thickness Display
Options (p. 771)

Right-click Options (p. 771)

API Reference (p. 772)

Additional Related
Information (p. 772)

Object Properties
The Details properties for this object include:

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Geometry: Displays when the Scoping Method property is set to

Geometry Selection. In this case, use selection filters to pick
geometry, click in the Geometry field, then click Apply.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 769
Thickness

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Named Selection: Displays if the Scoping Method property is set
to Named Selection. Select a Named Selection from the available
drop-down list.
Definition Scope Mode: Read-only indication of either Manual or Automatic.

Suppressed

Thickness

Offset Type
Tabular Data - Independent Variable
appears if Thick-
ness is set to Tabu- Coordinate System
lar Data.
Function - appears Unit System: Read-only indication of the active unit system.
if Thickness is set
to a function. Angular Measure: Read-only indication of the angular measure used
to evaluate trigonometric functions.
Graph Controls - Number of Segments
appears if Thick-
ness is set to a Range Minimum
function.
Range Maximum

Note:

The above description applies to a Thickness object that you manually insert into the tree.
If you import thickness for a surface body from a CAD application, Mechanical automatically
adds a Thickness object to the Surface Body object. This object provides certain read-only
properties in the Scope and Definition categories. Use the context (right-click) menu option
Make Thickness Manual to make the properties active.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Geometry (p. 265).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Geometry (p. 265) object:

• Select the Thickness option from the Geometry Context Tab.

• Right-click the Geometry (p. 265) object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Thick-
ness.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
770 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Thickness Display Options
In the Geometry window, the application draws the thickness value you specify in the Thickness
property when you 1) select the Show Mesh option and the Thick Shells and Beams option, 2) when
you have the Mesh object selected, or 3) when you have a result selected. An example of this display
is shown below. As illustrated, there is a Surface Body with no thickness and a Thickness object selected
with a Thickness property value of 20mm displayed using the Show Mesh and Thick Shells and Beams
options.

Important:

This display feature is not supported when you 1) scope the Thickness object to Elements
and 2) specify the Thickness property using the Tabular or Function options.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Element Orientation

– Point Mass

– Distributed Mass

– Surface Coating

– Thickness

– Layered Section (p. 437)

• Suppress/Unsuppress

• Search Faces with Multiple Thicknesses

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 771
Thickness

API Reference
See the Thickness section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Specifying Surface Body Thickness

• Geometry Context Tab

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
772 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Through Crack
Inserts a through crack into a solid body.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 773
Through Crack

Object Properties (p. 774)

Tree Dependencies (p. 776)

Insertion Methods (p. 777)

Right-click Options (p. 777)

API Reference (p. 777)

Additional Related Information (p. 777)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
774 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Source: Read-only property set to Analytical Crack

Scoping Method: Read-only property set to Geometry Selection.

Geometry: Use the Body selection filter to pick a solid body, click
in the Geometry field, then click Apply.
Definition Crack ID: A read-only property that displays a unique system
generated identification value. The application uses this identifier
when creating solution identifiers for fracture parameters.

Coordinate System: Specifies the user-defined coordinate system

that defines the orientation of the crack. The Y axis of the specified
coordinate system must be directed towards the normal of the crack
plane and the crack plane always lies in the X-Z plane of the specified
coordinate system.

Crack Shape: Read-only property set to Through.

Start Width: Specifies the width at the start of the crack. Enter a
value greater than 0.

End Width: Specifies the width at the end of the crack. Enter a value
greater than 0.

Mid Width: Specifies the width at the mid-point of the start and
end of the crack. Enter a value greater than 0.

Depth: Specifies the depth of the crack. Enter a value greater than
0.

Mesh Method: This is a read-only property set to Tetrahedrons,

the only supported method.

Largest Contour Radius: Specifies the largest contour radius for the
crack shape. Enter a value greater than 0. You can parameterize this
property.

Growth Rate: This property specifies the factor with which the mesh
layers will grow along the radius of the crack. Specify a value greater
than 1. The default value is 1.2. The recommended value is equal
to or greater than 1.1.

Front Element Size: This property is specifies the element size for
the crack front. The default value is computed using crack length.
Specify a value greater than 0.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 775
Through Crack

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Mesh Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for the
crack shape. The value you enter must be equal to or greater than
1. The default setting is 6.

Note:

The maximum number of mesh contours the Geo-

metry window can display is 100. However, you can
specify a higher value and the application will
process it accordingly.

Solution Contours: Specifies the number of mesh contours for which

you want to compute the fracture result parameters. The value you
enter must be less than or equal to the value of Mesh Contours,
and cannot be greater than 99. By default, the value is Match Mesh
Contours, indicating the number of Solution Contours is equal to
the number of Mesh Contours. Entering 0 resets the value to Match
Mesh Contours.

Suppressed: Toggles suppression of the Through Crack object. The

default is No. The application automatically suppresses the crack
object if the scoped body becomes suppressed.
Buffer Zone Scale This category includes the following properties:
Factors
• X Scale Factor

• Y Scale Factor

• Z Scale Factor

These properties control the size of the buffer zone in the X, Y, and
Z directions, relative to the dimensions of the crack. For each scaling
parameter, use the slider to set a value from 2 to 50. The default is
2. The maximum dimension among the three directions of the crack
is multiplied by the corresponding scale factors to create a buffer
zone.
Named Selections Named Selections are created automatically when the fracture mesh
Creation is generated. These Named Selections are a special type of Named
Selection. For more information about this category and its
properties, see the Defining a Through Crack section as well as the
Special Handling of Named Selections for Crack Objects section. For
information about Named Selections in general, refer to Named
Selections in the Mechanical Object Reference (p. 541).

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Fracture (p. 243).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Commands (p. 91), Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
776 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Insertion Methods
Select the Fracture (p. 243) object and select the Through Crack option from the Crack group on the
Fracture Context Tab. You can also right-click the Fracture object and select the crack from the menu.
Any currently inserted cracks also provide this right-click menu.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert >

– Arbitrary Crack

– Semi-Elliptical Crack

– Elliptical Crack

– Ring Crack

– Corner Crack

– Edge Crack

– Through Crack

– Cylindrical Crack

– Pre-Meshed Crack

– Commands

• Generate All Crack Meshes

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Through Crack section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Defining a Through Crack

• Fracture Analysis

• Fracture Meshing

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 777
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
778 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Transforms
Houses all of the part transformations that you create.

Object Properties (p. 779)

Tree Dependencies (p. 780)

Insertion Methods (p. 780)

Right-click Options (p. 780)

API Reference (p. 780)

Additional Related
Information (p. 780)

Object Properties
The Details Pane properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Transform Mesh: Options include Yes (default) and No. Controls whether the
application automatically transforms the mesh of your transformed parts. Setting
this property to No instructs the application to clear the mesh of your transformed
parts when updated.

Regenerate Contacts: Options include Yes and No (default). This property controls
whether the application automatically generates contact on your transformed parts.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 779
Transforms

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Object: Comment (p. 97).

Insertion Methods
• Select the Model object and then select the Part Transform option on the Model Context Tab.

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window and select Insert > Part Transform.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Part Transform

• Show All Bodies

• Invert Visibility

• Transform

• Suppress/Unsuppress

API Reference
See the Part Transform Group section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

Specifying Part Transformations.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
780 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Validation
Evaluates the quality of mapping across source and target meshes. It provides quantitative measures
that help identify regions on the target where the mapping failed to provide an accurate estimate of
the source data. You can add validation objects under the Imported Element Orientation (p. 353), Imported
Load (p. 359), Imported Thickness (p. 391), or Imported Trace (p. 399) objects.

Object
Properties (p. 782)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 783)

Insertion
Methods (p. 783)

Right-click
Options (p. 783)

API
Reference (p. 783)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 783)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 781
Validation

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition File Identifier: Specify the file identifier(s) from parent object. This property is only
available when data is imported through the External Data system.

Layer (Imported Trace (p. 399) only): Specify the layer from the PCB layout.

Row: The row of the parent worksheet.

Data: The data type for the imported load.

Component: The vector component (X, Y, Z).

Complex Component: The real/imaginary component for complex loads.

Shell Face: Specify the top/bottom for loads applied to shells.

Settings Type: Specify Reverse Validation, Distance Based Average Comparison, Source
Value, or Undefined Points.

Note:

Not all options are available when validating Imported Trace or Impor-
ted Heat Generation.

Number of Points: Available when Distance Based Average Comparison is

selected. Specifies how many points to use in the distance based average mapping
calculations.

Output Type: Specify either Relative Difference or Absolute Difference. (This is

not displayed for the Source Value or Undefined Points types.)
Graphics Display: Specify either Scaled Spheres, Colored Spheres, Colored Points, Con-
Controls tours, or Isolines (Isolines are only available for Source Value Output Type when
element mesh data is provided)

Line Thickness: Available when Display is set to Isolines. Control the thickness
of the isolines by selecting Single, Double, or Triple.

Scale: Specify scale multiplier for increasing and decreasing sphere sizes. Not
displayed for Colored Points.

Display Minimum: Appears if object state is solved. Graphics display will use this
value to show only items above this threshold. Must be greater than the Minimum
and less than the Maximum property. (This is not displayed for the Undefined
Points type.)

Display Maximum: Appears if object state is solved. Graphics display will use this
value to only show items below this threshold. Must be greater than Minimum

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
782 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
and less than Maximum property. (This is not displayed for the Undefined Points
type.)

Display In Parent: Graphics items can be overlaid on parent objects when this
item is set to On.

Legend Divisions: Control how many contour colors to use in displaying graphics
data. (This is not displayed for the Undefined Points type.)
Statistics Minimum: Read-only minimum value for entire mapped points. (This is not
displayed for the Undefined Points type.)

Maximum: Read-only maximum value for entire mapped points. (This is not
displayed for the Undefined Points type.)

Number Of Items: Read-only number of currently displayed items

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Objects: Imported Element Orientation (p. 353), Various Imported Load
Types (p. 359), Imported Thickness (p. 391), or Imported Trace (p. 399) objects.

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Image (p. 283), and Figure (p. 241).

Insertion Methods
Select the imported object and:

• Select the Validation option on the Imported Fields Context tab.

• Right-click and select Insert > Validation.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Analyze: Executes the validation.

• Export: Exports the data to a text file in tabbed delimited format.

• Clear Generated Data

API Reference
See the Mapping Validation section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Imported Load (p. 359) Object Reference

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 783
Validation

• Imported Thickness (p. 391) Object Reference

• Mapping Validation

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
784 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Velocity
Applies velocity as an initial condition for use in a Transient Structural analysis or an Explicit Dynamics
analysis.

Velocity Object for Transient Object

Properties (p. 786)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 787)

Insertion
Methods (p. 787)

Right-click
Options (p. 787)

API
Reference (p. 787)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 787)

Velocity Object for Explicit Dynamics

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 785
Velocity

Object Properties
The Details view properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Scope Scoping Method

Geometry – Appears if Scoping Method is set to Geometry Selection.

In this case, use selection filters to pick geometry, click the Geometry
field, then click Apply.

Named Selection – Appears if Scoping Method is set to Named Selec-

tion.
Definition Input Type - Choose Angular Velocity, Drop Height, or Velocity.

Define By

Total– Magnitude; appears if Define By is set to Vector.

Direction- Appears if Define By is set to Vector.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
786 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Coordinate System – Available list; appears if Define By is set to Com-
ponents.

X, Y, Z Component – Values; appears if Define By is set to Components.

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Initial Conditions (p. 407).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting Initial Conditions object:

• Click Velocity option on the Initial Conditions Context tab.

• Right-click the Initial Conditions object or in the Geometry window Insert > Velocity.

Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Insert > Velocity/Angular Velocity/Drop Height

• Suppress

API Reference
See the Initial Condition section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for additional information:

• Define Initial Conditions

• Transient Structural Analysis

• Explicit Dynamics Analysis

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 787
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
788 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Virtual Cell
Defines an individual face or edge group, defined manually or automatically. Virtual Cell objects do
not appear in the tree.

Object Properties (p. 789)

Creation Options (p. 789)
API Reference (p. 789)
Additional Related Information (p. 790)

Object Properties
The properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Cell Class - Read-only indication of cell class for selected Virtual Cell object.
Geometry - Read-only indication of components that make up the Virtual Cell
object.
Suppressed - Read-only indication of suppression status of selected Virtual
Cell object.
Project to Underlying Geometry - Defines whether the mesh should project
to the original underlying geometry (Yes) or faceted geometry (No).

Creation Options
• For automatic creation of virtual cell regions, a Virtual Cell object is created for each region that
meets the criterion specified in the Details view of the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object.

• For manual creation of Virtual Cell objects, highlight the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object, select one
or more faces or one or more edges in the Geometry window, and then do one of the following:

– Choose Merge Cells on the Virtual Topology Context Tab.

– Right-click the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object and select Insert > Virtual Cell from the context
menu.

– Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Virtual Cell from the context menu.

API Reference
See the Virtual Cell section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 789
Virtual Cell

Additional Related Information

• Virtual Topology Overview

• Virtual Topology Context

• Meshing: Virtual Topology (in the Meshing help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
790 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Virtual Hard Vertex
Defines a virtual hard vertex, which allows you to define a hard point according to your cursor location
on a face, and then use that hard point in a split face operation. Virtual Hard Vertex objects do not
appear in the tree.

Object Properties (p. 791)

Creation Options (p. 791)
API Reference (p. 791)
Additional Related Information (p. 791)

Object Properties
The properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Geometry - Read-only indication showing that one vertex makes up the Virtual
Hard Vertex object.
Suppressed - Read-only indication of suppression status of selected Virtual
Hard Vertex object.
Virtual Hard Vertex Location - Read-only indication of the XYZ location of
the Virtual Hard Vertex object.

Creation Options
Highlight the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object. Select the face to split in the Geometry window. Position
your cursor on the face where you want the hard point to be located, left-click, and do one the following:

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Virtual Hard Vertex at + from the context
menu.

• Choose Hard Vertex at + on the Virtual Topology Context Tab.

API Reference
See the Virtual Topology section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

• Virtual Topology Overview

• Virtual Topology Context

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 791
Virtual Hard Vertex

• Meshing: Virtual Topology (in the Meshing help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
792 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Virtual Split Edge
Defines a virtual split edge. Virtual Split Edge objects do not appear in the tree.

Object Properties (p. 793)

Creation Options (p. 793)
API Reference (p. 793)
Additional Related Information (p. 794)

Object Properties
The properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Geometry - Read-only indication of components that make up the Virtual
Split Edge object.
Suppressed - Read-only indication of suppression status of selected Virtual
Split Edge object.
Split Ratio - Defines the location of the split for the selected Virtual Split
Edge object. Represented as a fraction of the total length of the edge. The
default is 0.5.

Creation Options
Highlight the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object, select the edge to split in the Geometry window, and
then do the following:

• To define the split location according to your cursor location on the edge, right-click in the Geometry
window and select Insert > Virtual Split Edge at + from the context menu, or choose Split Edge
at + on the Virtual Topology Context Tab.

• To define the split without specifying the location, right-click in the Geometry window and select
Insert > Virtual Split Edge from the context menu, or choose Split Edge on the Virtual Topology
Context Tab. By default the split ratio will be set to 0.5, but it can be changed later using the Virtual
Topology Properties dialog.

API Reference
See the Virtual Topology section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 793
Virtual Split Edge

Additional Related Information

• Virtual Topology Overview

• Virtual Topology Context

• Meshing: Virtual Topology (in the Meshing help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
794 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Virtual Split Face
Defines a virtual split face. Virtual Split Face objects do not appear in the tree.

Object Properties (p. 795)

Creation Options (p. 795)
API Reference (p. 795)
Additional Related Information (p. 796)

Object Properties
The properties for this object include the following.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
General Geometry - Read-only indication of components that make up the Virtual
Split Face object.
Suppressed - Read-only indication of suppression status of selected Virtual
Split Face object.
Vertices - Read-only indication showing that two vertices were selected.

Creation Options
Highlight the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object, select two vertices on the face that you want to split in
the Geometry window, and then do one of the following:

• Choose Split Face at Vertices on the Virtual Topology Context Tab.

• Right-click the Virtual Topology (p. 797) object and select Insert > Virtual Split Face at Vertices
from the context menu.

• Right-click in the Geometry window and select Insert > Virtual Split Face at Vertices from the
context menu.

Note:

Virtual Hard Vertex (p. 791) objects can be defined for use in split face operations.

API Reference
See the Virtual Topology section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 795
Virtual Split Face

Additional Related Information

• Virtual Topology Overview

• Virtual Topology Context

• Meshing: Virtual Topology (in the Meshing help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
796 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Virtual Topology
Represents all definitions of face or edge groups, and all definitions of virtual split edges, virtual split
faces, and virtual hard vertices within a model. Each definition is represented in a Virtual Cell (p. 789),
Virtual Split Edge (p. 793), Virtual Split Face (p. 795), or Virtual Hard Vertex (p. 791) object, respectively.
Virtual Cell, Virtual Split Edge, Virtual Split Face, and Virtual Hard Vertex objects do not appear in
the Outline.

Object
Properties (p. 798)

Tree
Dependencies (p. 798)

Insertion
Methods (p. 798)

Right-click
Options (p. 799)

API
Reference (p. 799)

Additional
Related
Information (p. 799)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 797
Virtual Topology

Object Properties
The Details Pane for this object include the following properties. The Lock position of dependent
edge splits setting applies to virtual split edge behavior.

Category Properties/Options/Descriptions
Definition Method
Behavior
Custom Gauss Curvature Angle
Feature Angle
Advanced Custom Aspect Ratio
Contact Angle
Edge Angle
Shared Boundary Ratio
Advanced Generate on Update
Simplify Faces
Merge Face Edges
Lock position of dependent edge splits
Statistics Virtual Faces - Read-only indication
Virtual Edges - Read-only indication
Virtual Split Edges - Read-only indication
Virtual Split Faces - Read-only indication
Virtual Hard Vertices - Read-only indication
Total Virtual Entities - Read-only indication

Tree Dependencies
• Valid Parent Tree Object: Model (p. 533).

• Valid Child Tree Objects: Comment (p. 97), Figure (p. 241), and Image (p. 283).

Insertion Methods
Use any of the following methods after highlighting the Model object:

• Select Virtual Topology on the Model Context tab.

• Right-click the Model object or in the Geometry window Insert > Virtual Topology.

Note:

Only one Virtual Topology object is valid per Model.

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
798 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Right-click Options
In addition to common right-click options (p. 2), relevant right-click options for this object include:

• Generate Virtual Cells

• sGenerate Virtual Cells on Selected Entities

API Reference
See the Virtual Topology section of the ACT API Reference Guide for specific scripting information.

Additional Related Information

See the following sections for more information:

• Virtual Topology Overview

• Virtual Topology Context Tab

• Meshing: Virtual Topology (in the Meshing help)

Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 799
 Release 2024 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
800 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.